--- a/runtime/doc/Makefile
+++ b/runtime/doc/Makefile
@@ -16,6 +16,7 @@ include ../../src/auto/config.mk
 DOCS = \
 	arabic.txt \
 	autocmd.txt \
+	builtin.txt \
 	change.txt \
 	channel.txt \
 	cmdline.txt \
@@ -161,6 +162,7 @@ DOCS = \
 HTMLS = \
 	arabic.html \
 	autocmd.html \
+	builtin.html \
 	change.html \
 	channel.html \
 	cmdline.html \

new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/runtime/doc/builtin.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,10125 @@
+*builtin.txt*	For Vim version 8.2.  Last change: 2021 Dec 27
+
+
+		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
+
+
+Builtin functions				*builtin-functions*
+
+Note: Expression evaluation can be disabled at compile time.  If this has been
+done, the builtin functions are not available.  See |+eval| and
+|no-eval-feature|.
+
+1. Overview				|builtin-function-list|
+2. Details				|builtin-function-details|
+3. Feature list				|feature-list|
+4. Matching a pattern in a String	|string-match|
+
+==============================================================================
+1. Overview					*builtin-function-list*
+
+Use CTRL-] on the function name to jump to the full explanation.
+
+USAGE				RESULT	DESCRIPTION	~
+
+abs({expr})			Float or Number  absolute value of {expr}
+acos({expr})			Float	arc cosine of {expr}
+add({object}, {item})		List/Blob   append {item} to {object}
+and({expr}, {expr})		Number	bitwise AND
+append({lnum}, {text})		Number	append {text} below line {lnum}
+appendbufline({expr}, {lnum}, {text})
+				Number	append {text} below line {lnum}
+					in buffer {expr}
+argc([{winid}])			Number	number of files in the argument list
+argidx()			Number	current index in the argument list
+arglistid([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]]) Number	argument list id
+argv({nr} [, {winid}])		String	{nr} entry of the argument list
+argv([-1, {winid}])		List	the argument list
+asin({expr})			Float	arc sine of {expr}
+assert_beeps({cmd})		Number	assert {cmd} causes a beep
+assert_equal({exp}, {act} [, {msg}])
+				Number	assert {exp} is equal to {act}
+assert_equalfile({fname-one}, {fname-two} [, {msg}])
+				Number	assert file contents are equal
+assert_exception({error} [, {msg}])
+				Number	assert {error} is in v:exception
+assert_fails({cmd} [, {error} [, {msg} [, {lnum} [, {context}]]]])
+				Number	assert {cmd} fails
+assert_false({actual} [, {msg}])
+				Number	assert {actual} is false
+assert_inrange({lower}, {upper}, {actual} [, {msg}])
+				Number	assert {actual} is inside the range
+assert_match({pat}, {text} [, {msg}])
+				Number	assert {pat} matches {text}
+assert_nobeep({cmd})		Number	assert {cmd} does not cause a beep
+assert_notequal({exp}, {act} [, {msg}])
+				Number	assert {exp} is not equal {act}
+assert_notmatch({pat}, {text} [, {msg}])
+				Number	assert {pat} not matches {text}
+assert_report({msg})		Number	report a test failure
+assert_true({actual} [, {msg}])	Number	assert {actual} is true
+atan({expr})			Float	arc tangent of {expr}
+atan2({expr1}, {expr2})		Float	arc tangent of {expr1} / {expr2}
+balloon_gettext()		String	current text in the balloon
+balloon_show({expr})		none	show {expr} inside the balloon
+balloon_split({msg})		List	split {msg} as used for a balloon
+blob2list({blob})		List	convert {blob} into a list of numbers
+browse({save}, {title}, {initdir}, {default})
+				String	put up a file requester
+browsedir({title}, {initdir})	String	put up a directory requester
+bufadd({name})			Number	add a buffer to the buffer list
+bufexists({buf})		Number	|TRUE| if buffer {buf} exists
+buflisted({buf})		Number	|TRUE| if buffer {buf} is listed
+bufload({buf})			Number	load buffer {buf} if not loaded yet
+bufloaded({buf})		Number	|TRUE| if buffer {buf} is loaded
+bufname([{buf}])		String	Name of the buffer {buf}
+bufnr([{buf} [, {create}]])	Number	Number of the buffer {buf}
+bufwinid({buf})			Number	window ID of buffer {buf}
+bufwinnr({buf})			Number	window number of buffer {buf}
+byte2line({byte})		Number	line number at byte count {byte}
+byteidx({expr}, {nr})		Number	byte index of {nr}'th char in {expr}
+byteidxcomp({expr}, {nr})	Number	byte index of {nr}'th char in {expr}
+call({func}, {arglist} [, {dict}])
+				any	call {func} with arguments {arglist}
+ceil({expr})			Float	round {expr} up
+ch_canread({handle})		Number	check if there is something to read
+ch_close({handle})		none	close {handle}
+ch_close_in({handle})		none	close in part of {handle}
+ch_evalexpr({handle}, {expr} [, {options}])
+				any	evaluate {expr} on JSON {handle}
+ch_evalraw({handle}, {string} [, {options}])
+				any	evaluate {string} on raw {handle}
+ch_getbufnr({handle}, {what})	Number	get buffer number for {handle}/{what}
+ch_getjob({channel})		Job	get the Job of {channel}
+ch_info({handle})		String	info about channel {handle}
+ch_log({msg} [, {handle}])	none	write {msg} in the channel log file
+ch_logfile({fname} [, {mode}])	none	start logging channel activity
+ch_open({address} [, {options}])
+				Channel	open a channel to {address}
+ch_read({handle} [, {options}]) String	read from {handle}
+ch_readblob({handle} [, {options}])
+				Blob	read Blob from {handle}
+ch_readraw({handle} [, {options}])
+				String	read raw from {handle}
+ch_sendexpr({handle}, {expr} [, {options}])
+				any	send {expr} over JSON {handle}
+ch_sendraw({handle}, {expr} [, {options}])
+				any	send {expr} over raw {handle}
+ch_setoptions({handle}, {options})
+				none	set options for {handle}
+ch_status({handle} [, {options}])
+				String	status of channel {handle}
+changenr()			Number	current change number
+char2nr({expr} [, {utf8}])	Number	ASCII/UTF-8 value of first char in {expr}
+charclass({string})		Number	character class of {string}
+charcol({expr})			Number	column number of cursor or mark
+charidx({string}, {idx} [, {countcc}])
+				Number	char index of byte {idx} in {string}
+chdir({dir})			String	change current working directory
+cindent({lnum})			Number	C indent for line {lnum}
+clearmatches([{win}])		none	clear all matches
+col({expr})			Number	column byte index of cursor or mark
+complete({startcol}, {matches}) none	set Insert mode completion
+complete_add({expr})		Number	add completion match
+complete_check()		Number	check for key typed during completion
+complete_info([{what}])		Dict	get current completion information
+confirm({msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]])
+				Number	number of choice picked by user
+copy({expr})			any	make a shallow copy of {expr}
+cos({expr})			Float	cosine of {expr}
+cosh({expr})			Float	hyperbolic cosine of {expr}
+count({comp}, {expr} [, {ic} [, {start}]])
+				Number	count how many {expr} are in {comp}
+cscope_connection([{num}, {dbpath} [, {prepend}]])
+				Number	checks existence of cscope connection
+cursor({lnum}, {col} [, {off}])
+				Number	move cursor to {lnum}, {col}, {off}
+cursor({list})			Number	move cursor to position in {list}
+debugbreak({pid})		Number	interrupt process being debugged
+deepcopy({expr} [, {noref}])	any	make a full copy of {expr}
+delete({fname} [, {flags}])	Number	delete the file or directory {fname}
+deletebufline({buf}, {first} [, {last}])
+				Number	delete lines from buffer {buf}
+did_filetype()			Number	|TRUE| if FileType autocmd event used
+diff_filler({lnum})		Number	diff filler lines about {lnum}
+diff_hlID({lnum}, {col})	Number	diff highlighting at {lnum}/{col}
+digraph_get({chars})		String	get the |digraph| of {chars}
+digraph_getlist([{listall}])	List	get all |digraph|s
+digraph_set({chars}, {digraph})	Boolean	register |digraph|
+digraph_setlist({digraphlist})	Boolean	register multiple |digraph|s
+echoraw({expr})			none	output {expr} as-is
+empty({expr})			Number	|TRUE| if {expr} is empty
+environ()			Dict	return environment variables
+escape({string}, {chars})	String	escape {chars} in {string} with '\'
+eval({string})			any	evaluate {string} into its value
+eventhandler()			Number	|TRUE| if inside an event handler
+executable({expr})		Number	1 if executable {expr} exists
+execute({command})		String	execute {command} and get the output
+exepath({expr})			String	full path of the command {expr}
+exists({expr})			Number	|TRUE| if {expr} exists
+exists_compiled({expr})		Number	|TRUE| if {expr} exists at compile time
+exp({expr})			Float	exponential of {expr}
+expand({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]])
+				any	expand special keywords in {expr}
+expandcmd({expr})		String	expand {expr} like with `:edit`
+extend({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}])
+				List/Dict insert items of {expr2} into {expr1}
+extendnew({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}])
+				List/Dict like |extend()| but creates a new
+					List or Dictionary
+feedkeys({string} [, {mode}])	Number	add key sequence to typeahead buffer
+filereadable({file})		Number	|TRUE| if {file} is a readable file
+filewritable({file})		Number	|TRUE| if {file} is a writable file
+filter({expr1}, {expr2})	List/Dict/Blob/String
+					remove items from {expr1} where
+					{expr2} is 0
+finddir({name} [, {path} [, {count}]])
+				String	find directory {name} in {path}
+findfile({name} [, {path} [, {count}]])
+				String	find file {name} in {path}
+flatten({list} [, {maxdepth}])	List	flatten {list} up to {maxdepth} levels
+flattennew({list} [, {maxdepth}])
+				List	flatten a copy of {list}
+float2nr({expr})		Number	convert Float {expr} to a Number
+floor({expr})			Float	round {expr} down
+fmod({expr1}, {expr2})		Float	remainder of {expr1} / {expr2}
+fnameescape({fname})		String	escape special characters in {fname}
+fnamemodify({fname}, {mods})	String	modify file name
+foldclosed({lnum})		Number	first line of fold at {lnum} if closed
+foldclosedend({lnum})		Number	last line of fold at {lnum} if closed
+foldlevel({lnum})		Number	fold level at {lnum}
+foldtext()			String	line displayed for closed fold
+foldtextresult({lnum})		String	text for closed fold at {lnum}
+foreground()			Number	bring the Vim window to the foreground
+fullcommand({name})		String	get full command from {name}
+funcref({name} [, {arglist}] [, {dict}])
+				Funcref	reference to function {name}
+function({name} [, {arglist}] [, {dict}])
+				Funcref	named reference to function {name}
+garbagecollect([{atexit}])	none	free memory, breaking cyclic references
+get({list}, {idx} [, {def}])	any	get item {idx} from {list} or {def}
+get({dict}, {key} [, {def}])	any	get item {key} from {dict} or {def}
+get({func}, {what})		any	get property of funcref/partial {func}
+getbufinfo([{buf}])		List	information about buffers
+getbufline({buf}, {lnum} [, {end}])
+				List	lines {lnum} to {end} of buffer {buf}
+getbufvar({buf}, {varname} [, {def}])
+				any	variable {varname} in buffer {buf}
+getchangelist([{buf}])		List	list of change list items
+getchar([expr])			Number or String
+					get one character from the user
+getcharmod()			Number	modifiers for the last typed character
+getcharpos({expr})		List	position of cursor, mark, etc.
+getcharsearch()			Dict	last character search
+getcharstr([expr])		String	get one character from the user
+getcmdline()			String	return the current command-line
+getcmdpos()			Number	return cursor position in command-line
+getcmdtype()			String	return current command-line type
+getcmdwintype()			String	return current command-line window type
+getcompletion({pat}, {type} [, {filtered}])
+				List	list of cmdline completion matches
+getcurpos([{winnr}])		List	position of the cursor
+getcursorcharpos([{winnr}])	List	character position of the cursor
+getcwd([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]])	String	get the current working directory
+getenv({name})			String	return environment variable
+getfontname([{name}])		String	name of font being used
+getfperm({fname})		String	file permissions of file {fname}
+getfsize({fname})		Number	size in bytes of file {fname}
+getftime({fname})		Number	last modification time of file
+getftype({fname})		String	description of type of file {fname}
+getimstatus()			Number	|TRUE| if the IME status is active
+getjumplist([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]])
+				List	list of jump list items
+getline({lnum})			String	line {lnum} of current buffer
+getline({lnum}, {end})		List	lines {lnum} to {end} of current buffer
+getloclist({nr})		List	list of location list items
+getloclist({nr}, {what})	Dict	get specific location list properties
+getmarklist([{buf}])		List	list of global/local marks
+getmatches([{win}])		List	list of current matches
+getmousepos()			Dict	last known mouse position
+getpid()			Number	process ID of Vim
+getpos({expr})			List	position of cursor, mark, etc.
+getqflist()			List	list of quickfix items
+getqflist({what})		Dict	get specific quickfix list properties
+getreg([{regname} [, 1 [, {list}]]])
+				String or List   contents of a register
+getreginfo([{regname}])		Dict	information about a register
+getregtype([{regname}])		String	type of a register
+gettabinfo([{expr}])		List	list of tab pages
+gettabvar({nr}, {varname} [, {def}])
+				any	variable {varname} in tab {nr} or {def}
+gettabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {name} [, {def}])
+				any	{name} in {winnr} in tab page {tabnr}
+gettagstack([{nr}])		Dict	get the tag stack of window {nr}
+gettext({text})			String	lookup translation of {text}
+getwininfo([{winid}])		List	list of info about each window
+getwinpos([{timeout}])		List	X and Y coord in pixels of the Vim window
+getwinposx()			Number	X coord in pixels of the Vim window
+getwinposy()			Number	Y coord in pixels of the Vim window
+getwinvar({nr}, {varname} [, {def}])
+				any	variable {varname} in window {nr}
+glob({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list} [, {alllinks}]]])
+				any	expand file wildcards in {expr}
+glob2regpat({expr})		String	convert a glob pat into a search pat
+globpath({path}, {expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list} [, {alllinks}]]])
+				String	do glob({expr}) for all dirs in {path}
+has({feature} [, {check}])	Number	|TRUE| if feature {feature} supported
+has_key({dict}, {key})		Number	|TRUE| if {dict} has entry {key}
+haslocaldir([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]])
+				Number	|TRUE| if the window executed |:lcd|
+					or |:tcd|
+hasmapto({what} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]])
+				Number	|TRUE| if mapping to {what} exists
+histadd({history}, {item})	Number	add an item to a history
+histdel({history} [, {item}])	Number	remove an item from a history
+histget({history} [, {index}])	String	get the item {index} from a history
+histnr({history})		Number	highest index of a history
+hlID({name})			Number	syntax ID of highlight group {name}
+hlexists({name})		Number	|TRUE| if highlight group {name} exists
+hlget([{name} [, {resolve}]])	List	get highlight group attributes
+hlset({list})			Number	set highlight group attributes
+hostname()			String	name of the machine Vim is running on
+iconv({expr}, {from}, {to})	String	convert encoding of {expr}
+indent({lnum})			Number	indent of line {lnum}
+index({object}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]])
+				Number	index in {object} where {expr} appears
+input({prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]])
+				String	get input from the user
+inputdialog({prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]])
+				String	like input() but in a GUI dialog
+inputlist({textlist})		Number	let the user pick from a choice list
+inputrestore()			Number	restore typeahead
+inputsave()			Number	save and clear typeahead
+inputsecret({prompt} [, {text}]) String	like input() but hiding the text
+insert({object}, {item} [, {idx}]) List	insert {item} in {object} [before {idx}]
+interrupt()			none	interrupt script execution
+invert({expr})			Number	bitwise invert
+isdirectory({directory})	Number	|TRUE| if {directory} is a directory
+isinf({expr})			Number	determine if {expr} is infinity value
+					(positive or negative)
+islocked({expr})		Number	|TRUE| if {expr} is locked
+isnan({expr})			Number	|TRUE| if {expr} is NaN
+items({dict})			List	key-value pairs in {dict}
+job_getchannel({job})		Channel	get the channel handle for {job}
+job_info([{job}])		Dict	get information about {job}
+job_setoptions({job}, {options}) none	set options for {job}
+job_start({command} [, {options}])
+				Job	start a job
+job_status({job})		String	get the status of {job}
+job_stop({job} [, {how}])	Number	stop {job}
+join({list} [, {sep}])		String	join {list} items into one String
+js_decode({string})		any	decode JS style JSON
+js_encode({expr})		String	encode JS style JSON
+json_decode({string})		any	decode JSON
+json_encode({expr})		String	encode JSON
+keys({dict})			List	keys in {dict}
+len({expr})			Number	the length of {expr}
+libcall({lib}, {func}, {arg})	String	call {func} in library {lib} with {arg}
+libcallnr({lib}, {func}, {arg})	Number	idem, but return a Number
+line({expr} [, {winid}])	Number	line nr of cursor, last line or mark
+line2byte({lnum})		Number	byte count of line {lnum}
+lispindent({lnum})		Number	Lisp indent for line {lnum}
+list2blob({list})		Blob	turn {list} of numbers into a Blob
+list2str({list} [, {utf8}])	String	turn {list} of numbers into a String
+listener_add({callback} [, {buf}])
+				Number	add a callback to listen to changes
+listener_flush([{buf}])		none	invoke listener callbacks
+listener_remove({id})		none	remove a listener callback
+localtime()			Number	current time
+log({expr})			Float	natural logarithm (base e) of {expr}
+log10({expr})			Float	logarithm of Float {expr} to base 10
+luaeval({expr} [, {expr}])	any	evaluate |Lua| expression
+map({expr1}, {expr2})		List/Dict/Blob/String
+					change each item in {expr1} to {expr2}
+maparg({name} [, {mode} [, {abbr} [, {dict}]]])
+				String or Dict
+					rhs of mapping {name} in mode {mode}
+mapcheck({name} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]])
+				String	check for mappings matching {name}
+mapnew({expr1}, {expr2})	List/Dict/Blob/String
+					like |map()| but creates a new List or
+					Dictionary
+mapset({mode}, {abbr}, {dict})	none	restore mapping from |maparg()| result
+match({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])
+				Number	position where {pat} matches in {expr}
+matchadd({group}, {pattern} [, {priority} [, {id} [, {dict}]]])
+				Number	highlight {pattern} with {group}
+matchaddpos({group}, {pos} [, {priority} [, {id} [, {dict}]]])
+				Number	highlight positions with {group}
+matcharg({nr})			List	arguments of |:match|
+matchdelete({id} [, {win}])	Number	delete match identified by {id}
+matchend({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])
+				Number	position where {pat} ends in {expr}
+matchfuzzy({list}, {str} [, {dict}])
+				List	fuzzy match {str} in {list}
+matchfuzzypos({list}, {str} [, {dict}])
+				List	fuzzy match {str} in {list}
+matchlist({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])
+				List	match and submatches of {pat} in {expr}
+matchstr({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])
+				String	{count}'th match of {pat} in {expr}
+matchstrpos({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])
+				List	{count}'th match of {pat} in {expr}
+max({expr})			Number	maximum value of items in {expr}
+menu_info({name} [, {mode}])	Dict	get menu item information
+min({expr})			Number	minimum value of items in {expr}
+mkdir({name} [, {path} [, {prot}]])
+				Number	create directory {name}
+mode([expr])			String	current editing mode
+mzeval({expr})			any	evaluate |MzScheme| expression
+nextnonblank({lnum})		Number	line nr of non-blank line >= {lnum}
+nr2char({expr} [, {utf8}])	String	single char with ASCII/UTF-8 value {expr}
+or({expr}, {expr})		Number	bitwise OR
+pathshorten({expr} [, {len}])	String	shorten directory names in a path
+perleval({expr})		any	evaluate |Perl| expression
+popup_atcursor({what}, {options}) Number create popup window near the cursor
+popup_beval({what}, {options})	Number	create popup window for 'ballooneval'
+popup_clear()			none	close all popup windows
+popup_close({id} [, {result}])	none	close popup window {id}
+popup_create({what}, {options}) Number	create a popup window
+popup_dialog({what}, {options}) Number	create a popup window used as a dialog
+popup_filter_menu({id}, {key})  Number	filter for a menu popup window
+popup_filter_yesno({id}, {key}) Number	filter for a dialog popup window
+popup_findinfo()		Number	get window ID of info popup window
+popup_findpreview()		Number	get window ID of preview popup window
+popup_getoptions({id})		Dict	get options of popup window {id}
+popup_getpos({id})		Dict	get position of popup window {id}
+popup_hide({id})		none	hide popup menu {id}
+popup_list()			List	get a list of window IDs of all popups
+popup_locate({row}, {col})	Number	get window ID of popup at position
+popup_menu({what}, {options})	Number	create a popup window used as a menu
+popup_move({id}, {options})	none	set position of popup window {id}
+popup_notification({what}, {options})
+				Number	create a notification popup window
+popup_setoptions({id}, {options})
+				none	set options for popup window {id}
+popup_settext({id}, {text})	none	set the text of popup window {id}
+popup_show({id})		none	unhide popup window {id}
+pow({x}, {y})			Float	{x} to the power of {y}
+prevnonblank({lnum})		Number	line nr of non-blank line <= {lnum}
+printf({fmt}, {expr1}...)	String	format text
+prompt_getprompt({buf})		String	get prompt text
+prompt_setcallback({buf}, {expr}) none	set prompt callback function
+prompt_setinterrupt({buf}, {text}) none	set prompt interrupt function
+prompt_setprompt({buf}, {text}) none	set prompt text
+prop_add({lnum}, {col}, {props})  none	add one text property
+prop_add_list({props}, [[{lnum}, {col}, {end-lnum}, {end-col}], ...])
+				none	add multiple text properties
+prop_clear({lnum} [, {lnum-end} [, {props}]])
+				none	remove all text properties
+prop_find({props} [, {direction}])
+				Dict	search for a text property
+prop_list({lnum} [, {props}])	List	text properties in {lnum}
+prop_remove({props} [, {lnum} [, {lnum-end}]])
+				Number	remove a text property
+prop_type_add({name}, {props})	none	define a new property type
+prop_type_change({name}, {props})
+				none	change an existing property type
+prop_type_delete({name} [, {props}])
+				none	delete a property type
+prop_type_get({name} [, {props}])
+				Dict	get property type values
+prop_type_list([{props}])	List	get list of property types
+pum_getpos()			Dict	position and size of pum if visible
+pumvisible()			Number	whether popup menu is visible
+py3eval({expr})			any	evaluate |python3| expression
+pyeval({expr})			any	evaluate |Python| expression
+pyxeval({expr})			any	evaluate |python_x| expression
+rand([{expr}])			Number	get pseudo-random number
+range({expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]])
+				List	items from {expr} to {max}
+readblob({fname})		Blob	read a |Blob| from {fname}
+readdir({dir} [, {expr} [, {dict}]])
+				List	file names in {dir} selected by {expr}
+readdirex({dir} [, {expr} [, {dict}]])
+				List	file info in {dir} selected by {expr}
+readfile({fname} [, {type} [, {max}]])
+				List	get list of lines from file {fname}
+reduce({object}, {func} [, {initial}])
+				any	reduce {object} using {func}
+reg_executing()			String	get the executing register name
+reg_recording()			String	get the recording register name
+reltime([{start} [, {end}]])	List	get time value
+reltimefloat({time})		Float	turn the time value into a Float
+reltimestr({time})		String	turn time value into a String
+remote_expr({server}, {string} [, {idvar} [, {timeout}]])
+				String	send expression
+remote_foreground({server})	Number	bring Vim server to the foreground
+remote_peek({serverid} [, {retvar}])
+				Number	check for reply string
+remote_read({serverid} [, {timeout}])
+				String	read reply string
+remote_send({server}, {string} [, {idvar}])
+				String	send key sequence
+remote_startserver({name})	none	become server {name}
+remove({list}, {idx} [, {end}])	any/List
+					remove items {idx}-{end} from {list}
+remove({blob}, {idx} [, {end}])	Number/Blob
+					remove bytes {idx}-{end} from {blob}
+remove({dict}, {key})		any	remove entry {key} from {dict}
+rename({from}, {to})		Number	rename (move) file from {from} to {to}
+repeat({expr}, {count})		String	repeat {expr} {count} times
+resolve({filename})		String	get filename a shortcut points to
+reverse({list})			List	reverse {list} in-place
+round({expr})			Float	round off {expr}
+rubyeval({expr})		any	evaluate |Ruby| expression
+screenattr({row}, {col})	Number	attribute at screen position
+screenchar({row}, {col})	Number	character at screen position
+screenchars({row}, {col})	List	List of characters at screen position
+screencol()			Number	current cursor column
+screenpos({winid}, {lnum}, {col}) Dict	screen row and col of a text character
+screenrow()			Number	current cursor row
+screenstring({row}, {col})	String	characters at screen position
+search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout} [, {skip}]]]])
+				Number	search for {pattern}
+searchcount([{options}])	Dict	get or update search stats
+searchdecl({name} [, {global} [, {thisblock}]])
+				Number	search for variable declaration
+searchpair({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [...]]])
+				Number	search for other end of start/end pair
+searchpairpos({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [...]]])
+				List	search for other end of start/end pair
+searchpos({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout} [, {skip}]]]])
+				List	search for {pattern}
+server2client({clientid}, {string})
+				Number	send reply string
+serverlist()			String	get a list of available servers
+setbufline({expr}, {lnum}, {text})
+				Number	set line {lnum} to {text} in buffer
+					{expr}
+setbufvar({buf}, {varname}, {val})
+				none	set {varname} in buffer {buf} to {val}
+setcellwidths({list})		none	set character cell width overrides
+setcharpos({expr}, {list})	Number	set the {expr} position to {list}
+setcharsearch({dict})		Dict	set character search from {dict}
+setcmdpos({pos})		Number	set cursor position in command-line
+setcursorcharpos({list})	Number	move cursor to position in {list}
+setenv({name}, {val})		none	set environment variable
+setfperm({fname}, {mode})	Number	set {fname} file permissions to {mode}
+setline({lnum}, {line})		Number	set line {lnum} to {line}
+setloclist({nr}, {list} [, {action}])
+				Number	modify location list using {list}
+setloclist({nr}, {list}, {action}, {what})
+				Number	modify specific location list props
+setmatches({list} [, {win}])	Number	restore a list of matches
+setpos({expr}, {list})		Number	set the {expr} position to {list}
+setqflist({list} [, {action}])	Number	modify quickfix list using {list}
+setqflist({list}, {action}, {what})
+				Number	modify specific quickfix list props
+setreg({n}, {v} [, {opt}])	Number	set register to value and type
+settabvar({nr}, {varname}, {val}) none	set {varname} in tab page {nr} to {val}
+settabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}, {val})
+				none	set {varname} in window {winnr} in tab
+					page {tabnr} to {val}
+settagstack({nr}, {dict} [, {action}])
+				Number	modify tag stack using {dict}
+setwinvar({nr}, {varname}, {val}) none	set {varname} in window {nr} to {val}
+sha256({string})		String	SHA256 checksum of {string}
+shellescape({string} [, {special}])
+				String	escape {string} for use as shell
+					command argument
+shiftwidth([{col}])		Number	effective value of 'shiftwidth'
+sign_define({name} [, {dict}])	Number	define or update a sign
+sign_define({list})		List	define or update a list of signs
+sign_getdefined([{name}])	List	get a list of defined signs
+sign_getplaced([{buf} [, {dict}]])
+				List	get a list of placed signs
+sign_jump({id}, {group}, {buf})
+				Number	jump to a sign
+sign_place({id}, {group}, {name}, {buf} [, {dict}])
+				Number	place a sign
+sign_placelist({list})		List	place a list of signs
+sign_undefine([{name}])		Number	undefine a sign
+sign_undefine({list})		List	undefine a list of signs
+sign_unplace({group} [, {dict}])
+				Number	unplace a sign
+sign_unplacelist({list})	List	unplace a list of signs
+simplify({filename})		String	simplify filename as much as possible
+sin({expr})			Float	sine of {expr}
+sinh({expr})			Float	hyperbolic sine of {expr}
+slice({expr}, {start} [, {end}])  String, List or Blob
+					slice of a String, List or Blob
+sort({list} [, {func} [, {dict}]])
+				List	sort {list}, using {func} to compare
+sound_clear()			none	stop playing all sounds
+sound_playevent({name} [, {callback}])
+				Number	play an event sound
+sound_playfile({path} [, {callback}])
+				Number	play sound file {path}
+sound_stop({id})		none	stop playing sound {id}
+soundfold({word})		String	sound-fold {word}
+spellbadword()			String	badly spelled word at cursor
+spellsuggest({word} [, {max} [, {capital}]])
+				List	spelling suggestions
+split({expr} [, {pat} [, {keepempty}]])
+				List	make |List| from {pat} separated {expr}
+sqrt({expr})			Float	square root of {expr}
+srand([{expr}])			List	get seed for |rand()|
+state([{what}])			String	current state of Vim
+str2float({expr} [, {quoted}])	Float	convert String to Float
+str2list({expr} [, {utf8}])	List	convert each character of {expr} to
+					ASCII/UTF-8 value
+str2nr({expr} [, {base} [, {quoted}]])
+				Number	convert String to Number
+strcharlen({expr})		Number	character length of the String {expr}
+strcharpart({str}, {start} [, {len} [, {skipcc}]])
+				String	{len} characters of {str} at
+					character {start}
+strchars({expr} [, {skipcc}])	Number	character count of the String {expr}
+strdisplaywidth({expr} [, {col}]) Number display length of the String {expr}
+strftime({format} [, {time}])	String	format time with a specified format
+strgetchar({str}, {index})	Number	get char {index} from {str}
+stridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}])
+				Number	index of {needle} in {haystack}
+string({expr})			String	String representation of {expr} value
+strlen({expr})			Number	length of the String {expr}
+strpart({str}, {start} [, {len} [, {chars}]])
+				String	{len} bytes/chars of {str} at
+					byte {start}
+strptime({format}, {timestring})
+				Number	Convert {timestring} to unix timestamp
+strridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}])
+				Number	last index of {needle} in {haystack}
+strtrans({expr})		String	translate string to make it printable
+strwidth({expr})		Number	display cell length of the String {expr}
+submatch({nr} [, {list}])	String or List
+					specific match in ":s" or substitute()
+substitute({expr}, {pat}, {sub}, {flags})
+				String	all {pat} in {expr} replaced with {sub}
+swapinfo({fname})		Dict	information about swap file {fname}
+swapname({buf})			String	swap file of buffer {buf}
+synID({lnum}, {col}, {trans})	Number	syntax ID at {lnum} and {col}
+synIDattr({synID}, {what} [, {mode}])
+				String	attribute {what} of syntax ID {synID}
+synIDtrans({synID})		Number	translated syntax ID of {synID}
+synconcealed({lnum}, {col})	List	info about concealing
+synstack({lnum}, {col})		List	stack of syntax IDs at {lnum} and {col}
+system({expr} [, {input}])	String	output of shell command/filter {expr}
+systemlist({expr} [, {input}])	List	output of shell command/filter {expr}
+tabpagebuflist([{arg}])		List	list of buffer numbers in tab page
+tabpagenr([{arg}])		Number	number of current or last tab page
+tabpagewinnr({tabarg} [, {arg}]) Number	number of current window in tab page
+tagfiles()			List	tags files used
+taglist({expr} [, {filename}])	List	list of tags matching {expr}
+tan({expr})			Float	tangent of {expr}
+tanh({expr})			Float	hyperbolic tangent of {expr}
+tempname()			String	name for a temporary file
+term_dumpdiff({filename}, {filename} [, {options}])
+				Number  display difference between two dumps
+term_dumpload({filename} [, {options}])
+				Number	displaying a screen dump
+term_dumpwrite({buf}, {filename} [, {options}])
+				none	dump terminal window contents
+term_getaltscreen({buf})	Number	get the alternate screen flag
+term_getansicolors({buf})	List	get ANSI palette in GUI color mode
+term_getattr({attr}, {what})	Number	get the value of attribute {what}
+term_getcursor({buf})		List	get the cursor position of a terminal
+term_getjob({buf})		Job	get the job associated with a terminal
+term_getline({buf}, {row})	String	get a line of text from a terminal
+term_getscrolled({buf})		Number	get the scroll count of a terminal
+term_getsize({buf})		List	get the size of a terminal
+term_getstatus({buf})		String	get the status of a terminal
+term_gettitle({buf})		String	get the title of a terminal
+term_gettty({buf}, [{input}])	String	get the tty name of a terminal
+term_list()			List	get the list of terminal buffers
+term_scrape({buf}, {row})	List	get row of a terminal screen
+term_sendkeys({buf}, {keys})	none	send keystrokes to a terminal
+term_setansicolors({buf}, {colors})
+				none	set ANSI palette in GUI color mode
+term_setapi({buf}, {expr})	none	set |terminal-api| function name prefix
+term_setkill({buf}, {how})	none	set signal to stop job in terminal
+term_setrestore({buf}, {command}) none	set command to restore terminal
+term_setsize({buf}, {rows}, {cols})
+				none	set the size of a terminal
+term_start({cmd} [, {options}])	Number	open a terminal window and run a job
+term_wait({buf} [, {time}])	Number  wait for screen to be updated
+terminalprops()			Dict	properties of the terminal
+test_alloc_fail({id}, {countdown}, {repeat})
+				none	make memory allocation fail
+test_autochdir()		none	enable 'autochdir' during startup
+test_feedinput({string})	none	add key sequence to input buffer
+test_garbagecollect_now()	none	free memory right now for testing
+test_garbagecollect_soon()	none	free memory soon for testing
+test_getvalue({string})		any	get value of an internal variable
+test_gui_drop_files({list}, {row}, {col}, {mods})
+				none	drop a list of files in a window
+test_gui_mouse_event({button}, {row}, {col}, {repeated}, {mods})
+				none	add a mouse event to the input buffer
+test_ignore_error({expr})	none	ignore a specific error
+test_null_blob()		Blob	null value for testing
+test_null_channel()		Channel	null value for testing
+test_null_dict()		Dict	null value for testing
+test_null_function()		Funcref	null value for testing
+test_null_job()			Job	null value for testing
+test_null_list()		List	null value for testing
+test_null_partial()		Funcref	null value for testing
+test_null_string()		String	null value for testing
+test_option_not_set({name})	none	reset flag indicating option was set
+test_override({expr}, {val})	none	test with Vim internal overrides
+test_refcount({expr})		Number	get the reference count of {expr}
+test_scrollbar({which}, {value}, {dragging})
+				none	scroll in the GUI for testing
+test_setmouse({row}, {col})	none	set the mouse position for testing
+test_settime({expr})		none	set current time for testing
+test_srand_seed([seed])		none	set seed for testing srand()
+test_unknown()			any	unknown value for testing
+test_void()			any	void value for testing
+timer_info([{id}])		List	information about timers
+timer_pause({id}, {pause})	none	pause or unpause a timer
+timer_start({time}, {callback} [, {options}])
+				Number	create a timer
+timer_stop({timer})		none	stop a timer
+timer_stopall()			none	stop all timers
+tolower({expr})			String	the String {expr} switched to lowercase
+toupper({expr})			String	the String {expr} switched to uppercase
+tr({src}, {fromstr}, {tostr})	String	translate chars of {src} in {fromstr}
+					to chars in {tostr}
+trim({text} [, {mask} [, {dir}]])
+				String	trim characters in {mask} from {text}
+trunc({expr})			Float	truncate Float {expr}
+type({expr})			Number	type of value {expr}
+typename({expr})		String	representation of the type of {expr}
+undofile({name})		String	undo file name for {name}
+undotree()			List	undo file tree
+uniq({list} [, {func} [, {dict}]])
+				List	remove adjacent duplicates from a list
+values({dict})			List	values in {dict}
+virtcol({expr})			Number	screen column of cursor or mark
+visualmode([expr])		String	last visual mode used
+wildmenumode()			Number	whether 'wildmenu' mode is active
+win_execute({id}, {command} [, {silent}])
+				String	execute {command} in window {id}
+win_findbuf({bufnr})		List	find windows containing {bufnr}
+win_getid([{win} [, {tab}]])	Number	get window ID for {win} in {tab}
+win_gettype([{nr}])		String	type of window {nr}
+win_gotoid({expr})		Number	go to window with ID {expr}
+win_id2tabwin({expr})		List	get tab and window nr from window ID
+win_id2win({expr})		Number	get window nr from window ID
+win_screenpos({nr})		List	get screen position of window {nr}
+win_splitmove({nr}, {target} [, {options}])
+				Number	move window {nr} to split of {target}
+winbufnr({nr})			Number	buffer number of window {nr}
+wincol()			Number	window column of the cursor
+windowsversion()		String	MS-Windows OS version
+winheight({nr})			Number	height of window {nr}
+winlayout([{tabnr}])		List	layout of windows in tab {tabnr}
+winline()			Number	window line of the cursor
+winnr([{expr}])			Number	number of current window
+winrestcmd()			String	returns command to restore window sizes
+winrestview({dict})		none	restore view of current window
+winsaveview()			Dict	save view of current window
+winwidth({nr})			Number	width of window {nr}
+wordcount()			Dict	get byte/char/word statistics
+writefile({object}, {fname} [, {flags}])
+				Number	write |Blob| or |List| of lines to file
+xor({expr}, {expr})		Number	bitwise XOR
+
+==============================================================================
+2. Details					*builtin-function-details*
+
+Not all functions are here, some have been moved to a help file covering the
+specific functionality.
+
+abs({expr})							*abs()*
+		Return the absolute value of {expr}.  When {expr} evaluates to
+		a |Float| abs() returns a |Float|.  When {expr} can be
+		converted to a |Number| abs() returns a |Number|.  Otherwise
+		abs() gives an error message and returns -1.
+		Examples: >
+			echo abs(1.456)
+<			1.456  >
+			echo abs(-5.456)
+<			5.456  >
+			echo abs(-4)
+<			4
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->abs()
+
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+acos({expr})							*acos()*
+		Return the arc cosine of {expr} measured in radians, as a
+		|Float| in the range of [0, pi].
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range
+		[-1, 1].
+		Examples: >
+			:echo acos(0)
+<			1.570796 >
+			:echo acos(-0.5)
+<			2.094395
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->acos()
+
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+add({object}, {expr})					*add()*
+		Append the item {expr} to |List| or |Blob| {object}.  Returns
+		the resulting |List| or |Blob|.  Examples: >
+			:let alist = add([1, 2, 3], item)
+			:call add(mylist, "woodstock")
+<		Note that when {expr} is a |List| it is appended as a single
+		item.  Use |extend()| to concatenate |Lists|.
+		When {object} is a |Blob| then  {expr} must be a number.
+		Use |insert()| to add an item at another position.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mylist->add(val1)->add(val2)
+
+
+and({expr}, {expr})					*and()*
+		Bitwise AND on the two arguments.  The arguments are converted
+		to a number.  A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error.
+		Example: >
+			:let flag = and(bits, 0x80)
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			:let flag = bits->and(0x80)
+
+
+append({lnum}, {text})					*append()*
+		When {text} is a |List|: Append each item of the |List| as a
+		text line below line {lnum} in the current buffer.
+		Otherwise append {text} as one text line below line {lnum} in
+		the current buffer.
+		Any type of item is accepted and converted to a String.
+		{lnum} can be zero to insert a line before the first one.
+		{lnum} is used like with |getline()|.
+		Returns 1 for failure ({lnum} out of range or out of memory),
+		0 for success.  In |Vim9| script an invalid argument or
+		negative number results in an error.  Example: >
+			:let failed = append(line('$'), "# THE END")
+			:let failed = append(0, ["Chapter 1", "the beginning"])
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method| after a List, the base is
+		passed as the second argument: >
+			mylist->append(lnum)
+
+
+appendbufline({buf}, {lnum}, {text})			*appendbufline()*
+		Like |append()| but append the text in buffer {buf}.
+
+		This function works only for loaded buffers. First call
+		|bufload()| if needed.
+
+		For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()|.
+
+		{lnum} is used like with |append()|.  Note that using |line()|
+		would use the current buffer, not the one appending to.
+		Use "$" to append at the end of the buffer.
+
+		On success 0 is returned, on failure 1 is returned.
+		In |Vim9| script an error is given for an invalid {lnum}.
+
+		If {buf} is not a valid buffer or {lnum} is not valid, an
+		error message is given. Example: >
+			:let failed = appendbufline(13, 0, "# THE START")
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method| after a List, the base is
+		passed as the second argument: >
+			mylist->appendbufline(buf, lnum)
+
+
+argc([{winid}])					*argc()*
+		The result is the number of files in the argument list.  See
+		|arglist|.
+		If {winid} is not supplied, the argument list of the current
+		window is used.
+		If {winid} is -1, the global argument list is used.
+		Otherwise {winid} specifies the window of which the argument
+		list is used: either the window number or the window ID.
+		Returns -1 if the {winid} argument is invalid.
+
+							*argidx()*
+argidx()	The result is the current index in the argument list.  0 is
+		the first file.  argc() - 1 is the last one.  See |arglist|.
+
+							*arglistid()*
+arglistid([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]])
+		Return the argument list ID.  This is a number which
+		identifies the argument list being used.  Zero is used for the
+		global argument list.  See |arglist|.
+		Returns -1 if the arguments are invalid.
+
+		Without arguments use the current window.
+		With {winnr} only use this window in the current tab page.
+		With {winnr} and {tabnr} use the window in the specified tab
+		page.
+		{winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
+
+							*argv()*
+argv([{nr} [, {winid}]])
+		The result is the {nr}th file in the argument list.  See
+		|arglist|.  "argv(0)" is the first one.  Example: >
+	:let i = 0
+	:while i < argc()
+	:  let f = escape(fnameescape(argv(i)), '.')
+	:  exe 'amenu Arg.' . f . ' :e ' . f . '<CR>'
+	:  let i = i + 1
+	:endwhile
+<		Without the {nr} argument, or when {nr} is -1, a |List| with
+		the whole |arglist| is returned.
+
+		The {winid} argument specifies the window ID, see |argc()|.
+		For the Vim command line arguments see |v:argv|.
+
+asin({expr})						*asin()*
+		Return the arc sine of {expr} measured in radians, as a |Float|
+		in the range of [-pi/2, pi/2].
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range
+		[-1, 1].
+		Examples: >
+			:echo asin(0.8)
+<			0.927295 >
+			:echo asin(-0.5)
+<			-0.523599
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->asin()
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+assert_ functions are documented here: |assert-functions-details|
+
+
+
+atan({expr})						*atan()*
+		Return the principal value of the arc tangent of {expr}, in
+		the range [-pi/2, +pi/2] radians, as a |Float|.
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo atan(100)
+<			1.560797 >
+			:echo atan(-4.01)
+<			-1.326405
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->atan()
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+atan2({expr1}, {expr2})					*atan2()*
+		Return the arc tangent of {expr1} / {expr2}, measured in
+		radians, as a |Float| in the range [-pi, pi].
+		{expr1} and {expr2} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo atan2(-1, 1)
+<			-0.785398 >
+			:echo atan2(1, -1)
+<			2.356194
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->atan2(1)
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+balloon_gettext()					*balloon_gettext()*
+		Return the current text in the balloon.  Only for the string,
+		not used for the List.
+
+balloon_show({expr})					*balloon_show()*
+		Show {expr} inside the balloon.  For the GUI {expr} is used as
+		a string.  For a terminal {expr} can be a list, which contains
+		the lines of the balloon.  If {expr} is not a list it will be
+		split with |balloon_split()|.
+		If {expr} is an empty string any existing balloon is removed.
+
+		Example: >
+			func GetBalloonContent()
+			   " ... initiate getting the content
+			   return ''
+			endfunc
+			set balloonexpr=GetBalloonContent()
+
+			func BalloonCallback(result)
+			  call balloon_show(a:result)
+			endfunc
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetText()->balloon_show()
+<
+		The intended use is that fetching the content of the balloon
+		is initiated from 'balloonexpr'.  It will invoke an
+		asynchronous method, in which a callback invokes
+		balloon_show().  The 'balloonexpr' itself can return an
+		empty string or a placeholder.
+
+		When showing a balloon is not possible nothing happens, no
+		error message.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval| or
+		|+balloon_eval_term| feature}
+
+balloon_split({msg})					*balloon_split()*
+		Split String {msg} into lines to be displayed in a balloon.
+		The splits are made for the current window size and optimize
+		to show debugger output.
+		Returns a |List| with the split lines.
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetText()->balloon_split()->balloon_show()
+
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval_term|
+		feature}
+
+blob2list({blob})					*blob2list()*
+		Return a List containing the number value of each byte in Blob
+		{blob}.  Examples: >
+			blob2list(0z0102.0304)	returns [1, 2, 3, 4]
+			blob2list(0z)		returns []
+<		Returns an empty List on error.  |list2blob()| does the
+		opposite.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetBlob()->blob2list()
+
+							*browse()*
+browse({save}, {title}, {initdir}, {default})
+		Put up a file requester.  This only works when "has("browse")"
+		returns |TRUE| (only in some GUI versions).
+		The input fields are:
+		    {save}	when |TRUE|, select file to write
+		    {title}	title for the requester
+		    {initdir}	directory to start browsing in
+		    {default}	default file name
+		An empty string is returned when the "Cancel" button is hit,
+		something went wrong, or browsing is not possible.
+
+							*browsedir()*
+browsedir({title}, {initdir})
+		Put up a directory requester.  This only works when
+		"has("browse")" returns |TRUE| (only in some GUI versions).
+		On systems where a directory browser is not supported a file
+		browser is used.  In that case: select a file in the directory
+		to be used.
+		The input fields are:
+		    {title}	title for the requester
+		    {initdir}	directory to start browsing in
+		When the "Cancel" button is hit, something went wrong, or
+		browsing is not possible, an empty string is returned.
+
+bufadd({name})						*bufadd()*
+		Add a buffer to the buffer list with String {name}.
+		If a buffer for file {name} already exists, return that buffer
+		number.  Otherwise return the buffer number of the newly
+		created buffer.  When {name} is an empty string then a new
+		buffer is always created.
+		The buffer will not have 'buflisted' set and not be loaded
+		yet.  To add some text to the buffer use this: >
+			let bufnr = bufadd('someName')
+			call bufload(bufnr)
+			call setbufline(bufnr, 1, ['some', 'text'])
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			let bufnr = 'somename'->bufadd()
+
+bufexists({buf})					*bufexists()*
+		The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| if a buffer called
+		{buf} exists.
+		If the {buf} argument is a number, buffer numbers are used.
+		Number zero is the alternate buffer for the current window.
+
+		If the {buf} argument is a string it must match a buffer name
+		exactly.  The name can be:
+		- Relative to the current directory.
+		- A full path.
+		- The name of a buffer with 'buftype' set to "nofile".
+		- A URL name.
+		Unlisted buffers will be found.
+		Note that help files are listed by their short name in the
+		output of |:buffers|, but bufexists() requires using their
+		long name to be able to find them.
+		bufexists() may report a buffer exists, but to use the name
+		with a |:buffer| command you may need to use |expand()|.  Esp
+		for MS-Windows 8.3 names in the form "c:\DOCUME~1"
+		Use "bufexists(0)" to test for the existence of an alternate
+		file name.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			let exists = 'somename'->bufexists()
+<
+		Obsolete name: buffer_exists().		*buffer_exists()*
+
+buflisted({buf})					*buflisted()*
+		The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| if a buffer called
+		{buf} exists and is listed (has the 'buflisted' option set).
+		The {buf} argument is used like with |bufexists()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			let listed = 'somename'->buflisted()
+
+bufload({buf})						*bufload()*
+		Ensure the buffer {buf} is loaded.  When the buffer name
+		refers to an existing file then the file is read.  Otherwise
+		the buffer will be empty.  If the buffer was already loaded
+		then there is no change.
+		If there is an existing swap file for the file of the buffer,
+		there will be no dialog, the buffer will be loaded anyway.
+		The {buf} argument is used like with |bufexists()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			eval 'somename'->bufload()
+
+bufloaded({buf})					*bufloaded()*
+		The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| if a buffer called
+		{buf} exists and is loaded (shown in a window or hidden).
+		The {buf} argument is used like with |bufexists()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			let loaded = 'somename'->bufloaded()
+
+bufname([{buf}])					*bufname()*
+		The result is the name of a buffer.  Mostly as it is displayed
+		by the `:ls` command, but not using special names such as
+		"[No Name]".
+		If {buf} is omitted the current buffer is used.
+		If {buf} is a Number, that buffer number's name is given.
+		Number zero is the alternate buffer for the current window.
+		If {buf} is a String, it is used as a |file-pattern| to match
+		with the buffer names.  This is always done like 'magic' is
+		set and 'cpoptions' is empty.  When there is more than one
+		match an empty string is returned.
+		"" or "%" can be used for the current buffer, "#" for the
+		alternate buffer.
+		A full match is preferred, otherwise a match at the start, end
+		or middle of the buffer name is accepted.  If you only want a
+		full match then put "^" at the start and "$" at the end of the
+		pattern.
+		Listed buffers are found first.  If there is a single match
+		with a listed buffer, that one is returned.  Next unlisted
+		buffers are searched for.
+		If the {buf} is a String, but you want to use it as a buffer
+		number, force it to be a Number by adding zero to it: >
+			:echo bufname("3" + 0)
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			echo bufnr->bufname()
+
+<		If the buffer doesn't exist, or doesn't have a name, an empty
+		string is returned. >
+	bufname("#")		alternate buffer name
+	bufname(3)		name of buffer 3
+	bufname("%")		name of current buffer
+	bufname("file2")	name of buffer where "file2" matches.
+<							*buffer_name()*
+		Obsolete name: buffer_name().
+
+							*bufnr()*
+bufnr([{buf} [, {create}]])
+		The result is the number of a buffer, as it is displayed by
+		the `:ls` command.  For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()|
+		above.
+
+		If the buffer doesn't exist, -1 is returned.  Or, if the
+		{create} argument is present and TRUE, a new, unlisted,
+		buffer is created and its number is returned.  Example: >
+			let newbuf = bufnr('Scratch001', 1)
+<		Using an empty name uses the current buffer. To create a new
+		buffer with an empty name use |bufadd()|.
+
+		bufnr("$") is the last buffer: >
+			:let last_buffer = bufnr("$")
+<		The result is a Number, which is the highest buffer number
+		of existing buffers.  Note that not all buffers with a smaller
+		number necessarily exist, because ":bwipeout" may have removed
+		them.  Use bufexists() to test for the existence of a buffer.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			echo bufref->bufnr()
+<
+		Obsolete name: buffer_number().		*buffer_number()*
+							*last_buffer_nr()*
+		Obsolete name for bufnr("$"): last_buffer_nr().
+
+bufwinid({buf})						*bufwinid()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the |window-ID| of the first
+		window associated with buffer {buf}.  For the use of {buf},
+		see |bufname()| above.  If buffer {buf} doesn't exist or
+		there is no such window, -1 is returned.  Example: >
+
+	echo "A window containing buffer 1 is " . (bufwinid(1))
+<
+		Only deals with the current tab page.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			FindBuffer()->bufwinid()
+
+bufwinnr({buf})						*bufwinnr()*
+		Like |bufwinid()| but return the window number instead of the
+		|window-ID|.
+		If buffer {buf} doesn't exist or there is no such window, -1
+		is returned.  Example: >
+
+	echo "A window containing buffer 1 is " . (bufwinnr(1))
+
+<		The number can be used with |CTRL-W_w| and ":wincmd w"
+		|:wincmd|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			FindBuffer()->bufwinnr()
+
+byte2line({byte})					*byte2line()*
+		Return the line number that contains the character at byte
+		count {byte} in the current buffer.  This includes the
+		end-of-line character, depending on the 'fileformat' option
+		for the current buffer.  The first character has byte count
+		one.
+		Also see |line2byte()|, |go| and |:goto|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetOffset()->byte2line()
+
+<		{not available when compiled without the |+byte_offset|
+		feature}
+
+byteidx({expr}, {nr})					*byteidx()*
+		Return byte index of the {nr}'th character in the String
+		{expr}.  Use zero for the first character, it then returns
+		zero.
+		If there are no multibyte characters the returned value is
+		equal to {nr}.
+		Composing characters are not counted separately, their byte
+		length is added to the preceding base character.  See
+		|byteidxcomp()| below for counting composing characters
+		separately.
+		Example : >
+			echo matchstr(str, ".", byteidx(str, 3))
+<		will display the fourth character.  Another way to do the
+		same: >
+			let s = strpart(str, byteidx(str, 3))
+			echo strpart(s, 0, byteidx(s, 1))
+<		Also see |strgetchar()| and |strcharpart()|.
+
+		If there are less than {nr} characters -1 is returned.
+		If there are exactly {nr} characters the length of the string
+		in bytes is returned.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetName()->byteidx(idx)
+
+byteidxcomp({expr}, {nr})					*byteidxcomp()*
+		Like byteidx(), except that a composing character is counted
+		as a separate character.  Example: >
+			let s = 'e' . nr2char(0x301)
+			echo byteidx(s, 1)
+			echo byteidxcomp(s, 1)
+			echo byteidxcomp(s, 2)
+<		The first and third echo result in 3 ('e' plus composing
+		character is 3 bytes), the second echo results in 1 ('e' is
+		one byte).
+		Only works differently from byteidx() when 'encoding' is set
+		to a Unicode encoding.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetName()->byteidxcomp(idx)
+
+call({func}, {arglist} [, {dict}])			*call()* *E699*
+		Call function {func} with the items in |List| {arglist} as
+		arguments.
+		{func} can either be a |Funcref| or the name of a function.
+		a:firstline and a:lastline are set to the cursor line.
+		Returns the return value of the called function.
+		{dict} is for functions with the "dict" attribute.  It will be
+		used to set the local variable "self". |Dictionary-function|
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetFunc()->call([arg, arg], dict)
+
+ceil({expr})							*ceil()*
+		Return the smallest integral value greater than or equal to
+		{expr} as a |Float| (round up).
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			echo ceil(1.456)
+<			2.0  >
+			echo ceil(-5.456)
+<			-5.0  >
+			echo ceil(4.0)
+<			4.0
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->ceil()
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+ch_ functions are documented here: |channel-functions-details|
+
+
+changenr()						*changenr()*
+		Return the number of the most recent change.  This is the same
+		number as what is displayed with |:undolist| and can be used
+		with the |:undo| command.
+		When a change was made it is the number of that change.  After
+		redo it is the number of the redone change.  After undo it is
+		one less than the number of the undone change.
+
+char2nr({string} [, {utf8}])					*char2nr()*
+		Return number value of the first char in {string}.
+		Examples: >
+			char2nr(" ")		returns 32
+			char2nr("ABC")		returns 65
+<		When {utf8} is omitted or zero, the current 'encoding' is used.
+		Example for "utf-8": >
+			char2nr("á")		returns 225
+			char2nr("á"[0])		returns 195
+<		When {utf8} is TRUE, always treat as UTF-8 characters.
+		A combining character is a separate character.
+		|nr2char()| does the opposite.
+		To turn a string into a list of character numbers: >
+		    let str = "ABC"
+		    let list = map(split(str, '\zs'), {_, val -> char2nr(val)})
+<		Result: [65, 66, 67]
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetChar()->char2nr()
+
+
+charclass({string})					*charclass()*
+		Return the character class of the first character in {string}.
+		The character class is one of:
+			0	blank
+			1	punctuation
+			2	word character
+			3	emoji
+			other	specific Unicode class
+		The class is used in patterns and word motions.
+
+
+charcol({expr})						*charcol()*
+		Same as |col()| but returns the character index of the column
+		position given with {expr} instead of the byte position.
+
+		Example:
+		With the cursor on '세' in line 5 with text "여보세요": >
+			charcol('.')		returns 3
+			col('.')		returns 7
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetPos()->col()
+<
+							*charidx()*
+charidx({string}, {idx} [, {countcc}])
+		Return the character index of the byte at {idx} in {string}.
+		The index of the first character is zero.
+		If there are no multibyte characters the returned value is
+		equal to {idx}.
+		When {countcc} is omitted or |FALSE|, then composing characters
+		are not counted separately, their byte length is
+		added to the preceding base character.
+		When {countcc} is |TRUE|, then composing characters are
+		counted as separate characters.
+		Returns -1 if the arguments are invalid or if {idx} is greater
+		than the index of the last byte in {string}.  An error is
+		given if the first argument is not a string, the second
+		argument is not a number or when the third argument is present
+		and is not zero or one.
+		See |byteidx()| and |byteidxcomp()| for getting the byte index
+		from the character index.
+		Examples: >
+			echo charidx('áb́ć', 3)		returns 1
+			echo charidx('áb́ć', 6, 1)	returns 4
+			echo charidx('áb́ć', 16)		returns -1
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetName()->charidx(idx)
+
+chdir({dir})						*chdir()*
+		Change the current working directory to {dir}.  The scope of
+		the directory change depends on the directory of the current
+		window:
+			- If the current window has a window-local directory
+			  (|:lcd|), then changes the window local directory.
+			- Otherwise, if the current tabpage has a local
+			  directory (|:tcd|) then changes the tabpage local
+			  directory.
+			- Otherwise, changes the global directory.
+		{dir} must be a String.
+		If successful, returns the previous working directory.  Pass
+		this to another chdir() to restore the directory.
+		On failure, returns an empty string.
+
+		Example: >
+			let save_dir = chdir(newdir)
+			if save_dir != ""
+			   " ... do some work
+			   call chdir(save_dir)
+			endif
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetDir()->chdir()
+<
+cindent({lnum})						*cindent()*
+		Get the amount of indent for line {lnum} according the C
+		indenting rules, as with 'cindent'.
+		The indent is counted in spaces, the value of 'tabstop' is
+		relevant.  {lnum} is used just like in |getline()|.
+		When {lnum} is invalid or Vim was not compiled the |+cindent|
+		feature, -1 is returned.
+		See |C-indenting|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetLnum()->cindent()
+
+clearmatches([{win}])					*clearmatches()*
+		Clears all matches previously defined for the current window
+		by |matchadd()| and the |:match| commands.
+		If {win} is specified, use the window with this number or
+		window ID instead of the current window.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetWin()->clearmatches()
+<
+							*col()*
+col({expr})	The result is a Number, which is the byte index of the column
+		position given with {expr}.  The accepted positions are:
+		    .	    the cursor position
+		    $	    the end of the cursor line (the result is the
+			    number of bytes in the cursor line plus one)
+		    'x	    position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is
+			    returned)
+		    v       In Visual mode: the start of the Visual area (the
+			    cursor is the end).  When not in Visual mode
+			    returns the cursor position.  Differs from |'<| in
+			    that it's updated right away.
+		Additionally {expr} can be [lnum, col]: a |List| with the line
+		and column number. Most useful when the column is "$", to get
+		the last column of a specific line.  When "lnum" or "col" is
+		out of range then col() returns zero.
+		To get the line number use |line()|.  To get both use
+		|getpos()|.
+		For the screen column position use |virtcol()|.  For the
+		character position use |charcol()|.
+		Note that only marks in the current file can be used.
+		Examples: >
+			col(".")		column of cursor
+			col("$")		length of cursor line plus one
+			col("'t")		column of mark t
+			col("'" . markname)	column of mark markname
+<		The first column is 1.  0 is returned for an error.
+		For an uppercase mark the column may actually be in another
+		buffer.
+		For the cursor position, when 'virtualedit' is active, the
+		column is one higher if the cursor is after the end of the
+		line.  This can be used to obtain the column in Insert mode: >
+			:imap <F2> <C-O>:let save_ve = &ve<CR>
+				\<C-O>:set ve=all<CR>
+				\<C-O>:echo col(".") . "\n" <Bar>
+				\let &ve = save_ve<CR>
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetPos()->col()
+<
+
+complete({startcol}, {matches})			*complete()* *E785*
+		Set the matches for Insert mode completion.
+		Can only be used in Insert mode.  You need to use a mapping
+		with CTRL-R = (see |i_CTRL-R|).  It does not work after CTRL-O
+		or with an expression mapping.
+		{startcol} is the byte offset in the line where the completed
+		text start.  The text up to the cursor is the original text
+		that will be replaced by the matches.  Use col('.') for an
+		empty string.  "col('.') - 1" will replace one character by a
+		match.
+		{matches} must be a |List|.  Each |List| item is one match.
+		See |complete-items| for the kind of items that are possible.
+		"longest" in 'completeopt' is ignored.
+		Note that the after calling this function you need to avoid
+		inserting anything that would cause completion to stop.
+		The match can be selected with CTRL-N and CTRL-P as usual with
+		Insert mode completion.  The popup menu will appear if
+		specified, see |ins-completion-menu|.
+		Example: >
+	inoremap <F5> <C-R>=ListMonths()<CR>
+
+	func! ListMonths()
+	  call complete(col('.'), ['January', 'February', 'March',
+		\ 'April', 'May', 'June', 'July', 'August', 'September',
+		\ 'October', 'November', 'December'])
+	  return ''
+	endfunc
+<		This isn't very useful, but it shows how it works.  Note that
+		an empty string is returned to avoid a zero being inserted.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
+		second argument: >
+			GetMatches()->complete(col('.'))
+
+complete_add({expr})				*complete_add()*
+		Add {expr} to the list of matches.  Only to be used by the
+		function specified with the 'completefunc' option.
+		Returns 0 for failure (empty string or out of memory),
+		1 when the match was added, 2 when the match was already in
+		the list.
+		See |complete-functions| for an explanation of {expr}.  It is
+		the same as one item in the list that 'omnifunc' would return.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetMoreMatches()->complete_add()
+
+complete_check()				*complete_check()*
+		Check for a key typed while looking for completion matches.
+		This is to be used when looking for matches takes some time.
+		Returns |TRUE| when searching for matches is to be aborted,
+		zero otherwise.
+		Only to be used by the function specified with the
+		'completefunc' option.
+
+
+complete_info([{what}])				*complete_info()*
+		Returns a |Dictionary| with information about Insert mode
+		completion.  See |ins-completion|.
+		The items are:
+		   mode		Current completion mode name string.
+				See |complete_info_mode| for the values.
+		   pum_visible	|TRUE| if popup menu is visible.
+				See |pumvisible()|.
+		   items	List of completion matches.  Each item is a
+				dictionary containing the entries "word",
+				"abbr", "menu", "kind", "info" and "user_data".
+				See |complete-items|.
+		   selected	Selected item index.  First index is zero.
+				Index is -1 if no item is selected (showing
+				typed text only, or the last completion after
+				no item is selected when using the <Up> or
+				<Down> keys)
+		   inserted	Inserted string. [NOT IMPLEMENT YET]
+
+							*complete_info_mode*
+		mode values are:
+		   ""		     Not in completion mode
+		   "keyword"	     Keyword completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-N|
+		   "ctrl_x"	     Just pressed CTRL-X |i_CTRL-X|
+		   "scroll"	     Scrolling with |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-E| or
+				     |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-Y|
+		   "whole_line"	     Whole lines |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L|
+		   "files"	     File names |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-F|
+		   "tags"	     Tags |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-]|
+		   "path_defines"    Definition completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-D|
+		   "path_patterns"   Include completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-I|
+		   "dictionary"	     Dictionary |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|
+		   "thesaurus"	     Thesaurus |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|
+		   "cmdline"	     Vim Command line |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-V|
+		   "function"	     User defined completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-U|
+		   "omni"	     Omni completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-O|
+		   "spell"	     Spelling suggestions |i_CTRL-X_s|
+		   "eval"	     |complete()| completion
+		   "unknown"	     Other internal modes
+
+		If the optional {what} list argument is supplied, then only
+		the items listed in {what} are returned.  Unsupported items in
+		{what} are silently ignored.
+
+		To get the position and size of the popup menu, see
+		|pum_getpos()|. It's also available in |v:event| during the
+		|CompleteChanged| event.
+
+		Examples: >
+			" Get all items
+			call complete_info()
+			" Get only 'mode'
+			call complete_info(['mode'])
+			" Get only 'mode' and 'pum_visible'
+			call complete_info(['mode', 'pum_visible'])
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetItems()->complete_info()
+<
+						*confirm()*
+confirm({msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]])
+		confirm() offers the user a dialog, from which a choice can be
+		made.  It returns the number of the choice.  For the first
+		choice this is 1.
+		Note: confirm() is only supported when compiled with dialog
+		support, see |+dialog_con| and |+dialog_gui|.
+
+		{msg} is displayed in a |dialog| with {choices} as the
+		alternatives.  When {choices} is missing or empty, "&OK" is
+		used (and translated).
+		{msg} is a String, use '\n' to include a newline.  Only on
+		some systems the string is wrapped when it doesn't fit.
+
+		{choices} is a String, with the individual choices separated
+		by '\n', e.g. >
+			confirm("Save changes?", "&Yes\n&No\n&Cancel")
+<		The letter after the '&' is the shortcut key for that choice.
+		Thus you can type 'c' to select "Cancel".  The shortcut does
+		not need to be the first letter: >
+			confirm("file has been modified", "&Save\nSave &All")
+<		For the console, the first letter of each choice is used as
+		the default shortcut key.  Case is ignored.
+
+		The optional {default} argument is the number of the choice
+		that is made if the user hits <CR>.  Use 1 to make the first
+		choice the default one.  Use 0 to not set a default.  If
+		{default} is omitted, 1 is used.
+
+		The optional {type} String argument gives the type of dialog.
+		This is only used for the icon of the GTK, Mac, Motif and
+		Win32 GUI.  It can be one of these values: "Error",
+		"Question", "Info", "Warning" or "Generic".  Only the first
+		character is relevant.  When {type} is omitted, "Generic" is
+		used.
+
+		If the user aborts the dialog by pressing <Esc>, CTRL-C,
+		or another valid interrupt key, confirm() returns 0.
+
+		An example: >
+   :let choice = confirm("What do you want?", "&Apples\n&Oranges\n&Bananas", 2)
+   :if choice == 0
+   :	echo "make up your mind!"
+   :elseif choice == 3
+   :	echo "tasteful"
+   :else
+   :	echo "I prefer bananas myself."
+   :endif
+<		In a GUI dialog, buttons are used.  The layout of the buttons
+		depends on the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'.  If it is included,
+		the buttons are always put vertically.  Otherwise,  confirm()
+		tries to put the buttons in one horizontal line.  If they
+		don't fit, a vertical layout is used anyway.  For some systems
+		the horizontal layout is always used.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|in: >
+			BuildMessage()->confirm("&Yes\n&No")
+<
+							*copy()*
+copy({expr})	Make a copy of {expr}.  For Numbers and Strings this isn't
+		different from using {expr} directly.
+		When {expr} is a |List| a shallow copy is created.  This means
+		that the original |List| can be changed without changing the
+		copy, and vice versa.  But the items are identical, thus
+		changing an item changes the contents of both |Lists|.
+		A |Dictionary| is copied in a similar way as a |List|.
+		Also see |deepcopy()|.
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mylist->copy()
+
+cos({expr})						*cos()*
+		Return the cosine of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float|.
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo cos(100)
+<			0.862319 >
+			:echo cos(-4.01)
+<			-0.646043
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->cos()
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+cosh({expr})						*cosh()*
+		Return the hyperbolic cosine of {expr} as a |Float| in the range
+		[1, inf].
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo cosh(0.5)
+<			1.127626 >
+			:echo cosh(-0.5)
+<			-1.127626
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->cosh()
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+count({comp}, {expr} [, {ic} [, {start}]])			*count()*
+		Return the number of times an item with value {expr} appears
+		in |String|, |List| or |Dictionary| {comp}.
+
+		If {start} is given then start with the item with this index.
+		{start} can only be used with a |List|.
+
+		When {ic} is given and it's |TRUE| then case is ignored.
+
+		When {comp} is a string then the number of not overlapping
+		occurrences of {expr} is returned. Zero is returned when
+		{expr} is an empty string.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mylist->count(val)
+<
+							*cscope_connection()*
+cscope_connection([{num} , {dbpath} [, {prepend}]])
+		Checks for the existence of a |cscope| connection.  If no
+		parameters are specified, then the function returns:
+			0, if cscope was not available (not compiled in), or
+			   if there are no cscope connections;
+			1, if there is at least one cscope connection.
+
+		If parameters are specified, then the value of {num}
+		determines how existence of a cscope connection is checked:
+
+		{num}	Description of existence check
+		-----	------------------------------
+		0	Same as no parameters (e.g., "cscope_connection()").
+		1	Ignore {prepend}, and use partial string matches for
+			{dbpath}.
+		2	Ignore {prepend}, and use exact string matches for
+			{dbpath}.
+		3	Use {prepend}, use partial string matches for both
+			{dbpath} and {prepend}.
+		4	Use {prepend}, use exact string matches for both
+			{dbpath} and {prepend}.
+
+		Note: All string comparisons are case sensitive!
+
+		Examples.  Suppose we had the following (from ":cs show"): >
+
+  # pid    database name			prepend path
+  0 27664  cscope.out				/usr/local
+<
+		Invocation					Return Val ~
+		----------					---------- >
+		cscope_connection()					1
+		cscope_connection(1, "out")				1
+		cscope_connection(2, "out")				0
+		cscope_connection(3, "out")				0
+		cscope_connection(3, "out", "local")			1
+		cscope_connection(4, "out")				0
+		cscope_connection(4, "out", "local")			0
+		cscope_connection(4, "cscope.out", "/usr/local")	1
+<
+cursor({lnum}, {col} [, {off}])				*cursor()*
+cursor({list})
+		Positions the cursor at the column (byte count) {col} in the
+		line {lnum}.  The first column is one.
+
+		When there is one argument {list} this is used as a |List|
+		with two, three or four item:
+			[{lnum}, {col}]
+			[{lnum}, {col}, {off}]
+			[{lnum}, {col}, {off}, {curswant}]
+		This is like the return value of |getpos()| or |getcurpos()|,
+		but without the first item.
+
+		To position the cursor using the character count, use
+		|setcursorcharpos()|.
+
+		Does not change the jumplist.
+		{lnum} is used like with |getline()|.
+		If {lnum} is greater than the number of lines in the buffer,
+		the cursor will be positioned at the last line in the buffer.
+		If {lnum} is zero, the cursor will stay in the current line.
+		If {col} is greater than the number of bytes in the line,
+		the cursor will be positioned at the last character in the
+		line.
+		If {col} is zero, the cursor will stay in the current column.
+		If {curswant} is given it is used to set the preferred column
+		for vertical movement.  Otherwise {col} is used.
+
+		When 'virtualedit' is used {off} specifies the offset in
+		screen columns from the start of the character.  E.g., a
+		position within a <Tab> or after the last character.
+		Returns 0 when the position could be set, -1 otherwise.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetCursorPos()->cursor()
+
+debugbreak({pid})					*debugbreak()*
+		Specifically used to interrupt a program being debugged.  It
+		will cause process {pid} to get a SIGTRAP.  Behavior for other
+		processes is undefined. See |terminal-debugger|.
+		{only available on MS-Windows}
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetPid()->debugbreak()
+
+deepcopy({expr} [, {noref}])				*deepcopy()* *E698*
+		Make a copy of {expr}.  For Numbers and Strings this isn't
+		different from using {expr} directly.
+		When {expr} is a |List| a full copy is created.  This means
+		that the original |List| can be changed without changing the
+		copy, and vice versa.  When an item is a |List| or
+		|Dictionary|, a copy for it is made, recursively.  Thus
+		changing an item in the copy does not change the contents of
+		the original |List|.
+		A |Dictionary| is copied in a similar way as a |List|.
+
+		When {noref} is omitted or zero a contained |List| or
+		|Dictionary| is only copied once.  All references point to
+		this single copy.  With {noref} set to 1 every occurrence of a
+		|List| or |Dictionary| results in a new copy.  This also means
+		that a cyclic reference causes deepcopy() to fail.
+								*E724*
+		Nesting is possible up to 100 levels.  When there is an item
+		that refers back to a higher level making a deep copy with
+		{noref} set to 1 will fail.
+		Also see |copy()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetObject()->deepcopy()
+
+delete({fname} [, {flags}])				*delete()*
+		Without {flags} or with {flags} empty: Deletes the file by the
+		name {fname}.  This also works when {fname} is a symbolic link.
+
+		When {flags} is "d": Deletes the directory by the name
+		{fname}.  This fails when directory {fname} is not empty.
+
+		When {flags} is "rf": Deletes the directory by the name
+		{fname} and everything in it, recursively.  BE CAREFUL!
+		Note: on MS-Windows it is not possible to delete a directory
+		that is being used.
+
+		A symbolic link itself is deleted, not what it points to.
+
+		The result is a Number, which is 0/false if the delete
+		operation was successful and -1/true when the deletion failed
+		or partly failed.
+
+		Use |remove()| to delete an item from a |List|.
+		To delete a line from the buffer use |:delete| or
+		|deletebufline()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetName()->delete()
+
+deletebufline({buf}, {first} [, {last}])		*deletebufline()*
+		Delete lines {first} to {last} (inclusive) from buffer {buf}.
+		If {last} is omitted then delete line {first} only.
+		On success 0 is returned, on failure 1 is returned.
+
+		This function works only for loaded buffers. First call
+		|bufload()| if needed.
+
+		For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above.
+
+		{first} and {last} are used like with |getline()|. Note that
+		when using |line()| this refers to the current buffer. Use "$"
+		to refer to the last line in buffer {buf}.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetBuffer()->deletebufline(1)
+<
+							*did_filetype()*
+did_filetype()	Returns |TRUE| when autocommands are being executed and the
+		FileType event has been triggered at least once.  Can be used
+		to avoid triggering the FileType event again in the scripts
+		that detect the file type. |FileType|
+		Returns |FALSE| when `:setf FALLBACK` was used.
+		When editing another file, the counter is reset, thus this
+		really checks if the FileType event has been triggered for the
+		current buffer.  This allows an autocommand that starts
+		editing another buffer to set 'filetype' and load a syntax
+		file.
+
+diff_filler({lnum})					*diff_filler()*
+		Returns the number of filler lines above line {lnum}.
+		These are the lines that were inserted at this point in
+		another diff'ed window.  These filler lines are shown in the
+		display but don't exist in the buffer.
+		{lnum} is used like with |getline()|.  Thus "." is the current
+		line, "'m" mark m, etc.
+		Returns 0 if the current window is not in diff mode.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetLnum()->diff_filler()
+
+diff_hlID({lnum}, {col})				*diff_hlID()*
+		Returns the highlight ID for diff mode at line {lnum} column
+		{col} (byte index).  When the current line does not have a
+		diff change zero is returned.
+		{lnum} is used like with |getline()|.  Thus "." is the current
+		line, "'m" mark m, etc.
+		{col} is 1 for the leftmost column, {lnum} is 1 for the first
+		line.
+		The highlight ID can be used with |synIDattr()| to obtain
+		syntax information about the highlighting.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetLnum()->diff_hlID(col)
+<
+
+digraph_get({chars})					*digraph_get()* *E1214*
+		Return the digraph of {chars}.  This should be a string with
+		exactly two characters.  If {chars} are not just two
+		characters, or the digraph of {chars} does not exist, an error
+		is given and an empty string is returned.
+
+		The character will be converted from Unicode to 'encoding'
+		when needed.  This does require the conversion to be
+		available, it might fail.
+
+		Also see |digraph_getlist()|.
+
+		Examples: >
+		" Get a built-in digraph
+		:echo digraph_get('00')		" Returns '∞'
+
+		" Get a user-defined digraph
+		:call digraph_set('aa', 'あ')
+		:echo digraph_get('aa')		" Returns 'あ'
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetChars()->digraph_get()
+<
+		This function works only when compiled with the |+digraphs|
+		feature.  If this feature is disabled, this function will
+		display an error message.
+
+
+digraph_getlist([{listall}])				*digraph_getlist()*
+		Return a list of digraphs.  If the {listall} argument is given
+		and it is TRUE, return all digraphs, including the default
+		digraphs.  Otherwise, return only user-defined digraphs.
+
+		The characters will be converted from Unicode to 'encoding'
+		when needed.  This does require the conservation to be
+		available, it might fail.
+
+		Also see |digraph_get()|.
+
+		Examples: >
+		" Get user-defined digraphs
+		:echo digraph_getlist()
+
+		" Get all the digraphs, including default digraphs
+		:echo digraph_getlist(1)
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetNumber()->digraph_getlist()
+<
+		This function works only when compiled with the |+digraphs|
+		feature.  If this feature is disabled, this function will
+		display an error message.
+
+
+digraph_set({chars}, {digraph})				*digraph_set()* *E1205*
+		Add digraph {chars} to the list.  {chars} must be a string
+		with two characters.  {digraph} is a string with one UTF-8
+		encoded character. Be careful, composing characters are NOT
+		ignored.  This function is similar to |:digraphs| command, but
+		useful to add digraphs start with a white space.
+
+		The function result is v:true if |digraph| is registered.  If
+		this fails an error message is given and v:false is returned.
+
+		If you want to define multiple digraphs at once, you can use
+		|digraph_setlist()|.
+
+		Example: >
+			call digraph_set('  ', 'あ')
+<
+		Can be used as a |method|: >
+			GetString()->digraph_set('あ')
+<
+		This function works only when compiled with the |+digraphs|
+		feature.  If this feature is disabled, this function will
+		display an error message.
+
+
+digraph_setlist({digraphlist})				*digraph_setlist()*
+		Similar to |digraph_set()| but this function can add multiple
+		digraphs at once.  {digraphlist} is a list composed of lists,
+		where each list contains two strings with {chars} and
+		{digraph} as in |digraph_set()|.
+		Example: >
+		    call digraph_setlist([['aa', 'あ'], ['ii', 'い']])
+<
+		It is similar to the following: >
+		    for [chars, digraph] in [['aa', 'あ'], ['ii', 'い']]
+			  call digraph_set(chars, digraph)
+		    endfor
+<		Except that the function returns after the first error,
+		following digraphs will not be added.
+
+		Can be used as a |method|: >
+		    GetList()->digraph_setlist()
+<
+		This function works only when compiled with the |+digraphs|
+		feature.  If this feature is disabled, this function will
+		display an error message.
+
+
+echoraw({string})					*echoraw()*
+		Output {string} as-is, including unprintable characters.
+		This can be used to output a terminal code. For example, to
+		disable modifyOtherKeys: >
+			call echoraw(&t_TE)
+<		and to enable it again: >
+			call echoraw(&t_TI)
+<		Use with care, you can mess up the terminal this way.
+
+
+empty({expr})						*empty()*
+		Return the Number 1 if {expr} is empty, zero otherwise.
+		- A |List| or |Dictionary| is empty when it does not have any
+		  items.
+		- A |String| is empty when its length is zero.
+		- A |Number| and |Float| are empty when their value is zero.
+		- |v:false|, |v:none| and |v:null| are empty, |v:true| is not.
+		- A |Job| is empty when it failed to start.
+		- A |Channel| is empty when it is closed.
+		- A |Blob| is empty when its length is zero.
+
+		For a long |List| this is much faster than comparing the
+		length with zero.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mylist->empty()
+
+environ()						*environ()*
+		Return all of environment variables as dictionary. You can
+		check if an environment variable exists like this: >
+			:echo has_key(environ(), 'HOME')
+<		Note that the variable name may be CamelCase; to ignore case
+		use this: >
+			:echo index(keys(environ()), 'HOME', 0, 1) != -1
+
+escape({string}, {chars})				*escape()*
+		Escape the characters in {chars} that occur in {string} with a
+		backslash.  Example: >
+			:echo escape('c:\program files\vim', ' \')
+<		results in: >
+			c:\\program\ files\\vim
+<		Also see |shellescape()| and |fnameescape()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetText()->escape(' \')
+<
+							*eval()*
+eval({string})	Evaluate {string} and return the result.  Especially useful to
+		turn the result of |string()| back into the original value.
+		This works for Numbers, Floats, Strings, Blobs and composites
+		of them.  Also works for |Funcref|s that refer to existing
+		functions.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			argv->join()->eval()
+
+eventhandler()						*eventhandler()*
+		Returns 1 when inside an event handler.  That is that Vim got
+		interrupted while waiting for the user to type a character,
+		e.g., when dropping a file on Vim.  This means interactive
+		commands cannot be used.  Otherwise zero is returned.
+
+executable({expr})					*executable()*
+		This function checks if an executable with the name {expr}
+		exists.  {expr} must be the name of the program without any
+		arguments.
+		executable() uses the value of $PATH and/or the normal
+		searchpath for programs.		*PATHEXT*
+		On MS-Windows the ".exe", ".bat", etc. can optionally be
+		included.  Then the extensions in $PATHEXT are tried.  Thus if
+		"foo.exe" does not exist, "foo.exe.bat" can be found.  If
+		$PATHEXT is not set then ".com;.exe;.bat;.cmd" is used.  A dot
+		by itself can be used in $PATHEXT to try using the name
+		without an extension.  When 'shell' looks like a Unix shell,
+		then the name is also tried without adding an extension.
+		On MS-Windows it only checks if the file exists and is not a
+		directory, not if it's really executable.
+		On MS-Windows an executable in the same directory as Vim is
+		always found.  Since this directory is added to $PATH it
+		should also work to execute it |win32-PATH|.
+		The result is a Number:
+			1	exists
+			0	does not exist
+			-1	not implemented on this system
+		|exepath()| can be used to get the full path of an executable.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetCommand()->executable()
+
+execute({command} [, {silent}])					*execute()*
+		Execute an Ex command or commands and return the output as a
+		string.
+		{command} can be a string or a List.  In case of a List the
+		lines are executed one by one.
+		This is equivalent to: >
+			redir => var
+			{command}
+			redir END
+<
+		The optional {silent} argument can have these values:
+			""		no `:silent` used
+			"silent"	`:silent` used
+			"silent!"	`:silent!` used
+		The default is "silent".  Note that with "silent!", unlike
+		`:redir`, error messages are dropped.  When using an external
+		command the screen may be messed up, use `system()` instead.
+							*E930*
+		It is not possible to use `:redir` anywhere in {command}.
+
+		To get a list of lines use |split()| on the result: >
+			split(execute('args'), "\n")
+
+<		To execute a command in another window than the current one
+		use `win_execute()`.
+
+		When used recursively the output of the recursive call is not
+		included in the output of the higher level call.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetCommand()->execute()
+
+exepath({expr})						*exepath()*
+		If {expr} is an executable and is either an absolute path, a
+		relative path or found in $PATH, return the full path.
+		Note that the current directory is used when {expr} starts
+		with "./", which may be a problem for Vim: >
+			echo exepath(v:progpath)
+<		If {expr} cannot be found in $PATH or is not executable then
+		an empty string is returned.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetCommand()->exepath()
+<
+							*exists()*
+exists({expr})	The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| if {expr} is defined,
+		zero otherwise.
+
+		Note: In a compiled |:def| function the evaluation is done at
+		runtime.  Use `exists_compiled()` to evaluate the expression
+		at compile time.
+
+		For checking for a supported feature use |has()|.
+		For checking if a file exists use |filereadable()|.
+
+		The {expr} argument is a string, which contains one of these:
+			&option-name	Vim option (only checks if it exists,
+					not if it really works)
+			+option-name	Vim option that works.
+			$ENVNAME	environment variable (could also be
+					done by comparing with an empty
+					string)
+			*funcname	built-in function (see |functions|)
+					or user defined function (see
+					|user-functions|) that is implemented.
+					Also works for a variable that is a
+					Funcref.
+			?funcname	built-in function that could be
+					implemented; to be used to check if
+					"funcname" is valid
+			varname		internal variable (see
+					|internal-variables|).  Also works
+					for |curly-braces-names|, |Dictionary|
+					entries, |List| items, etc.
+					Does not work for local variables in a
+					compiled `:def` function.
+					Beware that evaluating an index may
+					cause an error message for an invalid
+					expression.  E.g.: >
+					   :let l = [1, 2, 3]
+					   :echo exists("l[5]")
+<					   0 >
+					   :echo exists("l[xx]")
+<					   E121: Undefined variable: xx
+					   0
+			:cmdname	Ex command: built-in command, user
+					command or command modifier |:command|.
+					Returns:
+					1  for match with start of a command
+					2  full match with a command
+					3  matches several user commands
+					To check for a supported command
+					always check the return value to be 2.
+			:2match		The |:2match| command.
+			:3match		The |:3match| command.
+			#event		autocommand defined for this event
+			#event#pattern	autocommand defined for this event and
+					pattern (the pattern is taken
+					literally and compared to the
+					autocommand patterns character by
+					character)
+			#group		autocommand group exists
+			#group#event	autocommand defined for this group and
+					event.
+			#group#event#pattern
+					autocommand defined for this group,
+					event and pattern.
+			##event		autocommand for this event is
+					supported.
+
+		Examples: >
+			exists("&shortname")
+			exists("$HOSTNAME")
+			exists("*strftime")
+			exists("*s:MyFunc")
+			exists("bufcount")
+			exists(":Make")
+			exists("#CursorHold")
+			exists("#BufReadPre#*.gz")
+			exists("#filetypeindent")
+			exists("#filetypeindent#FileType")
+			exists("#filetypeindent#FileType#*")
+			exists("##ColorScheme")
+<		There must be no space between the symbol (&/$/*/#) and the
+		name.
+		There must be no extra characters after the name, although in
+		a few cases this is ignored.  That may become more strict in
+		the future, thus don't count on it!
+		Working example: >
+			exists(":make")
+<		NOT working example: >
+			exists(":make install")
+
+<		Note that the argument must be a string, not the name of the
+		variable itself.  For example: >
+			exists(bufcount)
+<		This doesn't check for existence of the "bufcount" variable,
+		but gets the value of "bufcount", and checks if that exists.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Varname()->exists()
+<
+
+exists_compiled({expr})					*exists_compiled()*
+		Like `exists()` but evaluated at compile time.  This is useful
+		to skip a block where a function is used that would otherwise
+		give an error: >
+			if exists_compiled('*ThatFunction')
+			   ThatFunction('works')
+			endif
+<		If `exists()` were used then a compilation error would be
+		given if ThatFunction() is not defined.
+
+		{expr} must be a literal string. *E1232*
+		Can only be used in a |:def| function. *E1233*
+		This does not work to check for arguments or local variables.
+
+
+exp({expr})							*exp()*
+		Return the exponential of {expr} as a |Float| in the range
+		[0, inf].
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo exp(2)
+<			7.389056 >
+			:echo exp(-1)
+<			0.367879
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->exp()
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+expand({string} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]])				*expand()*
+		Expand wildcards and the following special keywords in
+		{string}.  'wildignorecase' applies.
+
+		If {list} is given and it is |TRUE|, a List will be returned.
+		Otherwise the result is a String and when there are several
+		matches, they are separated by <NL> characters.  [Note: in
+		version 5.0 a space was used, which caused problems when a
+		file name contains a space]
+
+		If the expansion fails, the result is an empty string.  A name
+		for a non-existing file is not included, unless {string} does
+		not start with '%', '#' or '<', see below.
+
+		When {string} starts with '%', '#' or '<', the expansion is
+		done like for the |cmdline-special| variables with their
+		associated modifiers.  Here is a short overview:
+
+			%		current file name
+			#		alternate file name
+			#n		alternate file name n
+			<cfile>		file name under the cursor
+			<afile>		autocmd file name
+			<abuf>		autocmd buffer number (as a String!)
+			<amatch>	autocmd matched name
+			<cexpr>		C expression under the cursor
+			<sfile>		sourced script file or function name
+			<slnum>		sourced script line number or function
+					line number
+			<sflnum>	script file line number, also when in
+					a function
+			<SID>		"<SNR>123_"  where "123" is the
+					current script ID  |<SID>|
+			<stack>		call stack
+			<cword>		word under the cursor
+			<cWORD>		WORD under the cursor
+			<client>	the {clientid} of the last received
+					message |server2client()|
+		Modifiers:
+			:p		expand to full path
+			:h		head (last path component removed)
+			:t		tail (last path component only)
+			:r		root (one extension removed)
+			:e		extension only
+
+		Example: >
+			:let &tags = expand("%:p:h") . "/tags"
+<		Note that when expanding a string that starts with '%', '#' or
+		'<', any following text is ignored.  This does NOT work: >
+			:let doesntwork = expand("%:h.bak")
+<		Use this: >
+			:let doeswork = expand("%:h") . ".bak"
+<		Also note that expanding "<cfile>" and others only returns the
+		referenced file name without further expansion.  If "<cfile>"
+		is "~/.cshrc", you need to do another expand() to have the
+		"~/" expanded into the path of the home directory: >
+			:echo expand(expand("<cfile>"))
+<
+		There cannot be white space between the variables and the
+		following modifier.  The |fnamemodify()| function can be used
+		to modify normal file names.
+
+		When using '%' or '#', and the current or alternate file name
+		is not defined, an empty string is used.  Using "%:p" in a
+		buffer with no name, results in the current directory, with a
+		'/' added.
+
+		When {string} does not start with '%', '#' or '<', it is
+		expanded like a file name is expanded on the command line.
+		'suffixes' and 'wildignore' are used, unless the optional
+		{nosuf} argument is given and it is |TRUE|.
+		Names for non-existing files are included.  The "**" item can
+		be used to search in a directory tree.  For example, to find
+		all "README" files in the current directory and below: >
+			:echo expand("**/README")
+<
+		expand() can also be used to expand variables and environment
+		variables that are only known in a shell.  But this can be
+		slow, because a shell may be used to do the expansion.  See
+		|expr-env-expand|.
+		The expanded variable is still handled like a list of file
+		names.  When an environment variable cannot be expanded, it is
+		left unchanged.  Thus ":echo expand('$FOOBAR')" results in
+		"$FOOBAR".
+
+		See |glob()| for finding existing files.  See |system()| for
+		getting the raw output of an external command.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Getpattern()->expand()
+
+expandcmd({string})					*expandcmd()*
+		Expand special items in String {string} like what is done for
+		an Ex command such as `:edit`.  This expands special keywords,
+		like with |expand()|, and environment variables, anywhere in
+		{string}.  "~user" and "~/path" are only expanded at the
+		start.
+		Returns the expanded string.  Example: >
+			:echo expandcmd('make %<.o')
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetCommand()->expandcmd()
+<
+extend({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}])			*extend()*
+		{expr1} and {expr2} must be both |Lists| or both
+		|Dictionaries|.
+
+		If they are |Lists|: Append {expr2} to {expr1}.
+		If {expr3} is given insert the items of {expr2} before the
+		item with index {expr3} in {expr1}.  When {expr3} is zero
+		insert before the first item.  When {expr3} is equal to
+		len({expr1}) then {expr2} is appended.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo sort(extend(mylist, [7, 5]))
+			:call extend(mylist, [2, 3], 1)
+<		When {expr1} is the same List as {expr2} then the number of
+		items copied is equal to the original length of the List.
+		E.g., when {expr3} is 1 you get N new copies of the first item
+		(where N is the original length of the List).
+		Use |add()| to concatenate one item to a list.  To concatenate
+		two lists into a new list use the + operator: >
+			:let newlist = [1, 2, 3] + [4, 5]
+<
+		If they are |Dictionaries|:
+		Add all entries from {expr2} to {expr1}.
+		If a key exists in both {expr1} and {expr2} then {expr3} is
+		used to decide what to do:
+		{expr3} = "keep": keep the value of {expr1}
+		{expr3} = "force": use the value of {expr2}
+		{expr3} = "error": give an error message		*E737*
+		When {expr3} is omitted then "force" is assumed.
+
+		{expr1} is changed when {expr2} is not empty.  If necessary
+		make a copy of {expr1} first.
+		{expr2} remains unchanged.
+		When {expr1} is locked and {expr2} is not empty the operation
+		fails.
+		Returns {expr1}.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mylist->extend(otherlist)
+
+
+extendnew({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}])			*extendnew()*
+		Like |extend()| but instead of adding items to {expr1} a new
+		List or Dictionary is created and returned.  {expr1} remains
+		unchanged.  Items can still be changed by {expr2}, if you
+		don't want that use |deepcopy()| first.
+
+
+feedkeys({string} [, {mode}])				*feedkeys()*
+		Characters in {string} are queued for processing as if they
+		come from a mapping or were typed by the user.
+
+		By default the string is added to the end of the typeahead
+		buffer, thus if a mapping is still being executed the
+		characters come after them.  Use the 'i' flag to insert before
+		other characters, they will be executed next, before any
+		characters from a mapping.
+
+		The function does not wait for processing of keys contained in
+		{string}.
+
+		To include special keys into {string}, use double-quotes
+		and "\..." notation |expr-quote|. For example,
+		feedkeys("\<CR>") simulates pressing of the <Enter> key. But
+		feedkeys('\<CR>') pushes 5 characters.
+		A special code that might be useful is <Ignore>, it exits the
+		wait for a character without doing anything.  *<Ignore>*
+
+		{mode} is a String, which can contain these character flags:
+		'm'	Remap keys. This is default.  If {mode} is absent,
+			keys are remapped.
+		'n'	Do not remap keys.
+		't'	Handle keys as if typed; otherwise they are handled as
+			if coming from a mapping.  This matters for undo,
+			opening folds, etc.
+		'L'	Lowlevel input.  Only works for Unix or when using the
+			GUI. Keys are used as if they were coming from the
+			terminal.  Other flags are not used.  *E980*
+			When a CTRL-C interrupts and 't' is included it sets
+			the internal "got_int" flag.
+		'i'	Insert the string instead of appending (see above).
+		'x'	Execute commands until typeahead is empty.  This is
+			similar to using ":normal!".  You can call feedkeys()
+			several times without 'x' and then one time with 'x'
+			(possibly with an empty {string}) to execute all the
+			typeahead.  Note that when Vim ends in Insert mode it
+			will behave as if <Esc> is typed, to avoid getting
+			stuck, waiting for a character to be typed before the
+			script continues.
+			Note that if you manage to call feedkeys() while
+			executing commands, thus calling it recursively, then
+			all typeahead will be consumed by the last call.
+		'!'	When used with 'x' will not end Insert mode. Can be
+			used in a test when a timer is set to exit Insert mode
+			a little later.  Useful for testing CursorHoldI.
+
+		Return value is always 0.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetInput()->feedkeys()
+
+filereadable({file})					*filereadable()*
+		The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| when a file with the
+		name {file} exists, and can be read.  If {file} doesn't exist,
+		or is a directory, the result is |FALSE|.  {file} is any
+		expression, which is used as a String.
+		If you don't care about the file being readable you can use
+		|glob()|.
+		{file} is used as-is, you may want to expand wildcards first: >
+			echo filereadable('~/.vimrc')
+			0
+			echo filereadable(expand('~/.vimrc'))
+			1
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetName()->filereadable()
+<							*file_readable()*
+		Obsolete name: file_readable().
+
+
+filewritable({file})					*filewritable()*
+		The result is a Number, which is 1 when a file with the
+		name {file} exists, and can be written.  If {file} doesn't
+		exist, or is not writable, the result is 0.  If {file} is a
+		directory, and we can write to it, the result is 2.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetName()->filewritable()
+
+
+filter({expr1}, {expr2})				*filter()*
+		{expr1} must be a |List|, |String|, |Blob| or |Dictionary|.
+		For each item in {expr1} evaluate {expr2} and when the result
+		is zero or false remove the item from the |List| or
+		|Dictionary|.  Similarly for each byte in a |Blob| and each
+		charactor in a |String|.
+
+		{expr2} must be a |string| or |Funcref|.
+
+		If {expr2} is a |string|, inside {expr2} |v:val| has the value
+		of the current item.  For a |Dictionary| |v:key| has the key
+		of the current item and for a |List| |v:key| has the index of
+		the current item.  For a |Blob| |v:key| has the index of the
+		current byte. For a |String| |v:key| has the index of the
+		current character.
+		Examples: >
+			call filter(mylist, 'v:val !~ "OLD"')
+<		Removes the items where "OLD" appears. >
+			call filter(mydict, 'v:key >= 8')
+<		Removes the items with a key below 8. >
+			call filter(var, 0)
+<		Removes all the items, thus clears the |List| or |Dictionary|.
+
+		Note that {expr2} is the result of expression and is then
+		used as an expression again.  Often it is good to use a
+		|literal-string| to avoid having to double backslashes.
+
+		If {expr2} is a |Funcref| it must take two arguments:
+			1. the key or the index of the current item.
+			2. the value of the current item.
+		The function must return |TRUE| if the item should be kept.
+		Example that keeps the odd items of a list: >
+			func Odd(idx, val)
+			  return a:idx % 2 == 1
+			endfunc
+			call filter(mylist, function('Odd'))
+<		It is shorter when using a |lambda|: >
+			call filter(myList, {idx, val -> idx * val <= 42})
+<		If you do not use "val" you can leave it out: >
+			call filter(myList, {idx -> idx % 2 == 1})
+<
+		In |Vim9| script the result must be true, false, zero or one.
+		Other values will result in a type error.
+
+		For a |List| and a |Dictionary| the operation is done
+		in-place.  If you want it to remain unmodified make a copy
+		first: >
+			:let l = filter(copy(mylist), 'v:val =~ "KEEP"')
+
+<		Returns {expr1}, the |List| or |Dictionary| that was filtered,
+		or a new |Blob| or |String|. 
+		When an error is encountered while evaluating {expr2} no
+		further items in {expr1} are processed.
+		When {expr2} is a Funcref errors inside a function are ignored,
+		unless it was defined with the "abort" flag.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mylist->filter(expr2)
+
+finddir({name} [, {path} [, {count}]])				*finddir()*
+		Find directory {name} in {path}.  Supports both downwards and
+		upwards recursive directory searches.  See |file-searching|
+		for the syntax of {path}.
+
+		Returns the path of the first found match.  When the found
+		directory is below the current directory a relative path is
+		returned.  Otherwise a full path is returned.
+		If {path} is omitted or empty then 'path' is used.
+
+		If the optional {count} is given, find {count}'s occurrence of
+		{name} in {path} instead of the first one.
+		When {count} is negative return all the matches in a |List|.
+
+		This is quite similar to the ex-command `:find`.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+file_in_path|
+		feature}
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetName()->finddir()
+
+findfile({name} [, {path} [, {count}]])				*findfile()*
+		Just like |finddir()|, but find a file instead of a directory.
+		Uses 'suffixesadd'.
+		Example: >
+			:echo findfile("tags.vim", ".;")
+<		Searches from the directory of the current file upwards until
+		it finds the file "tags.vim".
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetName()->findfile()
+
+flatten({list} [, {maxdepth}])					*flatten()*
+		Flatten {list} up to {maxdepth} levels.  Without {maxdepth}
+		the result is a |List| without nesting, as if {maxdepth} is
+		a very large number.
+		The {list} is changed in place, use |flattennew()| if you do
+		not want that.
+		In Vim9 script flatten() cannot be used, you must always use
+		|flattennew()|.
+								*E900*
+		{maxdepth} means how deep in nested lists changes are made.
+		{list} is not modified when {maxdepth} is 0.
+		{maxdepth} must be positive number.
+
+		If there is an error the number zero is returned.
+
+		Example: >
+			:echo flatten([1, [2, [3, 4]], 5])
+<			[1, 2, 3, 4, 5] >
+			:echo flatten([1, [2, [3, 4]], 5], 1)
+<			[1, 2, [3, 4], 5]
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mylist->flatten()
+<
+flattennew({list} [, {maxdepth}])			*flattennew()*
+		Like |flatten()| but first make a copy of {list}.
+
+
+float2nr({expr})					*float2nr()*
+		Convert {expr} to a Number by omitting the part after the
+		decimal point.
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a Number.
+		When the value of {expr} is out of range for a |Number| the
+		result is truncated to 0x7fffffff or -0x7fffffff (or when
+		64-bit Number support is enabled, 0x7fffffffffffffff or
+		-0x7fffffffffffffff).  NaN results in -0x80000000 (or when
+		64-bit Number support is enabled, -0x8000000000000000).
+		Examples: >
+			echo float2nr(3.95)
+<			3  >
+			echo float2nr(-23.45)
+<			-23  >
+			echo float2nr(1.0e100)
+<			2147483647  (or 9223372036854775807) >
+			echo float2nr(-1.0e150)
+<			-2147483647 (or -9223372036854775807) >
+			echo float2nr(1.0e-100)
+<			0
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->float2nr()
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+floor({expr})							*floor()*
+		Return the largest integral value less than or equal to
+		{expr} as a |Float| (round down).
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			echo floor(1.856)
+<			1.0  >
+			echo floor(-5.456)
+<			-6.0  >
+			echo floor(4.0)
+<			4.0
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->floor()
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+fmod({expr1}, {expr2})					*fmod()*
+		Return the remainder of {expr1} / {expr2}, even if the
+		division is not representable.  Returns {expr1} - i * {expr2}
+		for some integer i such that if {expr2} is non-zero, the
+		result has the same sign as {expr1} and magnitude less than
+		the magnitude of {expr2}.  If {expr2} is zero, the value
+		returned is zero.  The value returned is a |Float|.
+		{expr1} and {expr2} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo fmod(12.33, 1.22)
+<			0.13 >
+			:echo fmod(-12.33, 1.22)
+<			-0.13
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->fmod(1.22)
+<
+		{only available when compiled with |+float| feature}
+
+
+fnameescape({string})					*fnameescape()*
+		Escape {string} for use as file name command argument.  All
+		characters that have a special meaning, such as '%' and '|'
+		are escaped with a backslash.
+		For most systems the characters escaped are
+		" \t\n*?[{`$\\%#'\"|!<".  For systems where a backslash
+		appears in a filename, it depends on the value of 'isfname'.
+		A leading '+' and '>' is also escaped (special after |:edit|
+		and |:write|).  And a "-" by itself (special after |:cd|).
+		Example: >
+			:let fname = '+some str%nge|name'
+			:exe "edit " . fnameescape(fname)
+<		results in executing: >
+			edit \+some\ str\%nge\|name
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetName()->fnameescape()
+
+fnamemodify({fname}, {mods})				*fnamemodify()*
+		Modify file name {fname} according to {mods}.  {mods} is a
+		string of characters like it is used for file names on the
+		command line.  See |filename-modifiers|.
+		Example: >
+			:echo fnamemodify("main.c", ":p:h")
+<		results in: >
+			/home/mool/vim/vim/src
+<		If {mods} is empty then {fname} is returned.
+		Note: Environment variables don't work in {fname}, use
+		|expand()| first then.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetName()->fnamemodify(':p:h')
+
+foldclosed({lnum})					*foldclosed()*
+		The result is a Number.  If the line {lnum} is in a closed
+		fold, the result is the number of the first line in that fold.
+		If the line {lnum} is not in a closed fold, -1 is returned.
+		{lnum} is used like with |getline()|.  Thus "." is the current
+		line, "'m" mark m, etc.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetLnum()->foldclosed()
+
+foldclosedend({lnum})					*foldclosedend()*
+		The result is a Number.  If the line {lnum} is in a closed
+		fold, the result is the number of the last line in that fold.
+		If the line {lnum} is not in a closed fold, -1 is returned.
+		{lnum} is used like with |getline()|.  Thus "." is the current
+		line, "'m" mark m, etc.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetLnum()->foldclosedend()
+
+foldlevel({lnum})					*foldlevel()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the foldlevel of line {lnum}
+		in the current buffer.  For nested folds the deepest level is
+		returned.  If there is no fold at line {lnum}, zero is
+		returned.  It doesn't matter if the folds are open or closed.
+		When used while updating folds (from 'foldexpr') -1 is
+		returned for lines where folds are still to be updated and the
+		foldlevel is unknown.  As a special case the level of the
+		previous line is usually available.
+		{lnum} is used like with |getline()|.  Thus "." is the current
+		line, "'m" mark m, etc.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetLnum()->foldlevel()
+<
+							*foldtext()*
+foldtext()	Returns a String, to be displayed for a closed fold.  This is
+		the default function used for the 'foldtext' option and should
+		only be called from evaluating 'foldtext'.  It uses the
+		|v:foldstart|, |v:foldend| and |v:folddashes| variables.
+		The returned string looks like this: >
+			+-- 45 lines: abcdef
+<		The number of leading dashes depends on the foldlevel.  The
+		"45" is the number of lines in the fold.  "abcdef" is the text
+		in the first non-blank line of the fold.  Leading white space,
+		"//" or "/*" and the text from the 'foldmarker' and
+		'commentstring' options is removed.
+		When used to draw the actual foldtext, the rest of the line
+		will be filled with the fold char from the 'fillchars'
+		setting.
+		{not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature}
+
+foldtextresult({lnum})					*foldtextresult()*
+		Returns the text that is displayed for the closed fold at line
+		{lnum}.  Evaluates 'foldtext' in the appropriate context.
+		When there is no closed fold at {lnum} an empty string is
+		returned.
+		{lnum} is used like with |getline()|.  Thus "." is the current
+		line, "'m" mark m, etc.
+		Useful when exporting folded text, e.g., to HTML.
+		{not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature}
+
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetLnum()->foldtextresult()
+<
+							*foreground()*
+foreground()	Move the Vim window to the foreground.  Useful when sent from
+		a client to a Vim server. |remote_send()|
+		On Win32 systems this might not work, the OS does not always
+		allow a window to bring itself to the foreground.  Use
+		|remote_foreground()| instead.
+		{only in the Win32, Athena, Motif and GTK GUI versions and the
+		Win32 console version}
+
+fullcommand({name})						*fullcommand()*
+		Get the full command name from a short abbreviated command
+		name; see |20.2| for details on command abbreviations.
+
+		The string argument {name} may start with a `:` and can
+		include a [range], these are skipped and not returned.
+		Returns an empty string if a command doesn't exist or if it's
+		ambiguous (for user-defined commands).
+
+		For example `fullcommand('s')`, `fullcommand('sub')`,
+		`fullcommand(':%substitute')` all return "substitute".
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetName()->fullcommand()
+<
+						*funcref()*
+funcref({name} [, {arglist}] [, {dict}])
+		Just like |function()|, but the returned Funcref will lookup
+		the function by reference, not by name.  This matters when the
+		function {name} is redefined later.
+
+		Unlike |function()|, {name} must be an existing user function.
+		Also for autoloaded functions. {name} cannot be a builtin
+		function.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetFuncname()->funcref([arg])
+<
+				*function()* *partial* *E700* *E922* *E923*
+function({name} [, {arglist}] [, {dict}])
+		Return a |Funcref| variable that refers to function {name}.
+		{name} can be the name of a user defined function or an
+		internal function.
+
+		{name} can also be a Funcref or a partial.  When it is a
+		partial the dict stored in it will be used and the {dict}
+		argument is not allowed. E.g.: >
+			let FuncWithArg = function(dict.Func, [arg])
+			let Broken = function(dict.Func, [arg], dict)
+<
+		When using the Funcref the function will be found by {name},
+		also when it was redefined later.  Use |funcref()| to keep the
+		same function.
+
+		When {arglist} or {dict} is present this creates a partial.
+		That means the argument list and/or the dictionary is stored in
+		the Funcref and will be used when the Funcref is called.
+
+		The arguments are passed to the function in front of other
+		arguments, but after any argument from |method|.  Example: >
+			func Callback(arg1, arg2, name)
+			...
+			let Partial = function('Callback', ['one', 'two'])
+			...
+			call Partial('name')
+<		Invokes the function as with: >
+			call Callback('one', 'two', 'name')
+
+<		With a |method|: >
+			func Callback(one, two, three)
+			...
+			let Partial = function('Callback', ['two'])
+			...
+			eval 'one'->Partial('three')
+<		Invokes the function as with: >
+			call Callback('one', 'two', 'three')
+
+<		The function() call can be nested to add more arguments to the
+		Funcref.  The extra arguments are appended to the list of
+		arguments.  Example: >
+			func Callback(arg1, arg2, name)
+			...
+			let Func = function('Callback', ['one'])
+			let Func2 = function(Func, ['two'])
+			...
+			call Func2('name')
+<		Invokes the function as with: >
+			call Callback('one', 'two', 'name')
+
+<		The Dictionary is only useful when calling a "dict" function.
+		In that case the {dict} is passed in as "self". Example: >
+			function Callback() dict
+			   echo "called for " . self.name
+			endfunction
+			...
+			let context = {"name": "example"}
+			let Func = function('Callback', context)
+			...
+			call Func()	" will echo: called for example
+<		The use of function() is not needed when there are no extra
+		arguments, these two are equivalent: >
+			let Func = function('Callback', context)
+			let Func = context.Callback
+
+<		The argument list and the Dictionary can be combined: >
+			function Callback(arg1, count) dict
+			...
+			let context = {"name": "example"}
+			let Func = function('Callback', ['one'], context)
+			...
+			call Func(500)
+<		Invokes the function as with: >
+			call context.Callback('one', 500)
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetFuncname()->function([arg])
+
+
+garbagecollect([{atexit}])				*garbagecollect()*
+		Cleanup unused |Lists|, |Dictionaries|, |Channels| and |Jobs|
+		that have circular references.
+
+		There is hardly ever a need to invoke this function, as it is
+		automatically done when Vim runs out of memory or is waiting
+		for the user to press a key after 'updatetime'.  Items without
+		circular references are always freed when they become unused.
+		This is useful if you have deleted a very big |List| and/or
+		|Dictionary| with circular references in a script that runs
+		for a long time.
+
+		When the optional {atexit} argument is one, garbage
+		collection will also be done when exiting Vim, if it wasn't
+		done before.  This is useful when checking for memory leaks.
+
+		The garbage collection is not done immediately but only when
+		it's safe to perform.  This is when waiting for the user to
+		type a character.  To force garbage collection immediately use
+		|test_garbagecollect_now()|.
+
+get({list}, {idx} [, {default}])			*get()*
+		Get item {idx} from |List| {list}.  When this item is not
+		available return {default}.  Return zero when {default} is
+		omitted.
+		Preferably used as a |method|: >
+			mylist->get(idx)
+get({blob}, {idx} [, {default}])
+		Get byte {idx} from |Blob| {blob}.  When this byte is not
+		available return {default}.  Return -1 when {default} is
+		omitted.
+		Preferably used as a |method|: >
+			myblob->get(idx)
+get({dict}, {key} [, {default}])
+		Get item with key {key} from |Dictionary| {dict}.  When this
+		item is not available return {default}.  Return zero when
+		{default} is omitted.  Useful example: >
+			let val = get(g:, 'var_name', 'default')
+<		This gets the value of g:var_name if it exists, and uses
+		'default' when it does not exist.
+		Preferably used as a |method|: >
+			mydict->get(key)
+get({func}, {what})
+		Get an item with from Funcref {func}.  Possible values for
+		{what} are:
+			"name"	The function name
+			"func"	The function
+			"dict"	The dictionary
+			"args"	The list with arguments
+		Preferably used as a |method|: >
+			myfunc->get(what)
+<
+							*getbufinfo()*
+getbufinfo([{buf}])
+getbufinfo([{dict}])
+		Get information about buffers as a List of Dictionaries.
+
+		Without an argument information about all the buffers is
+		returned.
+
+		When the argument is a |Dictionary| only the buffers matching
+		the specified criteria are returned.  The following keys can
+		be specified in {dict}:
+			buflisted	include only listed buffers.
+			bufloaded	include only loaded buffers.
+			bufmodified	include only modified buffers.
+
+		Otherwise, {buf} specifies a particular buffer to return
+		information for.  For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()|
+		above.  If the buffer is found the returned List has one item.
+		Otherwise the result is an empty list.
+
+		Each returned List item is a dictionary with the following
+		entries:
+			bufnr		Buffer number.
+			changed		TRUE if the buffer is modified.
+			changedtick	Number of changes made to the buffer.
+			hidden		TRUE if the buffer is hidden.
+			lastused	Timestamp in seconds, like
+					|localtime()|, when the buffer was
+					last used.
+					{only with the |+viminfo| feature}
+			listed		TRUE if the buffer is listed.
+			lnum		Line number used for the buffer when
+					opened in the current window.
+					Only valid if the buffer has been
+					displayed in the window in the past.
+					If you want the line number of the
+					last known cursor position in a given
+					window, use |line()|: >
+						:echo line('.', {winid})
+<
+			linecount	Number of lines in the buffer (only
+					valid when loaded)
+			loaded		TRUE if the buffer is loaded.
+			name		Full path to the file in the buffer.
+			signs		List of signs placed in the buffer.
+					Each list item is a dictionary with
+					the following fields:
+					    id	  sign identifier
+					    lnum  line number
+					    name  sign name
+			variables	A reference to the dictionary with
+					buffer-local variables.
+			windows		List of |window-ID|s that display this
+					buffer
+			popups		List of popup |window-ID|s that
+					display this buffer
+
+		Examples: >
+			for buf in getbufinfo()
+			    echo buf.name
+			endfor
+			for buf in getbufinfo({'buflisted':1})
+			    if buf.changed
+				....
+			    endif
+			endfor
+<
+		To get buffer-local options use: >
+			getbufvar({bufnr}, '&option_name')
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetBufnr()->getbufinfo()
+<
+
+							*getbufline()*
+getbufline({buf}, {lnum} [, {end}])
+		Return a |List| with the lines starting from {lnum} to {end}
+		(inclusive) in the buffer {buf}.  If {end} is omitted, a
+		|List| with only the line {lnum} is returned.
+
+		For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above.
+
+		For {lnum} and {end} "$" can be used for the last line of the
+		buffer.  Otherwise a number must be used.
+
+		When {lnum} is smaller than 1 or bigger than the number of
+		lines in the buffer, an empty |List| is returned.
+
+		When {end} is greater than the number of lines in the buffer,
+		it is treated as {end} is set to the number of lines in the
+		buffer.  When {end} is before {lnum} an empty |List| is
+		returned.
+
+		This function works only for loaded buffers.  For unloaded and
+		non-existing buffers, an empty |List| is returned.
+
+		Example: >
+			:let lines = getbufline(bufnr("myfile"), 1, "$")
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetBufnr()->getbufline(lnum)
+
+getbufvar({buf}, {varname} [, {def}])				*getbufvar()*
+		The result is the value of option or local buffer variable
+		{varname} in buffer {buf}.  Note that the name without "b:"
+		must be used.
+		The {varname} argument is a string.
+		When {varname} is empty returns a |Dictionary| with all the
+		buffer-local variables.
+		When {varname} is equal to "&" returns a |Dictionary| with all
+		the buffer-local options.
+		Otherwise, when {varname} starts with "&" returns the value of
+		a buffer-local option.
+		This also works for a global or buffer-local option, but it
+		doesn't work for a global variable, window-local variable or
+		window-local option.
+		For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above.
+		When the buffer or variable doesn't exist {def} or an empty
+		string is returned, there is no error message.
+		Examples: >
+			:let bufmodified = getbufvar(1, "&mod")
+			:echo "todo myvar = " . getbufvar("todo", "myvar")
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetBufnr()->getbufvar(varname)
+<
+getchangelist([{buf}])					*getchangelist()*
+		Returns the |changelist| for the buffer {buf}. For the use
+		of {buf}, see |bufname()| above. If buffer {buf} doesn't
+		exist, an empty list is returned.
+
+		The returned list contains two entries: a list with the change
+		locations and the current position in the list.  Each
+		entry in the change list is a dictionary with the following
+		entries:
+			col		column number
+			coladd		column offset for 'virtualedit'
+			lnum		line number
+		If buffer {buf} is the current buffer, then the current
+		position refers to the position in the list. For other
+		buffers, it is set to the length of the list.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetBufnr()->getchangelist()
+
+getchar([expr])						*getchar()*
+		Get a single character from the user or input stream.
+		If [expr] is omitted, wait until a character is available.
+		If [expr] is 0, only get a character when one is available.
+			Return zero otherwise.
+		If [expr] is 1, only check if a character is available, it is
+			not consumed.  Return zero if no character available.
+		If you prefer always getting a string use |getcharstr()|.
+
+		Without [expr] and when [expr] is 0 a whole character or
+		special key is returned.  If it is a single character, the
+		result is a number.  Use nr2char() to convert it to a String.
+		Otherwise a String is returned with the encoded character.
+		For a special key it's a String with a sequence of bytes
+		starting with 0x80 (decimal: 128).  This is the same value as
+		the String "\<Key>", e.g., "\<Left>".  The returned value is
+		also a String when a modifier (shift, control, alt) was used
+		that is not included in the character.
+
+		When [expr] is 0 and Esc is typed, there will be a short delay
+		while Vim waits to see if this is the start of an escape
+		sequence.
+
+		When [expr] is 1 only the first byte is returned.  For a
+		one-byte character it is the character itself as a number.
+		Use nr2char() to convert it to a String.
+
+		Use getcharmod() to obtain any additional modifiers.
+
+		When the user clicks a mouse button, the mouse event will be
+		returned.  The position can then be found in |v:mouse_col|,
+		|v:mouse_lnum|, |v:mouse_winid| and |v:mouse_win|.
+		|getmousepos()| can also be used.  Mouse move events will be
+		ignored.
+		This example positions the mouse as it would normally happen: >
+			let c = getchar()
+			if c == "\<LeftMouse>" && v:mouse_win > 0
+			  exe v:mouse_win . "wincmd w"
+			  exe v:mouse_lnum
+			  exe "normal " . v:mouse_col . "|"
+			endif
+<
+		When using bracketed paste only the first character is
+		returned, the rest of the pasted text is dropped.
+		|xterm-bracketed-paste|.
+
+		There is no prompt, you will somehow have to make clear to the
+		user that a character has to be typed.  The screen is not
+		redrawn, e.g. when resizing the window.  When using a popup
+		window it should work better with a |popup-filter|.
+
+		There is no mapping for the character.
+		Key codes are replaced, thus when the user presses the <Del>
+		key you get the code for the <Del> key, not the raw character
+		sequence.  Examples: >
+			getchar() == "\<Del>"
+			getchar() == "\<S-Left>"
+<		This example redefines "f" to ignore case: >
+			:nmap f :call FindChar()<CR>
+			:function FindChar()
+			:  let c = nr2char(getchar())
+			:  while col('.') < col('$') - 1
+			:    normal l
+			:    if getline('.')[col('.') - 1] ==? c
+			:      break
+			:    endif
+			:  endwhile
+			:endfunction
+<
+		You may also receive synthetic characters, such as
+		|<CursorHold>|. Often you will want to ignore this and get
+		another character: >
+			:function GetKey()
+			:  let c = getchar()
+			:  while c == "\<CursorHold>"
+			:    let c = getchar()
+			:  endwhile
+			:  return c
+			:endfunction
+
+getcharmod()						*getcharmod()*
+		The result is a Number which is the state of the modifiers for
+		the last obtained character with getchar() or in another way.
+		These values are added together:
+			2	shift
+			4	control
+			8	alt (meta)
+			16	meta (when it's different from ALT)
+			32	mouse double click
+			64	mouse triple click
+			96	mouse quadruple click (== 32 + 64)
+			128	command (Macintosh only)
+		Only the modifiers that have not been included in the
+		character itself are obtained.  Thus Shift-a results in "A"
+		without a modifier.
+
+							*getcharpos()*
+getcharpos({expr})
+		Get the position for String {expr}. Same as |getpos()| but the
+		column number in the returned List is a character index
+		instead of a byte index.
+		If |getpos()| returns a very large column number, such as
+		2147483647, then getcharpos() will return the character index
+		of the last character.
+
+		Example:
+		With the cursor on '세' in line 5 with text "여보세요": >
+			getcharpos('.')		returns [0, 5, 3, 0]
+			getpos('.')		returns [0, 5, 7, 0]
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetMark()->getcharpos()
+
+getcharsearch()						*getcharsearch()*
+		Return the current character search information as a {dict}
+		with the following entries:
+
+		    char	character previously used for a character
+				search (|t|, |f|, |T|, or |F|); empty string
+				if no character search has been performed
+		    forward	direction of character search; 1 for forward,
+				0 for backward
+		    until	type of character search; 1 for a |t| or |T|
+				character search, 0 for an |f| or |F|
+				character search
+
+		This can be useful to always have |;| and |,| search
+		forward/backward regardless of the direction of the previous
+		character search: >
+			:nnoremap <expr> ; getcharsearch().forward ? ';' : ','
+			:nnoremap <expr> , getcharsearch().forward ? ',' : ';'
+<		Also see |setcharsearch()|.
+
+
+getcharstr([expr])					*getcharstr()*
+		Get a single character from the user or input stream as a
+		string.
+		If [expr] is omitted, wait until a character is available.
+		If [expr] is 0 or false, only get a character when one is
+			available.  Return an empty string otherwise.
+		If [expr] is 1 or true, only check if a character is
+			available, it is not consumed.  Return an empty string
+			if no character is available.
+		Otherwise this works like |getchar()|, except that a number
+		result is converted to a string.
+
+
+getcmdline()						*getcmdline()*
+		Return the current command-line.  Only works when the command
+		line is being edited, thus requires use of |c_CTRL-\_e| or
+		|c_CTRL-R_=|.
+		Example: >
+			:cmap <F7> <C-\>eescape(getcmdline(), ' \')<CR>
+<		Also see |getcmdtype()|, |getcmdpos()| and |setcmdpos()|.
+		Returns an empty string when entering a password or using
+		|inputsecret()|.
+
+getcmdpos()						*getcmdpos()*
+		Return the position of the cursor in the command line as a
+		byte count.  The first column is 1.
+		Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of
+		|c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=| or an expression mapping.
+		Returns 0 otherwise.
+		Also see |getcmdtype()|, |setcmdpos()| and |getcmdline()|.
+
+getcmdtype()						*getcmdtype()*
+		Return the current command-line type. Possible return values
+		are:
+		    :	normal Ex command
+		    >	debug mode command |debug-mode|
+		    /	forward search command
+		    ?	backward search command
+		    @	|input()| command
+		    -	|:insert| or |:append| command
+		    =	|i_CTRL-R_=|
+		Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of
+		|c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=| or an expression mapping.
+		Returns an empty string otherwise.
+		Also see |getcmdpos()|, |setcmdpos()| and |getcmdline()|.
+
+getcmdwintype()						*getcmdwintype()*
+		Return the current |command-line-window| type. Possible return
+		values are the same as |getcmdtype()|. Returns an empty string
+		when not in the command-line window.
+
+getcompletion({pat}, {type} [, {filtered}])		*getcompletion()*
+		Return a list of command-line completion matches. The String
+		{type} argument specifies what for.  The following completion
+		types are supported:
+
+		arglist		file names in argument list
+		augroup		autocmd groups
+		buffer		buffer names
+		behave		:behave suboptions
+		color		color schemes
+		command		Ex command
+		cmdline		|cmdline-completion| result
+		compiler	compilers
+		cscope		|:cscope| suboptions
+		diff_buffer     |:diffget| and |:diffput| completion
+		dir		directory names
+		environment	environment variable names
+		event		autocommand events
+		expression	Vim expression
+		file		file and directory names
+		file_in_path	file and directory names in |'path'|
+		filetype	filetype names |'filetype'|
+		function	function name
+		help		help subjects
+		highlight	highlight groups
+		history		:history suboptions
+		locale		locale names (as output of locale -a)
+		mapclear	buffer argument
+		mapping		mapping name
+		menu		menus
+		messages	|:messages| suboptions
+		option		options
+		packadd		optional package |pack-add| names
+		shellcmd	Shell command
+		sign		|:sign| suboptions
+		syntax		syntax file names |'syntax'|
+		syntime		|:syntime| suboptions
+		tag		tags
+		tag_listfiles	tags, file names
+		user		user names
+		var		user variables
+
+		If {pat} is an empty string, then all the matches are
+		returned.  Otherwise only items matching {pat} are returned.
+		See |wildcards| for the use of special characters in {pat}.
+
+		If the optional {filtered} flag is set to 1, then 'wildignore'
+		is applied to filter the results.  Otherwise all the matches
+		are returned. The 'wildignorecase' option always applies.
+
+		If {type} is "cmdline", then the |cmdline-completion| result is
+		returned.  For example, to complete the possible values after
+		a ":call" command: >
+			echo getcompletion('call ', 'cmdline')
+<
+		If there are no matches, an empty list is returned.  An
+		invalid value for {type} produces an error.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetPattern()->getcompletion('color')
+<
+							*getcurpos()*
+getcurpos([{winid}])
+		Get the position of the cursor.  This is like getpos('.'), but
+		includes an extra "curswant" item in the list:
+		    [0, lnum, col, off, curswant] ~
+		The "curswant" number is the preferred column when moving the
+		cursor vertically.  Also see |getcursorcharpos()| and
+		|getpos()|.
+		The first "bufnum" item is always zero. The byte position of
+		the cursor is returned in 'col'. To get the character
+		position, use |getcursorcharpos()|.
+
+		The optional {winid} argument can specify the window.  It can
+		be the window number or the |window-ID|.  The last known
+		cursor position is returned, this may be invalid for the
+		current value of the buffer if it is not the current window.
+		If {winid} is invalid a list with zeroes is returned.
+
+		This can be used to save and restore the cursor position: >
+			let save_cursor = getcurpos()
+			MoveTheCursorAround
+			call setpos('.', save_cursor)
+<		Note that this only works within the window.  See
+		|winrestview()| for restoring more state.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetWinid()->getcurpos()
+<
+							*getcursorcharpos()*
+getcursorcharpos([{winid}])
+		Same as |getcurpos()| but the column number in the returned
+		List is a character index instead of a byte index.
+
+		Example:
+		With the cursor on '보' in line 3 with text "여보세요": >
+			getcursorcharpos()	returns [0, 3, 2, 0, 3]
+			getcurpos()		returns [0, 3, 4, 0, 3]
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetWinid()->getcursorcharpos()
+
+<							*getcwd()*
+getcwd([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]])
+		The result is a String, which is the name of the current
+		working directory.  'autochdir' is ignored.
+
+		With {winnr} return the local current directory of this window
+		in the current tab page.  {winnr} can be the window number or
+		the |window-ID|.
+		If {winnr} is -1 return the name of the global working
+		directory.  See also |haslocaldir()|.
+
+		With {winnr} and {tabnr} return the local current directory of
+		the window in the specified tab page. If {winnr} is -1 return
+		the working directory of the tabpage.
+		If {winnr} is zero use the current window, if {tabnr} is zero
+		use the current tabpage.
+		Without any arguments, return the actual working directory of
+		the current window.
+		Return an empty string if the arguments are invalid.
+
+		Examples: >
+			" Get the working directory of the current window
+			:echo getcwd()
+			:echo getcwd(0)
+			:echo getcwd(0, 0)
+			" Get the working directory of window 3 in tabpage 2
+			:echo getcwd(3, 2)
+			" Get the global working directory
+			:echo getcwd(-1)
+			" Get the working directory of tabpage 3
+			:echo getcwd(-1, 3)
+			" Get the working directory of current tabpage
+			:echo getcwd(-1, 0)
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetWinnr()->getcwd()
+
+getenv({name})						*getenv()*
+		Return the value of environment variable {name}.  The {name}
+		argument is a string, without a leading '$'.  Example: >
+			myHome = getenv('HOME')
+
+<		When the variable does not exist |v:null| is returned.  That
+		is different from a variable set to an empty string, although
+		some systems interpret the empty value as the variable being
+		deleted.  See also |expr-env|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetVarname()->getenv()
+
+getfontname([{name}])					*getfontname()*
+		Without an argument returns the name of the normal font being
+		used.  Like what is used for the Normal highlight group
+		|hl-Normal|.
+		With an argument a check is done whether String {name} is a
+		valid font name.  If not then an empty string is returned.
+		Otherwise the actual font name is returned, or {name} if the
+		GUI does not support obtaining the real name.
+		Only works when the GUI is running, thus not in your vimrc or
+		gvimrc file.  Use the |GUIEnter| autocommand to use this
+		function just after the GUI has started.
+		Note that the GTK GUI accepts any font name, thus checking for
+		a valid name does not work.
+
+getfperm({fname})					*getfperm()*
+		The result is a String, which is the read, write, and execute
+		permissions of the given file {fname}.
+		If {fname} does not exist or its directory cannot be read, an
+		empty string is returned.
+		The result is of the form "rwxrwxrwx", where each group of
+		"rwx" flags represent, in turn, the permissions of the owner
+		of the file, the group the file belongs to, and other users.
+		If a user does not have a given permission the flag for this
+		is replaced with the string "-".  Examples: >
+			:echo getfperm("/etc/passwd")
+			:echo getfperm(expand("~/.vimrc"))
+<		This will hopefully (from a security point of view) display
+		the string "rw-r--r--" or even "rw-------".
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetFilename()->getfperm()
+<
+		For setting permissions use |setfperm()|.
+
+getfsize({fname})					*getfsize()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the size in bytes of the
+		given file {fname}.
+		If {fname} is a directory, 0 is returned.
+		If the file {fname} can't be found, -1 is returned.
+		If the size of {fname} is too big to fit in a Number then -2
+		is returned.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetFilename()->getfsize()
+
+getftime({fname})					*getftime()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the last modification time of
+		the given file {fname}.  The value is measured as seconds
+		since 1st Jan 1970, and may be passed to strftime().  See also
+		|localtime()| and |strftime()|.
+		If the file {fname} can't be found -1 is returned.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetFilename()->getftime()
+
+getftype({fname})					*getftype()*
+		The result is a String, which is a description of the kind of
+		file of the given file {fname}.
+		If {fname} does not exist an empty string is returned.
+		Here is a table over different kinds of files and their
+		results:
+			Normal file		"file"
+			Directory		"dir"
+			Symbolic link		"link"
+			Block device		"bdev"
+			Character device	"cdev"
+			Socket			"socket"
+			FIFO			"fifo"
+			All other		"other"
+		Example: >
+			getftype("/home")
+<		Note that a type such as "link" will only be returned on
+		systems that support it.  On some systems only "dir" and
+		"file" are returned.  On MS-Windows a symbolic link to a
+		directory returns "dir" instead of "link".
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetFilename()->getftype()
+
+getimstatus()						*getimstatus()*
+		The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| when the IME status is
+		active.
+		See 'imstatusfunc'.
+
+getjumplist([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]])			*getjumplist()*
+		Returns the |jumplist| for the specified window.
+
+		Without arguments use the current window.
+		With {winnr} only use this window in the current tab page.
+		{winnr} can also be a |window-ID|.
+		With {winnr} and {tabnr} use the window in the specified tab
+		page.
+
+		The returned list contains two entries: a list with the jump
+		locations and the last used jump position number in the list.
+		Each entry in the jump location list is a dictionary with
+		the following entries:
+			bufnr		buffer number
+			col		column number
+			coladd		column offset for 'virtualedit'
+			filename	filename if available
+			lnum		line number
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetWinnr()->getjumplist()
+
+<							*getline()*
+getline({lnum} [, {end}])
+		Without {end} the result is a String, which is line {lnum}
+		from the current buffer.  Example: >
+			getline(1)
+<		When {lnum} is a String that doesn't start with a
+		digit, |line()| is called to translate the String into a Number.
+		To get the line under the cursor: >
+			getline(".")
+<		When {lnum} is a number smaller than 1 or bigger than the
+		number of lines in the buffer, an empty string is returned.
+
+		When {end} is given the result is a |List| where each item is
+		a line from the current buffer in the range {lnum} to {end},
+		including line {end}.
+		{end} is used in the same way as {lnum}.
+		Non-existing lines are silently omitted.
+		When {end} is before {lnum} an empty |List| is returned.
+		Example: >
+			:let start = line('.')
+			:let end = search("^$") - 1
+			:let lines = getline(start, end)
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			ComputeLnum()->getline()
+
+<		To get lines from another buffer see |getbufline()|
+
+getloclist({nr} [, {what}])				*getloclist()*
+		Returns a |List| with all the entries in the location list for
+		window {nr}.  {nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
+		When {nr} is zero the current window is used.
+
+		For a location list window, the displayed location list is
+		returned.  For an invalid window number {nr}, an empty list is
+		returned. Otherwise, same as |getqflist()|.
+
+		If the optional {what} dictionary argument is supplied, then
+		returns the items listed in {what} as a dictionary. Refer to
+		|getqflist()| for the supported items in {what}.
+
+		In addition to the items supported by |getqflist()| in {what},
+		the following item is supported by |getloclist()|:
+
+			filewinid	id of the window used to display files
+					from the location list. This field is
+					applicable only when called from a
+					location list window. See
+					|location-list-file-window| for more
+					details.
+
+		Returns a |Dictionary| with default values if there is no
+		location list for the window {nr}.
+		Returns an empty Dictionary if window {nr} does not exist.
+
+		Examples (See also |getqflist-examples|): >
+			:echo getloclist(3, {'all': 0})
+			:echo getloclist(5, {'filewinid': 0})
+
+
+getmarklist([{buf}])					*getmarklist()*
+		Without the {buf} argument returns a |List| with information
+		about all the global marks. |mark|
+
+		If the optional {buf} argument is specified, returns the
+		local marks defined in buffer {buf}.  For the use of {buf},
+		see |bufname()|.
+
+		Each item in the returned List is a |Dict| with the following:
+		    mark   name of the mark prefixed by "'"
+		    pos	   a |List| with the position of the mark:
+				[bufnum, lnum, col, off]
+			   Refer to |getpos()| for more information.
+		    file   file name
+
+		Refer to |getpos()| for getting information about a specific
+		mark.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetBufnr()->getmarklist()
+
+getmatches([{win}])					*getmatches()*
+		Returns a |List| with all matches previously defined for the
+		current window by |matchadd()| and the |:match| commands.
+		|getmatches()| is useful in combination with |setmatches()|,
+		as |setmatches()| can restore a list of matches saved by
+		|getmatches()|.
+		If {win} is specified, use the window with this number or
+		window ID instead of the current window.
+		Example: >
+			:echo getmatches()
+<			[{'group': 'MyGroup1', 'pattern': 'TODO',
+			'priority': 10, 'id': 1}, {'group': 'MyGroup2',
+			'pattern': 'FIXME', 'priority': 10, 'id': 2}] >
+			:let m = getmatches()
+			:call clearmatches()
+			:echo getmatches()
+<			[] >
+			:call setmatches(m)
+			:echo getmatches()
+<			[{'group': 'MyGroup1', 'pattern': 'TODO',
+			'priority': 10, 'id': 1}, {'group': 'MyGroup2',
+			'pattern': 'FIXME', 'priority': 10, 'id': 2}] >
+			:unlet m
+<
+getmousepos()						*getmousepos()*
+		Returns a |Dictionary| with the last known position of the
+		mouse.  This can be used in a mapping for a mouse click or in
+		a filter of a popup window.  The items are:
+			screenrow	screen row
+			screencol	screen column
+			winid		Window ID of the click
+			winrow		row inside "winid"
+			wincol		column inside "winid"
+			line		text line inside "winid"
+			column		text column inside "winid"
+		All numbers are 1-based.
+
+		If not over a window, e.g. when in the command line, then only
+		"screenrow" and "screencol" are valid, the others are zero.
+
+		When on the status line below a window or the vertical
+		separator right of a window, the "line" and "column" values
+		are zero.
+
+		When the position is after the text then "column" is the
+		length of the text in bytes plus one.
+
+		If the mouse is over a popup window then that window is used.
+
+		When using |getchar()| the Vim variables |v:mouse_lnum|,
+		|v:mouse_col| and |v:mouse_winid| also provide these values.
+
+							*getpid()*
+getpid()	Return a Number which is the process ID of the Vim process.
+		On Unix and MS-Windows this is a unique number, until Vim
+		exits.
+
+							*getpos()*
+getpos({expr})	Get the position for String {expr}.  For possible values of
+		{expr} see |line()|.  For getting the cursor position see
+		|getcurpos()|.
+		The result is a |List| with four numbers:
+		    [bufnum, lnum, col, off]
+		"bufnum" is zero, unless a mark like '0 or 'A is used, then it
+		is the buffer number of the mark.
+		"lnum" and "col" are the position in the buffer.  The first
+		column is 1.
+		The "off" number is zero, unless 'virtualedit' is used.  Then
+		it is the offset in screen columns from the start of the
+		character.  E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last
+		character.
+		Note that for '< and '> Visual mode matters: when it is "V"
+		(visual line mode) the column of '< is zero and the column of
+		'> is a large number.
+		The column number in the returned List is the byte position
+		within the line. To get the character position in the line,
+		use |getcharpos()|.
+		The column number can be very large, e.g. 2147483647, in which
+		case it means "after the end of the line".
+		This can be used to save and restore the position of a mark: >
+			let save_a_mark = getpos("'a")
+			...
+			call setpos("'a", save_a_mark)
+<		Also see |getcharpos()|, |getcurpos()| and |setpos()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetMark()->getpos()
+
+getqflist([{what}])					*getqflist()*
+		Returns a |List| with all the current quickfix errors.  Each
+		list item is a dictionary with these entries:
+			bufnr	number of buffer that has the file name, use
+				bufname() to get the name
+			module	module name
+			lnum	line number in the buffer (first line is 1)
+			end_lnum
+				end of line number if the item is multiline
+			col	column number (first column is 1)
+			end_col	end of column number if the item has range
+			vcol	|TRUE|: "col" is visual column
+				|FALSE|: "col" is byte index
+			nr	error number
+			pattern	search pattern used to locate the error
+			text	description of the error
+			type	type of the error, 'E', '1', etc.
+			valid	|TRUE|: recognized error message
+
+		When there is no error list or it's empty, an empty list is
+		returned. Quickfix list entries with a non-existing buffer
+		number are returned with "bufnr" set to zero (Note: some
+		functions accept buffer number zero for the alternate buffer,
+		you may need to explicitly check for zero).
+
+		Useful application: Find pattern matches in multiple files and
+		do something with them: >
+			:vimgrep /theword/jg *.c
+			:for d in getqflist()
+			:   echo bufname(d.bufnr) ':' d.lnum '=' d.text
+			:endfor
+<
+		If the optional {what} dictionary argument is supplied, then
+		returns only the items listed in {what} as a dictionary. The
+		following string items are supported in {what}:
+			changedtick	get the total number of changes made
+					to the list |quickfix-changedtick|
+			context	get the |quickfix-context|
+			efm	errorformat to use when parsing "lines". If
+				not present, then the 'errorformat' option
+				value is used.
+			id	get information for the quickfix list with
+				|quickfix-ID|; zero means the id for the
+				current list or the list specified by "nr"
+			idx	get information for the quickfix entry at this
+				index in the list specified by 'id' or 'nr'.
+				If set to zero, then uses the current entry.
+				See |quickfix-index|
+			items	quickfix list entries
+			lines	parse a list of lines using 'efm' and return
+				the resulting entries.  Only a |List| type is
+				accepted.  The current quickfix list is not
+				modified. See |quickfix-parse|.
+			nr	get information for this quickfix list; zero
+				means the current quickfix list and "$" means
+				the last quickfix list
+			qfbufnr number of the buffer displayed in the quickfix
+				window. Returns 0 if the quickfix buffer is
+				not present. See |quickfix-buffer|.
+			size	number of entries in the quickfix list
+			title	get the list title |quickfix-title|
+			winid	get the quickfix |window-ID|
+			all	all of the above quickfix properties
+		Non-string items in {what} are ignored. To get the value of a
+		particular item, set it to zero.
+		If "nr" is not present then the current quickfix list is used.
+		If both "nr" and a non-zero "id" are specified, then the list
+		specified by "id" is used.
+		To get the number of lists in the quickfix stack, set "nr" to
+		"$" in {what}. The "nr" value in the returned dictionary
+		contains the quickfix stack size.
+		When "lines" is specified, all the other items except "efm"
+		are ignored.  The returned dictionary contains the entry
+		"items" with the list of entries.
+
+		The returned dictionary contains the following entries:
+			changedtick	total number of changes made to the
+					list |quickfix-changedtick|
+			context	quickfix list context. See |quickfix-context|
+				If not present, set to "".
+			id	quickfix list ID |quickfix-ID|. If not
+				present, set to 0.
+			idx	index of the quickfix entry in the list. If not
+				present, set to 0.
+			items	quickfix list entries. If not present, set to
+				an empty list.
+			nr	quickfix list number. If not present, set to 0
+			qfbufnr	number of the buffer displayed in the quickfix
+				window. If not present, set to 0.
+			size	number of entries in the quickfix list. If not
+				present, set to 0.
+			title	quickfix list title text. If not present, set
+				to "".
+			winid	quickfix |window-ID|. If not present, set to 0
+
+		Examples (See also |getqflist-examples|): >
+			:echo getqflist({'all': 1})
+			:echo getqflist({'nr': 2, 'title': 1})
+			:echo getqflist({'lines' : ["F1:10:L10"]})
+<
+getreg([{regname} [, 1 [, {list}]]])			*getreg()*
+		The result is a String, which is the contents of register
+		{regname}.  Example: >
+			:let cliptext = getreg('*')
+<		When register {regname} was not set the result is an empty
+		string.
+		The {regname} argument must be a string.
+
+		getreg('=') returns the last evaluated value of the expression
+		register.  (For use in maps.)
+		getreg('=', 1) returns the expression itself, so that it can
+		be restored with |setreg()|.  For other registers the extra
+		argument is ignored, thus you can always give it.
+
+		If {list} is present and |TRUE|, the result type is changed
+		to |List|. Each list item is one text line. Use it if you care
+		about zero bytes possibly present inside register: without
+		third argument both NLs and zero bytes are represented as NLs
+		(see |NL-used-for-Nul|).
+		When the register was not set an empty list is returned.
+
+		If {regname} is "", the unnamed register '"' is used.
+		If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used.
+		In |Vim9-script| {regname} must be one character.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetRegname()->getreg()
+
+getreginfo([{regname}])					*getreginfo()*
+		Returns detailed information about register {regname} as a
+		Dictionary with the following entries:
+			regcontents	List of lines contained in register
+					{regname}, like
+					|getreg|({regname}, 1, 1).
+			regtype		the type of register {regname}, as in
+					|getregtype()|.
+			isunnamed	Boolean flag, v:true if this register
+					is currently pointed to by the unnamed
+					register.
+			points_to	for the unnamed register, gives the
+					single letter name of the register
+					currently pointed to (see |quotequote|).
+					For example, after deleting a line
+					with `dd`, this field will be "1",
+					which is the register that got the
+					deleted text.
+
+		The {regname} argument is a string.  If {regname} is invalid
+		or not set, an empty Dictionary will be returned.
+		If {regname} is "" or "@", the unnamed register '"' is used.
+		If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used.
+		The returned Dictionary can be passed to |setreg()|.
+		In |Vim9-script| {regname} must be one character.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetRegname()->getreginfo()
+
+getregtype([{regname}])					*getregtype()*
+		The result is a String, which is type of register {regname}.
+		The value will be one of:
+		    "v"			for |characterwise| text
+		    "V"			for |linewise| text
+		    "<CTRL-V>{width}"	for |blockwise-visual| text
+		    ""			for an empty or unknown register
+		<CTRL-V> is one character with value 0x16.
+		The {regname} argument is a string.  If {regname} is "", the
+		unnamed register '"' is used.  If {regname} is not specified,
+		|v:register| is used.
+		In |Vim9-script| {regname} must be one character.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetRegname()->getregtype()
+
+gettabinfo([{tabnr}])					*gettabinfo()*
+		If {tabnr} is not specified, then information about all the
+		tab pages is returned as a |List|. Each List item is a
+		|Dictionary|.  Otherwise, {tabnr} specifies the tab page
+		number and information about that one is returned.  If the tab
+		page does not exist an empty List is returned.
+
+		Each List item is a |Dictionary| with the following entries:
+			tabnr		tab page number.
+			variables	a reference to the dictionary with
+					tabpage-local variables
+			windows		List of |window-ID|s in the tab page.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetTabnr()->gettabinfo()
+
+gettabvar({tabnr}, {varname} [, {def}])				*gettabvar()*
+		Get the value of a tab-local variable {varname} in tab page
+		{tabnr}. |t:var|
+		Tabs are numbered starting with one.
+		The {varname} argument is a string.  When {varname} is empty a
+		dictionary with all tab-local variables is returned.
+		Note that the name without "t:" must be used.
+		When the tab or variable doesn't exist {def} or an empty
+		string is returned, there is no error message.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetTabnr()->gettabvar(varname)
+
+gettabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname} [, {def}])		*gettabwinvar()*
+		Get the value of window-local variable {varname} in window
+		{winnr} in tab page {tabnr}.
+		The {varname} argument is a string.  When {varname} is empty a
+		dictionary with all window-local variables is returned.
+		When {varname} is equal to "&" get the values of all
+		window-local options in a |Dictionary|.
+		Otherwise, when {varname} starts with "&" get the value of a
+		window-local option.
+		Note that {varname} must be the name without "w:".
+		Tabs are numbered starting with one.  For the current tabpage
+		use |getwinvar()|.
+		{winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
+		When {winnr} is zero the current window is used.
+		This also works for a global option, buffer-local option and
+		window-local option, but it doesn't work for a global variable
+		or buffer-local variable.
+		When the tab, window or variable doesn't exist {def} or an
+		empty string is returned, there is no error message.
+		Examples: >
+			:let list_is_on = gettabwinvar(1, 2, '&list')
+			:echo "myvar = " . gettabwinvar(3, 1, 'myvar')
+<
+		To obtain all window-local variables use: >
+			gettabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, '&')
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetTabnr()->gettabwinvar(winnr, varname)
+
+gettagstack([{winnr}])					*gettagstack()*
+		The result is a Dict, which is the tag stack of window {winnr}.
+		{winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
+		When {winnr} is not specified, the current window is used.
+		When window {winnr} doesn't exist, an empty Dict is returned.
+
+		The returned dictionary contains the following entries:
+			curidx		Current index in the stack. When at
+					top of the stack, set to (length + 1).
+					Index of bottom of the stack is 1.
+			items		List of items in the stack. Each item
+					is a dictionary containing the
+					entries described below.
+			length		Number of entries in the stack.
+
+		Each item in the stack is a dictionary with the following
+		entries:
+			bufnr		buffer number of the current jump
+			from		cursor position before the tag jump.
+					See |getpos()| for the format of the
+					returned list.
+			matchnr		current matching tag number. Used when
+					multiple matching tags are found for a
+					name.
+			tagname		name of the tag
+
+		See |tagstack| for more information about the tag stack.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetWinnr()->gettagstack()
+
+
+gettext({text})						*gettext()*
+		Translate String {text} if possible.
+		This is mainly for use in the distributed Vim scripts.  When
+		generating message translations the {text} is extracted by
+		xgettext, the translator can add the translated message in the
+		.po file and Vim will lookup the translation when gettext() is
+		called.
+		For {text} double quoted strings are preferred, because
+		xgettext does not understand escaping in single quoted
+		strings.
+
+
+getwininfo([{winid}])					*getwininfo()*
+		Returns information about windows as a |List| with Dictionaries.
+
+		If {winid} is given Information about the window with that ID
+		is returned, as a |List| with one item.  If the window does not
+		exist the result is an empty list.
+
+		Without {winid} information about all the windows in all the
+		tab pages is returned.
+
+		Each List item is a |Dictionary| with the following entries:
+			botline		last complete displayed buffer line
+			bufnr		number of buffer in the window
+			height		window height (excluding winbar)
+			loclist		1 if showing a location list
+					{only with the +quickfix feature}
+			quickfix	1 if quickfix or location list window
+					{only with the +quickfix feature}
+			terminal	1 if a terminal window
+					{only with the +terminal feature}
+			tabnr		tab page number
+			topline		first displayed buffer line
+			variables	a reference to the dictionary with
+					window-local variables
+			width		window width
+			winbar		1 if the window has a toolbar, 0
+					otherwise
+			wincol		leftmost screen column of the window;
+					"col" from |win_screenpos()|
+			textoff		number of columns occupied by any
+					'foldcolumn', 'signcolumn' and line
+					number in front of the text
+			winid		|window-ID|
+			winnr		window number
+			winrow		topmost screen line of the window;
+					"row" from |win_screenpos()|
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetWinnr()->getwininfo()
+
+getwinpos([{timeout}])					*getwinpos()*
+		The result is a |List| with two numbers, the result of
+		|getwinposx()| and |getwinposy()| combined:
+			[x-pos, y-pos]
+		{timeout} can be used to specify how long to wait in msec for
+		a response from the terminal.  When omitted 100 msec is used.
+		Use a longer time for a remote terminal.
+		When using a value less than 10 and no response is received
+		within that time, a previously reported position is returned,
+		if available.  This can be used to poll for the position and
+		do some work in the meantime: >
+			while 1
+			  let res = getwinpos(1)
+			  if res[0] >= 0
+			    break
+			  endif
+			  " Do some work here
+			endwhile
+<
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetTimeout()->getwinpos()
+<
+							*getwinposx()*
+getwinposx()	The result is a Number, which is the X coordinate in pixels of
+		the left hand side of the GUI Vim window. Also works for an
+		xterm (uses a timeout of 100 msec).
+		The result will be -1 if the information is not available.
+		The value can be used with `:winpos`.
+
+							*getwinposy()*
+getwinposy()	The result is a Number, which is the Y coordinate in pixels of
+		the top of the GUI Vim window.  Also works for an xterm (uses
+		a timeout of 100 msec).
+		The result will be -1 if the information is not available.
+		The value can be used with `:winpos`.
+
+getwinvar({winnr}, {varname} [, {def}])				*getwinvar()*
+		Like |gettabwinvar()| for the current tabpage.
+		Examples: >
+			:let list_is_on = getwinvar(2, '&list')
+			:echo "myvar = " . getwinvar(1, 'myvar')
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetWinnr()->getwinvar(varname)
+<
+glob({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list} [, {alllinks}]]])		*glob()*
+		Expand the file wildcards in {expr}.  See |wildcards| for the
+		use of special characters.
+
+		Unless the optional {nosuf} argument is given and is |TRUE|,
+		the 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' options apply: Names matching
+		one of the patterns in 'wildignore' will be skipped and
+		'suffixes' affect the ordering of matches.
+		'wildignorecase' always applies.
+
+		When {list} is present and it is |TRUE| the result is a |List|
+		with all matching files. The advantage of using a List is,
+		you also get filenames containing newlines correctly.
+		Otherwise the result is a String and when there are several
+		matches, they are separated by <NL> characters.
+
+		If the expansion fails, the result is an empty String or List.
+
+		You can also use |readdir()| if you need to do complicated
+		things, such as limiting the number of matches.
+
+		A name for a non-existing file is not included.  A symbolic
+		link is only included if it points to an existing file.
+		However, when the {alllinks} argument is present and it is
+		|TRUE| then all symbolic links are included.
+
+		For most systems backticks can be used to get files names from
+		any external command.  Example: >
+			:let tagfiles = glob("`find . -name tags -print`")
+			:let &tags = substitute(tagfiles, "\n", ",", "g")
+<		The result of the program inside the backticks should be one
+		item per line.  Spaces inside an item are allowed.
+
+		See |expand()| for expanding special Vim variables.  See
+		|system()| for getting the raw output of an external command.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetExpr()->glob()
+
+glob2regpat({string})					 *glob2regpat()*
+		Convert a file pattern, as used by glob(), into a search
+		pattern.  The result can be used to match with a string that
+		is a file name.  E.g. >
+			if filename =~ glob2regpat('Make*.mak')
+<		This is equivalent to: >
+			if filename =~ '^Make.*\.mak$'
+<		When {string} is an empty string the result is "^$", match an
+		empty string.
+		Note that the result depends on the system.  On MS-Windows
+		a backslash usually means a path separator.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetExpr()->glob2regpat()
+<								*globpath()*
+globpath({path}, {expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list} [, {alllinks}]]])
+		Perform glob() for String {expr} on all directories in {path}
+		and concatenate the results.  Example: >
+			:echo globpath(&rtp, "syntax/c.vim")
+<
+		{path} is a comma-separated list of directory names.  Each
+		directory name is prepended to {expr} and expanded like with
+		|glob()|.  A path separator is inserted when needed.
+		To add a comma inside a directory name escape it with a
+		backslash.  Note that on MS-Windows a directory may have a
+		trailing backslash, remove it if you put a comma after it.
+		If the expansion fails for one of the directories, there is no
+		error message.
+
+		Unless the optional {nosuf} argument is given and is |TRUE|,
+		the 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' options apply: Names matching
+		one of the patterns in 'wildignore' will be skipped and
+		'suffixes' affect the ordering of matches.
+
+		When {list} is present and it is |TRUE| the result is a |List|
+		with all matching files. The advantage of using a List is, you
+		also get filenames containing newlines correctly. Otherwise
+		the result is a String and when there are several matches,
+		they are separated by <NL> characters.  Example: >
+			:echo globpath(&rtp, "syntax/c.vim", 0, 1)
+<
+		{alllinks} is used as with |glob()|.
+
+		The "**" item can be used to search in a directory tree.
+		For example, to find all "README.txt" files in the directories
+		in 'runtimepath' and below: >
+			:echo globpath(&rtp, "**/README.txt")
+<		Upwards search and limiting the depth of "**" is not
+		supported, thus using 'path' will not always work properly.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
+		second argument: >
+			GetExpr()->globpath(&rtp)
+<
+							*has()*
+has({feature} [, {check}])
+		When {check} is omitted or is zero: The result is a Number,
+		which is 1 if the feature {feature} is supported, zero
+		otherwise.  The {feature} argument is a string, case is
+		ignored.  See |feature-list| below.
+
+		When {check} is present and not zero: The result is a Number,
+		which is 1 if the feature {feature} could ever be supported,
+		zero otherwise.  This is useful to check for a typo in
+		{feature} and to detect dead code.  Keep in mind that an older
+		Vim version will not know about a feature added later and
+		features that have been abandoned will not be known by the
+		current Vim version.
+
+		Also see |exists()| and |exists_compiled()|.
+
+		Note that to skip code that has a syntax error when the
+		feature is not available, Vim may skip the rest of the line
+		and miss a following `endif`.  Therefore put the `endif` on a
+		separate line: >
+			if has('feature')
+			  let x = this->breaks->without->the->feature
+			endif
+<		If the `endif` would be moved to the second line as "| endif" it
+		would not be found.
+
+
+has_key({dict}, {key})					*has_key()*
+		The result is a Number, which is TRUE if |Dictionary| {dict}
+		has an entry with key {key}.  FALSE otherwise. The {key}
+		argument is a string.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mydict->has_key(key)
+
+haslocaldir([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]])			*haslocaldir()*
+		The result is a Number:
+		    1   when the window has set a local directory via |:lcd|
+		    2   when the tab-page has set a local directory via |:tcd|
+		    0   otherwise.
+
+		Without arguments use the current window.
+		With {winnr} use this window in the current tab page.
+		With {winnr} and {tabnr} use the window in the specified tab
+		page.
+		{winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
+		If {winnr} is -1 it is ignored and only the tabpage is used.
+		Return 0 if the arguments are invalid.
+		Examples: >
+			if haslocaldir() == 1
+			  " window local directory case
+			elseif haslocaldir() == 2
+			  " tab-local directory case
+			else
+			  " global directory case
+			endif
+
+			" current window
+			:echo haslocaldir()
+			:echo haslocaldir(0)
+			:echo haslocaldir(0, 0)
+			" window n in current tab page
+			:echo haslocaldir(n)
+			:echo haslocaldir(n, 0)
+			" window n in tab page m
+			:echo haslocaldir(n, m)
+			" tab page m
+			:echo haslocaldir(-1, m)
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetWinnr()->haslocaldir()
+
+hasmapto({what} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]])			*hasmapto()*
+		The result is a Number, which is TRUE if there is a mapping
+		that contains {what} in somewhere in the rhs (what it is
+		mapped to) and this mapping exists in one of the modes
+		indicated by {mode}.
+		The arguments {what} and {mode} are strings.
+		When {abbr} is there and it is |TRUE| use abbreviations
+		instead of mappings.  Don't forget to specify Insert and/or
+		Command-line mode.
+		Both the global mappings and the mappings local to the current
+		buffer are checked for a match.
+		If no matching mapping is found FALSE is returned.
+		The following characters are recognized in {mode}:
+			n	Normal mode
+			v	Visual and Select mode
+			x	Visual mode
+			s	Select mode
+			o	Operator-pending mode
+			i	Insert mode
+			l	Language-Argument ("r", "f", "t", etc.)
+			c	Command-line mode
+		When {mode} is omitted, "nvo" is used.
+
+		This function is useful to check if a mapping already exists
+		to a function in a Vim script.  Example: >
+			:if !hasmapto('\ABCdoit')
+			:   map <Leader>d \ABCdoit
+			:endif
+<		This installs the mapping to "\ABCdoit" only if there isn't
+		already a mapping to "\ABCdoit".
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetRHS()->hasmapto()
+
+histadd({history}, {item})				*histadd()*
+		Add the String {item} to the history {history} which can be
+		one of:					*hist-names*
+			"cmd"	 or ":"	  command line history
+			"search" or "/"   search pattern history
+			"expr"	 or "="   typed expression history
+			"input"  or "@"	  input line history
+			"debug"  or ">"   debug command history
+			empty		  the current or last used history
+		The {history} string does not need to be the whole name, one
+		character is sufficient.
+		If {item} does already exist in the history, it will be
+		shifted to become the newest entry.
+		The result is a Number: TRUE if the operation was successful,
+		otherwise FALSE is returned.
+
+		Example: >
+			:call histadd("input", strftime("%Y %b %d"))
+			:let date=input("Enter date: ")
+<		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
+		second argument: >
+			GetHistory()->histadd('search')
+
+histdel({history} [, {item}])				*histdel()*
+		Clear {history}, i.e. delete all its entries.  See |hist-names|
+		for the possible values of {history}.
+
+		If the parameter {item} evaluates to a String, it is used as a
+		regular expression.  All entries matching that expression will
+		be removed from the history (if there are any).
+		Upper/lowercase must match, unless "\c" is used |/\c|.
+		If {item} evaluates to a Number, it will be interpreted as
+		an index, see |:history-indexing|.  The respective entry will
+		be removed if it exists.
+
+		The result is TRUE for a successful operation, otherwise FALSE
+		is returned.
+
+		Examples:
+		Clear expression register history: >
+			:call histdel("expr")
+<
+		Remove all entries starting with "*" from the search history: >
+			:call histdel("/", '^\*')
+<
+		The following three are equivalent: >
+			:call histdel("search", histnr("search"))
+			:call histdel("search", -1)
+			:call histdel("search", '^'.histget("search", -1).'$')
+<
+		To delete the last search pattern and use the last-but-one for
+		the "n" command and 'hlsearch': >
+			:call histdel("search", -1)
+			:let @/ = histget("search", -1)
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetHistory()->histdel()
+
+histget({history} [, {index}])				*histget()*
+		The result is a String, the entry with Number {index} from
+		{history}.  See |hist-names| for the possible values of
+		{history}, and |:history-indexing| for {index}.  If there is
+		no such entry, an empty String is returned.  When {index} is
+		omitted, the most recent item from the history is used.
+
+		Examples:
+		Redo the second last search from history. >
+			:execute '/' . histget("search", -2)
+
+<		Define an Ex command ":H {num}" that supports re-execution of
+		the {num}th entry from the output of |:history|. >
+			:command -nargs=1 H execute histget("cmd", 0+<args>)
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetHistory()->histget()
+
+histnr({history})					*histnr()*
+		The result is the Number of the current entry in {history}.
+		See |hist-names| for the possible values of {history}.
+		If an error occurred, -1 is returned.
+
+		Example: >
+			:let inp_index = histnr("expr")
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetHistory()->histnr()
+<
+hlexists({name})					*hlexists()*
+		The result is a Number, which is TRUE if a highlight group
+		called {name} exists.  This is when the group has been
+		defined in some way.  Not necessarily when highlighting has
+		been defined for it, it may also have been used for a syntax
+		item.
+							*highlight_exists()*
+		Obsolete name: highlight_exists().
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetName()->hlexists()
+<
+hlget([{name} [, {resolve}]])				*hlget()*
+		Returns a List of all the highlight group attributes.  If the
+		optional {name} is specified, then returns a List with only
+		the attributes of the specified highlight group.  Returns an
+		empty List if the highlight group {name} is not present.
+
+		If the optional {resolve} argument is set to v:true and the
+		highlight group {name} is linked to another group, then the
+		link is resolved recursively and the attributes of the
+		resolved highlight group are returned.
+
+		Each entry in the returned List is a Dictionary with the
+		following items:
+			cleared	boolean flag, set to v:true if the highlight
+				group attributes are cleared or not yet
+				specified.  See |highlight-clear|.
+			cterm	cterm attributes. See |highlight-cterm|.
+			ctermbg	cterm background color.
+				See |highlight-ctermbg|.
+			ctermfg	cterm foreground color.
+				See |highlight-ctermfg|.
+			ctermul	cterm underline color.  See |highlight-ctermul|.
+			default boolean flag, set to v:true if the highlight
+				group link is a default link. See
+				|highlight-default|.
+			font	highlight group font.  See |highlight-font|.
+			gui	gui attributes. See |highlight-gui|.
+			guibg	gui background color.  See |highlight-guibg|.
+			guifg	gui foreground color.  See |highlight-guifg|.
+			guisp	gui special color.  See |highlight-guisp|.
+			id	highlight group ID.
+			linksto	linked highlight group name.
+				See |:highlight-link|.
+			name	highlight group name. See |group-name|.
+			start	start terminal keycode.  See |highlight-start|.
+			stop	stop terminal keycode.  See |highlight-stop|.
+			term	term attributes.  See |highlight-term|.
+
+		The 'term', 'cterm' and 'gui' items in the above Dictionary
+		have a dictionary value with the following optional boolean
+		items: 'bold', 'standout', 'underline', 'undercurl', 'italic',
+		'reverse', 'inverse' and 'strikethrough'.
+
+		Example(s): >
+			:echo hlget()
+			:echo hlget('ModeMsg')
+			:echo hlget('Number', v:true)
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetName()->hlget()
+<
+hlset({list})						*hlset()*
+		Creates or modifies the attributes of a List of highlight
+		groups.  Each item in {list} is a dictionary containing the
+		attributes of a highlight group. See |hlget()| for the list of
+		supported items in this dictionary.
+
+		In addition to the items described in |hlget()|, the following
+		additional items are supported in the dictionary:
+
+			force		boolean flag to force the creation of
+					a link for an existing highlight group
+					with attributes.
+
+		The highlight group is identified using the 'name' item and
+		the 'id' item (if supplied) is ignored.  If a highlight group
+		with a specified name doesn't exist, then it is created.
+		Otherwise the attributes of an existing highlight group are
+		modified.
+
+		If an empty dictionary value is used for the 'term' or 'cterm'
+		or 'gui' entries, then the corresponding attributes are
+		cleared.  If the 'cleared' item is set to v:true, then all the
+		attributes of the highlight group are cleared.
+
+		The 'linksto' item can be used to link a highlight group to
+		another highlight group.  See |:highlight-link|.
+
+		Returns zero for success, -1 for failure.
+
+		Example(s): >
+			" add bold attribute to the Visual highlight group
+			:call hlset([#{name: 'Visual',
+					\ term: #{reverse: 1 , bold: 1}}])
+			:call hlset([#{name: 'Type', guifg: 'DarkGreen'}])
+			:let l = hlget()
+			:call hlset(l)
+			" clear the Search highlight group
+			:call hlset([#{name: 'Search', cleared: v:true}])
+			" clear the 'term' attributes for a highlight group
+			:call hlset([#{name: 'Title', term: {}}])
+			" create the MyHlg group linking it to DiffAdd
+			:call hlset([#{name: 'MyHlg', linksto: 'DiffAdd'}])
+			" remove the MyHlg group link
+			:call hlset([#{name: 'MyHlg', linksto: 'NONE'}])
+			" clear the attributes and a link
+			:call hlset([#{name: 'MyHlg', cleared: v:true,
+					\ linksto: 'NONE'}])
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetAttrList()->hlset()
+<
+							*hlID()*
+hlID({name})	The result is a Number, which is the ID of the highlight group
+		with name {name}.  When the highlight group doesn't exist,
+		zero is returned.
+		This can be used to retrieve information about the highlight
+		group.  For example, to get the background color of the
+		"Comment" group: >
+	:echo synIDattr(synIDtrans(hlID("Comment")), "bg")
+<							*highlightID()*
+		Obsolete name: highlightID().
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetName()->hlID()
+
+hostname()						*hostname()*
+		The result is a String, which is the name of the machine on
+		which Vim is currently running.  Machine names greater than
+		256 characters long are truncated.
+
+iconv({string}, {from}, {to})				*iconv()*
+		The result is a String, which is the text {string} converted
+		from encoding {from} to encoding {to}.
+		When the conversion completely fails an empty string is
+		returned.  When some characters could not be converted they
+		are replaced with "?".
+		The encoding names are whatever the iconv() library function
+		can accept, see ":!man 3 iconv".
+		Most conversions require Vim to be compiled with the |+iconv|
+		feature.  Otherwise only UTF-8 to latin1 conversion and back
+		can be done.
+		This can be used to display messages with special characters,
+		no matter what 'encoding' is set to.  Write the message in
+		UTF-8 and use: >
+			echo iconv(utf8_str, "utf-8", &enc)
+<		Note that Vim uses UTF-8 for all Unicode encodings, conversion
+		from/to UCS-2 is automatically changed to use UTF-8.  You
+		cannot use UCS-2 in a string anyway, because of the NUL bytes.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetText()->iconv('latin1', 'utf-8')
+<
+							*indent()*
+indent({lnum})	The result is a Number, which is indent of line {lnum} in the
+		current buffer.  The indent is counted in spaces, the value
+		of 'tabstop' is relevant.  {lnum} is used just like in
+		|getline()|.
+		When {lnum} is invalid -1 is returned.  In |Vim9| script an
+		error is given.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetLnum()->indent()
+
+index({object}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]])			*index()*
+		If {object} is a |List| return the lowest index where the item
+		has a value equal to {expr}.  There is no automatic
+		conversion, so the String "4" is different from the Number 4.
+		And the number 4 is different from the Float 4.0.  The value
+		of 'ignorecase' is not used here, case always matters.
+
+		If {object} is |Blob| return the lowest index where the byte
+		value is equal to {expr}.
+
+		If {start} is given then start looking at the item with index
+		{start} (may be negative for an item relative to the end).
+		When {ic} is given and it is |TRUE|, ignore case.  Otherwise
+		case must match.
+		-1 is returned when {expr} is not found in {object}.
+		Example: >
+			:let idx = index(words, "the")
+			:if index(numbers, 123) >= 0
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetObject()->index(what)
+
+input({prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]])		*input()*
+		The result is a String, which is whatever the user typed on
+		the command-line.  The {prompt} argument is either a prompt
+		string, or a blank string (for no prompt).  A '\n' can be used
+		in the prompt to start a new line.
+		The highlighting set with |:echohl| is used for the prompt.
+		The input is entered just like a command-line, with the same
+		editing commands and mappings.  There is a separate history
+		for lines typed for input().
+		Example: >
+			:if input("Coffee or beer? ") == "beer"
+			:  echo "Cheers!"
+			:endif
+<
+		If the optional {text} argument is present and not empty, this
+		is used for the default reply, as if the user typed this.
+		Example: >
+			:let color = input("Color? ", "white")
+
+<		The optional {completion} argument specifies the type of
+		completion supported for the input.  Without it completion is
+		not performed.  The supported completion types are the same as
+		that can be supplied to a user-defined command using the
+		"-complete=" argument.  Refer to |:command-completion| for
+		more information.  Example: >
+			let fname = input("File: ", "", "file")
+<
+		NOTE: This function must not be used in a startup file, for
+		the versions that only run in GUI mode (e.g., the Win32 GUI).
+		Note: When input() is called from within a mapping it will
+		consume remaining characters from that mapping, because a
+		mapping is handled like the characters were typed.
+		Use |inputsave()| before input() and |inputrestore()|
+		after input() to avoid that.  Another solution is to avoid
+		that further characters follow in the mapping, e.g., by using
+		|:execute| or |:normal|.
+
+		Example with a mapping: >
+			:nmap \x :call GetFoo()<CR>:exe "/" . Foo<CR>
+			:function GetFoo()
+			:  call inputsave()
+			:  let g:Foo = input("enter search pattern: ")
+			:  call inputrestore()
+			:endfunction
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetPrompt()->input()
+
+inputdialog({prompt} [, {text} [, {cancelreturn}]])		*inputdialog()*
+		Like |input()|, but when the GUI is running and text dialogs
+		are supported, a dialog window pops up to input the text.
+		Example: >
+		   :let n = inputdialog("value for shiftwidth", shiftwidth())
+		   :if n != ""
+		   :  let &sw = n
+		   :endif
+<		When the dialog is cancelled {cancelreturn} is returned.  When
+		omitted an empty string is returned.
+		Hitting <Enter> works like pressing the OK button.  Hitting
+		<Esc> works like pressing the Cancel button.
+		NOTE: Command-line completion is not supported.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetPrompt()->inputdialog()
+
+inputlist({textlist})					*inputlist()*
+		{textlist} must be a |List| of strings.  This |List| is
+		displayed, one string per line.  The user will be prompted to
+		enter a number, which is returned.
+		The user can also select an item by clicking on it with the
+		mouse, if the mouse is enabled in the command line ('mouse' is
+		"a" or includes "c").  For the first string 0 is returned.
+		When clicking above the first item a negative number is
+		returned.  When clicking on the prompt one more than the
+		length of {textlist} is returned.
+		Make sure {textlist} has less than 'lines' entries, otherwise
+		it won't work.  It's a good idea to put the entry number at
+		the start of the string.  And put a prompt in the first item.
+		Example: >
+			let color = inputlist(['Select color:', '1. red',
+				\ '2. green', '3. blue'])
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetChoices()->inputlist()
+
+inputrestore()						*inputrestore()*
+		Restore typeahead that was saved with a previous |inputsave()|.
+		Should be called the same number of times inputsave() is
+		called.  Calling it more often is harmless though.
+		Returns TRUE when there is nothing to restore, FALSE otherwise.
+
+inputsave()						*inputsave()*
+		Preserve typeahead (also from mappings) and clear it, so that
+		a following prompt gets input from the user.  Should be
+		followed by a matching inputrestore() after the prompt.  Can
+		be used several times, in which case there must be just as
+		many inputrestore() calls.
+		Returns TRUE when out of memory, FALSE otherwise.
+
+inputsecret({prompt} [, {text}])			*inputsecret()*
+		This function acts much like the |input()| function with but
+		two exceptions:
+		a) the user's response will be displayed as a sequence of
+		asterisks ("*") thereby keeping the entry secret, and
+		b) the user's response will not be recorded on the input
+		|history| stack.
+		The result is a String, which is whatever the user actually
+		typed on the command-line in response to the issued prompt.
+		NOTE: Command-line completion is not supported.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetPrompt()->inputsecret()
+
+insert({object}, {item} [, {idx}])			*insert()*
+		When {object} is a |List| or a |Blob| insert {item} at the start
+		of it.
+
+		If {idx} is specified insert {item} before the item with index
+		{idx}.  If {idx} is zero it goes before the first item, just
+		like omitting {idx}.  A negative {idx} is also possible, see
+		|list-index|.  -1 inserts just before the last item.
+
+		Returns the resulting |List| or |Blob|.  Examples: >
+			:let mylist = insert([2, 3, 5], 1)
+			:call insert(mylist, 4, -1)
+			:call insert(mylist, 6, len(mylist))
+<		The last example can be done simpler with |add()|.
+		Note that when {item} is a |List| it is inserted as a single
+		item.  Use |extend()| to concatenate |Lists|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mylist->insert(item)
+
+interrupt()						*interrupt()*
+		Interrupt script execution.  It works more or less like the
+		user typing CTRL-C, most commands won't execute and control
+		returns to the user.  This is useful to abort execution
+		from lower down, e.g. in an autocommand.  Example: >
+		:function s:check_typoname(file)
+		:   if fnamemodify(a:file, ':t') == '['
+		:       echomsg 'Maybe typo'
+		:       call interrupt()
+		:   endif
+		:endfunction
+		:au BufWritePre * call s:check_typoname(expand('<amatch>'))
+
+invert({expr})						*invert()*
+		Bitwise invert.  The argument is converted to a number.  A
+		List, Dict or Float argument causes an error.  Example: >
+			:let bits = invert(bits)
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			:let bits = bits->invert()
+
+isdirectory({directory})				*isdirectory()*
+		The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| when a directory
+		with the name {directory} exists.  If {directory} doesn't
+		exist, or isn't a directory, the result is |FALSE|.  {directory}
+		is any expression, which is used as a String.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetName()->isdirectory()
+
+isinf({expr})						*isinf()*
+		Return 1 if {expr} is a positive infinity, or -1 a negative
+		infinity, otherwise 0. >
+			:echo isinf(1.0 / 0.0)
+<			1 >
+			:echo isinf(-1.0 / 0.0)
+<			-1
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->isinf()
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+islocked({expr})					*islocked()* *E786*
+		The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| when {expr} is the
+		name of a locked variable.
+		The string argument {expr} must be the name of a variable,
+		|List| item or |Dictionary| entry, not the variable itself!
+		Example: >
+			:let alist = [0, ['a', 'b'], 2, 3]
+			:lockvar 1 alist
+			:echo islocked('alist')		" 1
+			:echo islocked('alist[1]')	" 0
+
+<		When {expr} is a variable that does not exist you get an error
+		message.  Use |exists()| to check for existence.
+		In Vim9 script it does not work for local variables.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetName()->islocked()
+
+isnan({expr})						*isnan()*
+		Return |TRUE| if {expr} is a float with value NaN. >
+			echo isnan(0.0 / 0.0)
+<			1
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->isnan()
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+items({dict})						*items()*
+		Return a |List| with all the key-value pairs of {dict}.  Each
+		|List| item is a list with two items: the key of a {dict}
+		entry and the value of this entry.  The |List| is in arbitrary
+		order.  Also see |keys()| and |values()|.
+		Example: >
+			for [key, value] in items(mydict)
+			   echo key . ': ' . value
+			endfor
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mydict->items()
+
+job_ functions are documented here: |job-functions-details|
+
+
+join({list} [, {sep}])					*join()*
+		Join the items in {list} together into one String.
+		When {sep} is specified it is put in between the items.  If
+		{sep} is omitted a single space is used.
+		Note that {sep} is not added at the end.  You might want to
+		add it there too: >
+			let lines = join(mylist, "\n") . "\n"
+<		String items are used as-is.  |Lists| and |Dictionaries| are
+		converted into a string like with |string()|.
+		The opposite function is |split()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mylist->join()
+
+js_decode({string})					*js_decode()*
+		This is similar to |json_decode()| with these differences:
+		- Object key names do not have to be in quotes.
+		- Strings can be in single quotes.
+		- Empty items in an array (between two commas) are allowed and
+		  result in v:none items.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			ReadObject()->js_decode()
+
+js_encode({expr})					*js_encode()*
+		This is similar to |json_encode()| with these differences:
+		- Object key names are not in quotes.
+		- v:none items in an array result in an empty item between
+		  commas.
+		For example, the Vim object:
+			[1,v:none,{"one":1},v:none] ~
+		Will be encoded as:
+			[1,,{one:1},,] ~
+		While json_encode() would produce:
+			[1,null,{"one":1},null] ~
+		This encoding is valid for JavaScript. It is more efficient
+		than JSON, especially when using an array with optional items.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetObject()->js_encode()
+
+json_decode({string})					*json_decode()*
+		This parses a JSON formatted string and returns the equivalent
+		in Vim values.  See |json_encode()| for the relation between
+		JSON and Vim values.
+		The decoding is permissive:
+		- A trailing comma in an array and object is ignored, e.g.
+		  "[1, 2, ]" is the same as "[1, 2]".
+		- Integer keys are accepted in objects, e.g. {1:2} is the
+		  same as {"1":2}.
+		- More floating point numbers are recognized, e.g. "1." for
+		  "1.0", or "001.2" for "1.2". Special floating point values
+		  "Infinity", "-Infinity" and "NaN" (capitalization ignored)
+		  are accepted.
+		- Leading zeroes in integer numbers are ignored, e.g. "012"
+		  for "12" or "-012" for "-12".
+		- Capitalization is ignored in literal names null, true or
+		  false, e.g. "NULL" for "null", "True" for "true".
+		- Control characters U+0000 through U+001F which are not
+		  escaped in strings are accepted, e.g. "	" (tab
+		  character in string) for "\t".
+		- An empty JSON expression or made of only spaces is accepted
+		  and results in v:none.
+		- Backslash in an invalid 2-character sequence escape is
+		  ignored, e.g. "\a" is decoded as "a".
+		- A correct surrogate pair in JSON strings should normally be
+		  a 12 character sequence such as "\uD834\uDD1E", but
+		  json_decode() silently accepts truncated surrogate pairs
+		  such as "\uD834" or "\uD834\u"
+								*E938*
+		A duplicate key in an object, valid in rfc7159, is not
+		accepted by json_decode() as the result must be a valid Vim
+		type, e.g. this fails: {"a":"b", "a":"c"}
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			ReadObject()->json_decode()
+
+json_encode({expr})					*json_encode()*
+		Encode {expr} as JSON and return this as a string.
+		The encoding is specified in:
+		https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7159.html
+		Vim values are converted as follows:
+		   |Number|		decimal number
+		   |Float|		floating point number
+		   Float nan		"NaN"
+		   Float inf		"Infinity"
+		   Float -inf		"-Infinity"
+		   |String|		in double quotes (possibly null)
+		   |Funcref|		not possible, error
+		   |List|		as an array (possibly null); when
+					used recursively: []
+		   |Dict|		as an object (possibly null); when
+					used recursively: {}
+		   |Blob|		as an array of the individual bytes
+		   v:false		"false"
+		   v:true		"true"
+		   v:none		"null"
+		   v:null		"null"
+		Note that NaN and Infinity are passed on as values.  This is
+		missing in the JSON standard, but several implementations do
+		allow it.  If not then you will get an error.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetObject()->json_encode()
+
+keys({dict})						*keys()*
+		Return a |List| with all the keys of {dict}.  The |List| is in
+		arbitrary order.  Also see |items()| and |values()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mydict->keys()
+
+<							*len()* *E701*
+len({expr})	The result is a Number, which is the length of the argument.
+		When {expr} is a String or a Number the length in bytes is
+		used, as with |strlen()|.
+		When {expr} is a |List| the number of items in the |List| is
+		returned.
+		When {expr} is a |Blob| the number of bytes is returned.
+		When {expr} is a |Dictionary| the number of entries in the
+		|Dictionary| is returned.
+		Otherwise an error is given.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mylist->len()
+
+<						*libcall()* *E364* *E368*
+libcall({libname}, {funcname}, {argument})
+		Call function {funcname} in the run-time library {libname}
+		with single argument {argument}.
+		This is useful to call functions in a library that you
+		especially made to be used with Vim.  Since only one argument
+		is possible, calling standard library functions is rather
+		limited.
+		The result is the String returned by the function.  If the
+		function returns NULL, this will appear as an empty string ""
+		to Vim.
+		If the function returns a number, use libcallnr()!
+		If {argument} is a number, it is passed to the function as an
+		int; if {argument} is a string, it is passed as a
+		null-terminated string.
+		This function will fail in |restricted-mode|.
+
+		libcall() allows you to write your own 'plug-in' extensions to
+		Vim without having to recompile the program.  It is NOT a
+		means to call system functions!  If you try to do so Vim will
+		very probably crash.
+
+		For Win32, the functions you write must be placed in a DLL
+		and use the normal C calling convention (NOT Pascal which is
+		used in Windows System DLLs).  The function must take exactly
+		one parameter, either a character pointer or a long integer,
+		and must return a character pointer or NULL.  The character
+		pointer returned must point to memory that will remain valid
+		after the function has returned (e.g. in static data in the
+		DLL).  If it points to allocated memory, that memory will
+		leak away.  Using a static buffer in the function should work,
+		it's then freed when the DLL is unloaded.
+
+		WARNING: If the function returns a non-valid pointer, Vim may
+		crash!	This also happens if the function returns a number,
+		because Vim thinks it's a pointer.
+		For Win32 systems, {libname} should be the filename of the DLL
+		without the ".DLL" suffix.  A full path is only required if
+		the DLL is not in the usual places.
+		For Unix: When compiling your own plugins, remember that the
+		object code must be compiled as position-independent ('PIC').
+		{only in Win32 and some Unix versions, when the |+libcall|
+		feature is present}
+		Examples: >
+			:echo libcall("libc.so", "getenv", "HOME")
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
+		third argument: >
+			GetValue()->libcall("libc.so", "getenv")
+<
+							*libcallnr()*
+libcallnr({libname}, {funcname}, {argument})
+		Just like |libcall()|, but used for a function that returns an
+		int instead of a string.
+		{only in Win32 on some Unix versions, when the |+libcall|
+		feature is present}
+		Examples: >
+			:echo libcallnr("/usr/lib/libc.so", "getpid", "")
+			:call libcallnr("libc.so", "printf", "Hello World!\n")
+			:call libcallnr("libc.so", "sleep", 10)
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
+		third argument: >
+			GetValue()->libcallnr("libc.so", "printf")
+<
+
+line({expr} [, {winid}])				*line()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the line number of the file
+		position given with {expr}.  The {expr} argument is a string.
+		The accepted positions are:
+		    .	    the cursor position
+		    $	    the last line in the current buffer
+		    'x	    position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is
+			    returned)
+		    w0	    first line visible in current window (one if the
+			    display isn't updated, e.g. in silent Ex mode)
+		    w$	    last line visible in current window (this is one
+			    less than "w0" if no lines are visible)
+		    v	    In Visual mode: the start of the Visual area (the
+			    cursor is the end).  When not in Visual mode
+			    returns the cursor position.  Differs from |'<| in
+			    that it's updated right away.
+		Note that a mark in another file can be used.  The line number
+		then applies to another buffer.
+		To get the column number use |col()|.  To get both use
+		|getpos()|.
+		With the optional {winid} argument the values are obtained for
+		that window instead of the current window.
+		Examples: >
+			line(".")		line number of the cursor
+			line(".", winid)	idem, in window "winid"
+			line("'t")		line number of mark t
+			line("'" . marker)	line number of mark marker
+<
+		To jump to the last known position when opening a file see
+		|last-position-jump|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetValue()->line()
+
+line2byte({lnum})					*line2byte()*
+		Return the byte count from the start of the buffer for line
+		{lnum}.  This includes the end-of-line character, depending on
+		the 'fileformat' option for the current buffer.  The first
+		line returns 1. 'encoding' matters, 'fileencoding' is ignored.
+		This can also be used to get the byte count for the line just
+		below the last line: >
+			line2byte(line("$") + 1)
+<		This is the buffer size plus one.  If 'fileencoding' is empty
+		it is the file size plus one.  {lnum} is used like with
+		|getline()|.  When {lnum} is invalid, or the |+byte_offset|
+		feature has been disabled at compile time, -1 is returned.
+		Also see |byte2line()|, |go| and |:goto|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetLnum()->line2byte()
+
+lispindent({lnum})					*lispindent()*
+		Get the amount of indent for line {lnum} according the lisp
+		indenting rules, as with 'lisp'.
+		The indent is counted in spaces, the value of 'tabstop' is
+		relevant.  {lnum} is used just like in |getline()|.
+		When {lnum} is invalid or Vim was not compiled the
+		|+lispindent| feature, -1 is returned.  In |Vim9| script an
+		error is given.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetLnum()->lispindent()
+
+list2blob({list})					*list2blob()*
+		Return a Blob concatenating all the number values in {list}.
+		Examples: >
+			list2blob([1, 2, 3, 4])	returns 0z01020304
+			list2blob([])		returns 0z
+<		Returns an empty Blob on error.  If one of the numbers is
+		negative or more than 255 error *E1239* is given.
+
+		|blob2list()| does the opposite.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetList()->list2blob()
+
+list2str({list} [, {utf8}])				*list2str()*
+		Convert each number in {list} to a character string can
+		concatenate them all.  Examples: >
+			list2str([32])		returns " "
+			list2str([65, 66, 67])	returns "ABC"
+<		The same can be done (slowly) with: >
+			join(map(list, {nr, val -> nr2char(val)}), '')
+<		|str2list()| does the opposite.
+
+		When {utf8} is omitted or zero, the current 'encoding' is used.
+		When {utf8} is TRUE, always return UTF-8 characters.
+		With UTF-8 composing characters work as expected: >
+			list2str([97, 769])	returns "á"
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetList()->list2str()
+
+listener_add({callback} [, {buf}])			*listener_add()*
+		Add a callback function that will be invoked when changes have
+		been made to buffer {buf}.
+		{buf} refers to a buffer name or number. For the accepted
+		values, see |bufname()|.  When {buf} is omitted the current
+		buffer is used.
+		Returns a unique ID that can be passed to |listener_remove()|.
+
+		The {callback} is invoked with five arguments:
+		    a:bufnr	the buffer that was changed
+		    a:start	first changed line number
+		    a:end	first line number below the change
+		    a:added	number of lines added, negative if lines were
+				deleted
+		    a:changes	a List of items with details about the changes
+
+		Example: >
+	    func Listener(bufnr, start, end, added, changes)
+	      echo 'lines ' .. a:start .. ' until ' .. a:end .. ' changed'
+	    endfunc
+	    call listener_add('Listener', bufnr)
+
+<		The List cannot be changed.  Each item in a:changes is a
+		dictionary with these entries:
+		    lnum	the first line number of the change
+		    end		the first line below the change
+		    added	number of lines added; negative if lines were
+				deleted
+		    col		first column in "lnum" that was affected by
+				the change; one if unknown or the whole line
+				was affected; this is a byte index, first
+				character has a value of one.
+		When lines are inserted the values are:
+		    lnum	line above which the new line is added
+		    end		equal to "lnum"
+		    added	number of lines inserted
+		    col		1
+		When lines are deleted the values are:
+		    lnum	the first deleted line
+		    end		the line below the first deleted line, before
+				the deletion was done
+		    added	negative, number of lines deleted
+		    col		1
+		When lines are changed:
+		    lnum	the first changed line
+		    end		the line below the last changed line
+		    added	0
+		    col		first column with a change or 1
+
+		The entries are in the order the changes were made, thus the
+		most recent change is at the end.  The line numbers are valid
+		when the callback is invoked, but later changes may make them
+		invalid, thus keeping a copy for later might not work.
+
+		The {callback} is invoked just before the screen is updated,
+		when |listener_flush()| is called or when a change is being
+		made that changes the line count in a way it causes a line
+		number in the list of changes to become invalid.
+
+		The {callback} is invoked with the text locked, see
+		|textlock|.  If you do need to make changes to the buffer, use
+		a timer to do this later |timer_start()|.
+
+		The {callback} is not invoked when the buffer is first loaded.
+		Use the |BufReadPost| autocmd event to handle the initial text
+		of a buffer.
+		The {callback} is also not invoked when the buffer is
+		unloaded, use the |BufUnload| autocmd event for that.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
+		second argument: >
+			GetBuffer()->listener_add(callback)
+
+listener_flush([{buf}])					*listener_flush()*
+		Invoke listener callbacks for buffer {buf}.  If there are no
+		pending changes then no callbacks are invoked.
+
+		{buf} refers to a buffer name or number. For the accepted
+		values, see |bufname()|.  When {buf} is omitted the current
+		buffer is used.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetBuffer()->listener_flush()
+
+listener_remove({id})					*listener_remove()*
+		Remove a listener previously added with listener_add().
+		Returns FALSE when {id} could not be found, TRUE when {id} was
+		removed.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetListenerId()->listener_remove()
+
+localtime()						*localtime()*
+		Return the current time, measured as seconds since 1st Jan
+		1970.  See also |strftime()|, |strptime()| and |getftime()|.
+
+
+log({expr})						*log()*
+		Return the natural logarithm (base e) of {expr} as a |Float|.
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range
+		(0, inf].
+		Examples: >
+			:echo log(10)
+<			2.302585 >
+			:echo log(exp(5))
+<			5.0
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->log()
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+log10({expr})						*log10()*
+		Return the logarithm of Float {expr} to base 10 as a |Float|.
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo log10(1000)
+<			3.0 >
+			:echo log10(0.01)
+<			-2.0
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->log10()
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+luaeval({expr} [, {expr}])					*luaeval()*
+		Evaluate Lua expression {expr} and return its result converted
+		to Vim data structures. Second {expr} may hold additional
+		argument accessible as _A inside first {expr}.
+		Strings are returned as they are.
+		Boolean objects are converted to numbers.
+		Numbers are converted to |Float| values if vim was compiled
+		with |+float| and to numbers otherwise.
+		Dictionaries and lists obtained by vim.eval() are returned
+		as-is.
+		Other objects are returned as zero without any errors.
+		See |lua-luaeval| for more details.
+		Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible
+		to {expr}.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetExpr()->luaeval()
+
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+lua| feature}
+
+map({expr1}, {expr2})					*map()*
+		{expr1} must be a |List|, |String|, |Blob| or |Dictionary|.
+		When {expr1} is a |List|| or |Dictionary|, replace each
+		item in {expr1} with the result of evaluating {expr2}.
+		For a |Blob| each byte is replaced.
+		For a |String|, each character, including composing
+		characters, is replaced.
+		If the item type changes you may want to use |mapnew()| to
+		create a new List or Dictionary.  This is required when using
+		Vim9 script.
+
+		{expr2} must be a |String| or |Funcref|.
+
+		If {expr2} is a |String|, inside {expr2} |v:val| has the value
+		of the current item.  For a |Dictionary| |v:key| has the key
+		of the current item and for a |List| |v:key| has the index of
+		the current item.  For a |Blob| |v:key| has the index of the
+		current byte. For a |String| |v:key| has the index of the
+		current character.
+		Example: >
+			:call map(mylist, '"> " . v:val . " <"')
+<		This puts "> " before and " <" after each item in "mylist".
+
+		Note that {expr2} is the result of an expression and is then
+		used as an expression again.  Often it is good to use a
+		|literal-string| to avoid having to double backslashes.  You
+		still have to double ' quotes
+
+		If {expr2} is a |Funcref| it is called with two arguments:
+			1. The key or the index of the current item.
+			2. the value of the current item.
+		The function must return the new value of the item. Example
+		that changes each value by "key-value": >
+			func KeyValue(key, val)
+			  return a:key . '-' . a:val
+			endfunc
+			call map(myDict, function('KeyValue'))
+<		It is shorter when using a |lambda|: >
+			call map(myDict, {key, val -> key . '-' . val})
+<		If you do not use "val" you can leave it out: >
+			call map(myDict, {key -> 'item: ' . key})
+<		If you do not use "key" you can use a short name: >
+			call map(myDict, {_, val -> 'item: ' . val})
+<
+		The operation is done in-place for a |List| and |Dictionary|.
+		If you want it to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
+			:let tlist = map(copy(mylist), ' v:val . "\t"')
+
+<		Returns {expr1}, the |List| or |Dictionary| that was filtered,
+		or a new |Blob| or |String|.
+		When an error is encountered while evaluating {expr2} no
+		further items in {expr1} are processed.
+		When {expr2} is a Funcref errors inside a function are ignored,
+		unless it was defined with the "abort" flag.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mylist->map(expr2)
+
+
+maparg({name} [, {mode} [, {abbr} [, {dict}]]])			*maparg()*
+		When {dict} is omitted or zero: Return the rhs of mapping
+		{name} in mode {mode}.  The returned String has special
+		characters translated like in the output of the ":map" command
+		listing.
+
+		When there is no mapping for {name}, an empty String is
+		returned.  When the mapping for {name} is empty, then "<Nop>"
+		is returned.
+
+		The {name} can have special key names, like in the ":map"
+		command.
+
+		{mode} can be one of these strings:
+			"n"	Normal
+			"v"	Visual (including Select)
+			"o"	Operator-pending
+			"i"	Insert
+			"c"	Cmd-line
+			"s"	Select
+			"x"	Visual
+			"l"	langmap |language-mapping|
+			"t"	Terminal-Job
+			""	Normal, Visual and Operator-pending
+		When {mode} is omitted, the modes for "" are used.
+
+		When {abbr} is there and it is |TRUE| use abbreviations
+		instead of mappings.
+
+		When {dict} is there and it is |TRUE| return a dictionary
+		containing all the information of the mapping with the
+		following items:
+		  "lhs"	     The {lhs} of the mapping as it would be typed
+		  "lhsraw"   The {lhs} of the mapping as raw bytes
+		  "lhsrawalt" The {lhs} of the mapping as raw bytes, alternate
+			      form, only present when it differs from "lhsraw"
+		  "rhs"	     The {rhs} of the mapping as typed.
+		  "silent"   1 for a |:map-silent| mapping, else 0.
+		  "noremap"  1 if the {rhs} of the mapping is not remappable.
+		  "script"   1 if mapping was defined with <script>.
+		  "expr"     1 for an expression mapping (|:map-<expr>|).
+		  "buffer"   1 for a buffer local mapping (|:map-local|).
+		  "mode"     Modes for which the mapping is defined. In
+			     addition to the modes mentioned above, these
+			     characters will be used:
+			     " "     Normal, Visual and Operator-pending
+			     "!"     Insert and Commandline mode
+				     (|mapmode-ic|)
+		  "sid"	     The script local ID, used for <sid> mappings
+			     (|<SID>|).
+		  "lnum"     The line number in "sid", zero if unknown.
+		  "nowait"   Do not wait for other, longer mappings.
+			     (|:map-<nowait>|).
+
+		The dictionary can be used to restore a mapping with
+		|mapset()|.
+
+		The mappings local to the current buffer are checked first,
+		then the global mappings.
+		This function can be used to map a key even when it's already
+		mapped, and have it do the original mapping too.  Sketch: >
+			exe 'nnoremap <Tab> ==' . maparg('<Tab>', 'n')
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetKey()->maparg('n')
+
+mapcheck({name} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]])			*mapcheck()*
+		Check if there is a mapping that matches with {name} in mode
+		{mode}.  See |maparg()| for {mode} and special names in
+		{name}.
+		When {abbr} is there and it is |TRUE| use abbreviations
+		instead of mappings.
+		A match happens with a mapping that starts with {name} and
+		with a mapping which is equal to the start of {name}.
+
+			matches mapping "a"	"ab"	"abc" ~
+		   mapcheck("a")	yes	yes	 yes
+		   mapcheck("abc")	yes	yes	 yes
+		   mapcheck("ax")	yes	no	 no
+		   mapcheck("b")	no	no	 no
+
+		The difference with maparg() is that mapcheck() finds a
+		mapping that matches with {name}, while maparg() only finds a
+		mapping for {name} exactly.
+		When there is no mapping that starts with {name}, an empty
+		String is returned.  If there is one, the RHS of that mapping
+		is returned.  If there are several mappings that start with
+		{name}, the RHS of one of them is returned.  This will be
+		"<Nop>" if the RHS is empty.
+		The mappings local to the current buffer are checked first,
+		then the global mappings.
+		This function can be used to check if a mapping can be added
+		without being ambiguous.  Example: >
+	:if mapcheck("_vv") == ""
+	:   map _vv :set guifont=7x13<CR>
+	:endif
+<		This avoids adding the "_vv" mapping when there already is a
+		mapping for "_v" or for "_vvv".
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetKey()->mapcheck('n')
+
+
+mapnew({expr1}, {expr2})					*mapnew()*
+		Like |map()| but instead of replacing items in {expr1} a new
+		List or Dictionary is created and returned.  {expr1} remains
+		unchanged.  Items can still be changed by {expr2}, if you
+		don't want that use |deepcopy()| first.
+
+
+mapset({mode}, {abbr}, {dict})					*mapset()*
+		Restore a mapping from a dictionary returned by |maparg()|.
+		{mode} and {abbr} should be the same as for the call to
+		|maparg()|. *E460*
+		{mode} is used to define the mode in which the mapping is set,
+		not the "mode" entry in {dict}.
+		Example for saving and restoring a mapping: >
+			let save_map = maparg('K', 'n', 0, 1)
+			nnoremap K somethingelse
+			...
+			call mapset('n', 0, save_map)
+<		Note that if you are going to replace a map in several modes,
+		e.g. with `:map!`, you need to save the mapping for all of
+		them, since they can differ.
+
+
+match({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])			*match()*
+		When {expr} is a |List| then this returns the index of the
+		first item where {pat} matches.  Each item is used as a
+		String, |Lists| and |Dictionaries| are used as echoed.
+
+		Otherwise, {expr} is used as a String.  The result is a
+		Number, which gives the index (byte offset) in {expr} where
+		{pat} matches.
+
+		A match at the first character or |List| item returns zero.
+		If there is no match -1 is returned.
+
+		For getting submatches see |matchlist()|.
+		Example: >
+			:echo match("testing", "ing")	" results in 4
+			:echo match([1, 'x'], '\a')	" results in 1
+<		See |string-match| for how {pat} is used.
+								*strpbrk()*
+		Vim doesn't have a strpbrk() function.  But you can do: >
+			:let sepidx = match(line, '[.,;: \t]')
+<								*strcasestr()*
+		Vim doesn't have a strcasestr() function.  But you can add
+		"\c" to the pattern to ignore case: >
+			:let idx = match(haystack, '\cneedle')
+<
+		If {start} is given, the search starts from byte index
+		{start} in a String or item {start} in a |List|.
+		The result, however, is still the index counted from the
+		first character/item.  Example: >
+			:echo match("testing", "ing", 2)
+<		result is again "4". >
+			:echo match("testing", "ing", 4)
+<		result is again "4". >
+			:echo match("testing", "t", 2)
+<		result is "3".
+		For a String, if {start} > 0 then it is like the string starts
+		{start} bytes later, thus "^" will match at {start}.  Except
+		when {count} is given, then it's like matches before the
+		{start} byte are ignored (this is a bit complicated to keep it
+		backwards compatible).
+		For a String, if {start} < 0, it will be set to 0.  For a list
+		the index is counted from the end.
+		If {start} is out of range ({start} > strlen({expr}) for a
+		String or {start} > len({expr}) for a |List|) -1 is returned.
+
+		When {count} is given use the {count}'th match.  When a match
+		is found in a String the search for the next one starts one
+		character further.  Thus this example results in 1: >
+			echo match("testing", "..", 0, 2)
+<		In a |List| the search continues in the next item.
+		Note that when {count} is added the way {start} works changes,
+		see above.
+
+		See |pattern| for the patterns that are accepted.
+		The 'ignorecase' option is used to set the ignore-caseness of
+		the pattern.  'smartcase' is NOT used.  The matching is always
+		done like 'magic' is set and 'cpoptions' is empty.
+		Note that a match at the start is preferred, thus when the
+		pattern is using "*" (any number of matches) it tends to find
+		zero matches at the start instead of a number of matches
+		further down in the text.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetText()->match('word')
+			GetList()->match('word')
+<
+				*matchadd()* *E798* *E799* *E801* *E957*
+matchadd({group}, {pattern} [, {priority} [, {id} [, {dict}]]])
+		Defines a pattern to be highlighted in the current window (a
+		"match").  It will be highlighted with {group}.  Returns an
+		identification number (ID), which can be used to delete the
+		match using |matchdelete()|.  The ID is bound to the window.
+		Matching is case sensitive and magic, unless case sensitivity
+		or magicness are explicitly overridden in {pattern}.  The
+		'magic', 'smartcase' and 'ignorecase' options are not used.
+		The "Conceal" value is special, it causes the match to be
+		concealed.
+
+		The optional {priority} argument assigns a priority to the
+		match.  A match with a high priority will have its
+		highlighting overrule that of a match with a lower priority.
+		A priority is specified as an integer (negative numbers are no
+		exception).  If the {priority} argument is not specified, the
+		default priority is 10.  The priority of 'hlsearch' is zero,
+		hence all matches with a priority greater than zero will
+		overrule it.  Syntax highlighting (see 'syntax') is a separate
+		mechanism, and regardless of the chosen priority a match will
+		always overrule syntax highlighting.
+
+		The optional {id} argument allows the request for a specific
+		match ID.  If a specified ID is already taken, an error
+		message will appear and the match will not be added.  An ID
+		is specified as a positive integer (zero excluded).  IDs 1, 2
+		and 3 are reserved for |:match|, |:2match| and |:3match|,
+		respectively.  If the {id} argument is not specified or -1,
+		|matchadd()| automatically chooses a free ID.
+
+		The optional {dict} argument allows for further custom
+		values. Currently this is used to specify a match specific
+		conceal character that will be shown for |hl-Conceal|
+		highlighted matches. The dict can have the following members:
+
+			conceal	    Special character to show instead of the
+				    match (only for |hl-Conceal| highlighted
+				    matches, see |:syn-cchar|)
+			window	    Instead of the current window use the
+				    window with this number or window ID.
+
+		The number of matches is not limited, as it is the case with
+		the |:match| commands.
+
+		Example: >
+			:highlight MyGroup ctermbg=green guibg=green
+			:let m = matchadd("MyGroup", "TODO")
+<		Deletion of the pattern: >
+			:call matchdelete(m)
+
+<		A list of matches defined by |matchadd()| and |:match| are
+		available from |getmatches()|.  All matches can be deleted in
+		one operation by |clearmatches()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetGroup()->matchadd('TODO')
+<
+							*matchaddpos()*
+matchaddpos({group}, {pos} [, {priority} [, {id} [, {dict}]]])
+		Same as |matchadd()|, but requires a list of positions {pos}
+		instead of a pattern. This command is faster than |matchadd()|
+		because it does not require to handle regular expressions and
+		sets buffer line boundaries to redraw screen. It is supposed
+		to be used when fast match additions and deletions are
+		required, for example to highlight matching parentheses.
+
+		{pos} is a list of positions.  Each position can be one of
+		these:
+		- A number.  This whole line will be highlighted.  The first
+		  line has number 1.
+		- A list with one number, e.g., [23]. The whole line with this
+		  number will be highlighted.
+		- A list with two numbers, e.g., [23, 11]. The first number is
+		  the line number, the second one is the column number (first
+		  column is 1, the value must correspond to the byte index as
+		  |col()| would return).  The character at this position will
+		  be highlighted.
+		- A list with three numbers, e.g., [23, 11, 3]. As above, but
+		  the third number gives the length of the highlight in bytes.
+
+		The maximum number of positions in {pos} is 8.
+
+		Example: >
+			:highlight MyGroup ctermbg=green guibg=green
+			:let m = matchaddpos("MyGroup", [[23, 24], 34])
+<		Deletion of the pattern: >
+			:call matchdelete(m)
+
+<		Matches added by |matchaddpos()| are returned by
+		|getmatches()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetGroup()->matchaddpos([23, 11])
+
+matcharg({nr})							*matcharg()*
+		Selects the {nr} match item, as set with a |:match|,
+		|:2match| or |:3match| command.
+		Return a |List| with two elements:
+			The name of the highlight group used
+			The pattern used.
+		When {nr} is not 1, 2 or 3 returns an empty |List|.
+		When there is no match item set returns ['', ''].
+		This is useful to save and restore a |:match|.
+		Highlighting matches using the |:match| commands are limited
+		to three matches. |matchadd()| does not have this limitation.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetMatch()->matcharg()
+
+matchdelete({id} [, {win})		       *matchdelete()* *E802* *E803*
+		Deletes a match with ID {id} previously defined by |matchadd()|
+		or one of the |:match| commands.  Returns 0 if successful,
+		otherwise -1.  See example for |matchadd()|.  All matches can
+		be deleted in one operation by |clearmatches()|.
+		If {win} is specified, use the window with this number or
+		window ID instead of the current window.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetMatch()->matchdelete()
+
+matchend({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])			*matchend()*
+		Same as |match()|, but return the index of first character
+		after the match.  Example: >
+			:echo matchend("testing", "ing")
+<		results in "7".
+							*strspn()* *strcspn()*
+		Vim doesn't have a strspn() or strcspn() function, but you can
+		do it with matchend(): >
+			:let span = matchend(line, '[a-zA-Z]')
+			:let span = matchend(line, '[^a-zA-Z]')
+<		Except that -1 is returned when there are no matches.
+
+		The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. >
+			:echo matchend("testing", "ing", 2)
+<		results in "7". >
+			:echo matchend("testing", "ing", 5)
+<		result is "-1".
+		When {expr} is a |List| the result is equal to |match()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetText()->matchend('word')
+
+
+matchfuzzy({list}, {str} [, {dict}])			*matchfuzzy()*
+		If {list} is a list of strings, then returns a |List| with all
+		the strings in {list} that fuzzy match {str}. The strings in
+		the returned list are sorted based on the matching score.
+
+		The optional {dict} argument always supports the following
+		items:
+		    matchseq	When this item is present and {str} contains
+				multiple words separated by white space, then
+				returns only matches that contain the words in
+				the given sequence.
+
+		If {list} is a list of dictionaries, then the optional {dict}
+		argument supports the following additional items:
+		    key		key of the item which is fuzzy matched against
+				{str}. The value of this item should be a
+				string.
+		    text_cb	|Funcref| that will be called for every item
+				in {list} to get the text for fuzzy matching.
+				This should accept a dictionary item as the
+				argument and return the text for that item to
+				use for fuzzy matching.
+
+		{str} is treated as a literal string and regular expression
+		matching is NOT supported.  The maximum supported {str} length
+		is 256.
+
+		When {str} has multiple words each separated by white space,
+		then the list of strings that have all the words is returned.
+
+		If there are no matching strings or there is an error, then an
+		empty list is returned. If length of {str} is greater than
+		256, then returns an empty list.
+
+		Refer to |fuzzy-match| for more information about fuzzy
+		matching strings.
+
+		Example: >
+		   :echo matchfuzzy(["clay", "crow"], "cay")
+<		results in ["clay"]. >
+		   :echo getbufinfo()->map({_, v -> v.name})->matchfuzzy("ndl")
+<		results in a list of buffer names fuzzy matching "ndl". >
+		   :echo getbufinfo()->matchfuzzy("ndl", {'key' : 'name'})
+<		results in a list of buffer information dicts with buffer
+		names fuzzy matching "ndl". >
+		   :echo getbufinfo()->matchfuzzy("spl",
+						\ {'text_cb' : {v -> v.name}})
+<		results in a list of buffer information dicts with buffer
+		names fuzzy matching "spl". >
+		   :echo v:oldfiles->matchfuzzy("test")
+<		results in a list of file names fuzzy matching "test". >
+		   :let l = readfile("buffer.c")->matchfuzzy("str")
+<		results in a list of lines in "buffer.c" fuzzy matching "str". >
+		   :echo ['one two', 'two one']->matchfuzzy('two one')
+<		results in ['two one', 'one two']. >
+		   :echo ['one two', 'two one']->matchfuzzy('two one',
+						\ {'matchseq': 1})
+<		results in ['two one'].
+
+matchfuzzypos({list}, {str} [, {dict}])			*matchfuzzypos()*
+		Same as |matchfuzzy()|, but returns the list of matched
+		strings, the list of character positions where characters
+		in {str} matches and a list of matching scores.  You can
+		use |byteidx()| to convert a character position to a byte
+		position.
+
+		If {str} matches multiple times in a string, then only the
+		positions for the best match is returned.
+
+		If there are no matching strings or there is an error, then a
+		list with three empty list items is returned.
+
+		Example: >
+			:echo matchfuzzypos(['testing'], 'tsg')
+<		results in [['testing'], [[0, 2, 6]], [99]] >
+			:echo matchfuzzypos(['clay', 'lacy'], 'la')
+<		results in [['lacy', 'clay'], [[0, 1], [1, 2]], [153, 133]] >
+			:echo [{'text': 'hello', 'id' : 10}]->matchfuzzypos('ll', {'key' : 'text'})
+<		results in [[{'id': 10, 'text': 'hello'}], [[2, 3]], [127]]
+
+matchlist({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])		*matchlist()*
+		Same as |match()|, but return a |List|.  The first item in the
+		list is the matched string, same as what matchstr() would
+		return.  Following items are submatches, like "\1", "\2", etc.
+		in |:substitute|.  When an optional submatch didn't match an
+		empty string is used.  Example: >
+			echo matchlist('acd', '\(a\)\?\(b\)\?\(c\)\?\(.*\)')
+<		Results in: ['acd', 'a', '', 'c', 'd', '', '', '', '', '']
+		When there is no match an empty list is returned.
+
+		You can pass in a List, but that is not very useful.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetText()->matchlist('word')
+
+matchstr({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])			*matchstr()*
+		Same as |match()|, but return the matched string.  Example: >
+			:echo matchstr("testing", "ing")
+<		results in "ing".
+		When there is no match "" is returned.
+		The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. >
+			:echo matchstr("testing", "ing", 2)
+<		results in "ing". >
+			:echo matchstr("testing", "ing", 5)
+<		result is "".
+		When {expr} is a |List| then the matching item is returned.
+		The type isn't changed, it's not necessarily a String.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetText()->matchstr('word')
+
+matchstrpos({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])		*matchstrpos()*
+		Same as |matchstr()|, but return the matched string, the start
+		position and the end position of the match.  Example: >
+			:echo matchstrpos("testing", "ing")
+<		results in ["ing", 4, 7].
+		When there is no match ["", -1, -1] is returned.
+		The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. >
+			:echo matchstrpos("testing", "ing", 2)
+<		results in ["ing", 4, 7]. >
+			:echo matchstrpos("testing", "ing", 5)
+<		result is ["", -1, -1].
+		When {expr} is a |List| then the matching item, the index
+		of first item where {pat} matches, the start position and the
+		end position of the match are returned. >
+			:echo matchstrpos([1, '__x'], '\a')
+<		result is ["x", 1, 2, 3].
+		The type isn't changed, it's not necessarily a String.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetText()->matchstrpos('word')
+<
+
+							*max()*
+max({expr})	Return the maximum value of all items in {expr}. Example: >
+			echo max([apples, pears, oranges])
+
+<		{expr} can be a |List| or a |Dictionary|.  For a Dictionary,
+		it returns the maximum of all values in the Dictionary.
+		If {expr} is neither a List nor a Dictionary, or one of the
+		items in {expr} cannot be used as a Number this results in
+		an error.  An empty |List| or |Dictionary| results in zero.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mylist->max()
+
+
+menu_info({name} [, {mode}])				*menu_info()*
+		Return information about the specified menu {name} in
+		mode {mode}. The menu name should be specified without the
+		shortcut character ('&'). If {name} is "", then the top-level
+		menu names are returned.
+
+		{mode} can be one of these strings:
+			"n"	Normal
+			"v"	Visual (including Select)
+			"o"	Operator-pending
+			"i"	Insert
+			"c"	Cmd-line
+			"s"	Select
+			"x"	Visual
+			"t"	Terminal-Job
+			""	Normal, Visual and Operator-pending
+			"!"	Insert and Cmd-line
+		When {mode} is omitted, the modes for "" are used.
+
+		Returns a |Dictionary| containing the following items:
+		  accel		menu item accelerator text |menu-text|
+		  display	display name (name without '&')
+		  enabled	v:true if this menu item is enabled
+				Refer to |:menu-enable|
+		  icon		name of the icon file (for toolbar)
+				|toolbar-icon|
+		  iconidx	index of a built-in icon
+		  modes		modes for which the menu is defined. In
+				addition to the modes mentioned above, these
+				characters will be used:
+				" "	Normal, Visual and Operator-pending
+		  name		menu item name.
+		  noremenu	v:true if the {rhs} of the menu item is not
+				remappable else v:false.
+		  priority	menu order priority |menu-priority|
+		  rhs		right-hand-side of the menu item. The returned
+				string has special characters translated like
+				in the output of the ":menu" command listing.
+				When the {rhs} of a menu item is empty, then
+				"<Nop>" is returned.
+		  script	v:true if script-local remapping of {rhs} is
+				allowed else v:false.  See |:menu-script|.
+		  shortcut	shortcut key (character after '&' in
+				the menu name) |menu-shortcut|
+		  silent	v:true if the menu item is created
+				with <silent> argument |:menu-silent|
+		  submenus	|List| containing the names of
+				all the submenus.  Present only if the menu
+				item has submenus.
+
+		Returns an empty dictionary if the menu item is not found.
+
+		Examples: >
+			:echo menu_info('Edit.Cut')
+			:echo menu_info('File.Save', 'n')
+
+			" Display the entire menu hierarchy in a buffer
+			func ShowMenu(name, pfx)
+			  let m = menu_info(a:name)
+			  call append(line('$'), a:pfx .. m.display)
+			  for child in m->get('submenus', [])
+			    call ShowMenu(a:name .. '.' .. escape(child, '.'),
+							\ a:pfx .. '    ')
+			  endfor
+			endfunc
+			new
+			for topmenu in menu_info('').submenus
+			  call ShowMenu(topmenu, '')
+			endfor
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetMenuName()->menu_info('v')
+
+
+<							*min()*
+min({expr})	Return the minimum value of all items in {expr}. Example:  >
+			echo min([apples, pears, oranges])
+
+<		{expr} can be a |List| or a |Dictionary|.  For a Dictionary,
+		it returns the minimum of all values in the Dictionary.
+		If {expr} is neither a List nor a Dictionary, or one of the
+		items in {expr} cannot be used as a Number this results in
+		an error.  An empty |List| or |Dictionary| results in zero.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mylist->min()
+
+<							*mkdir()* *E739*
+mkdir({name} [, {path} [, {prot}]])
+		Create directory {name}.
+
+		If {path} is "p" then intermediate directories are created as
+		necessary.  Otherwise it must be "".
+
+		If {prot} is given it is used to set the protection bits of
+		the new directory.  The default is 0o755 (rwxr-xr-x: r/w for
+		the user, readable for others).  Use 0o700 to make it
+		unreadable for others.  This is only used for the last part of
+		{name}.  Thus if you create /tmp/foo/bar then /tmp/foo will be
+		created with 0o755.
+		Example: >
+			:call mkdir($HOME . "/tmp/foo/bar", "p", 0o700)
+
+<		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+
+		There is no error if the directory already exists and the "p"
+		flag is passed (since patch 8.0.1708).  However, without the
+		"p" option the call will fail.
+
+		The function result is a Number, which is TRUE if the call was
+		successful or FALSE if the directory creation failed or partly
+		failed.
+
+		Not available on all systems.  To check use: >
+			:if exists("*mkdir")
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetName()->mkdir()
+<
+							*mode()*
+mode([expr])	Return a string that indicates the current mode.
+		If [expr] is supplied and it evaluates to a non-zero Number or
+		a non-empty String (|non-zero-arg|), then the full mode is
+		returned, otherwise only the first letter is returned.
+		Also see |state()|.
+
+		   n	    Normal
+		   no	    Operator-pending
+		   nov	    Operator-pending (forced characterwise |o_v|)
+		   noV	    Operator-pending (forced linewise |o_V|)
+		   noCTRL-V Operator-pending (forced blockwise |o_CTRL-V|);
+				CTRL-V is one character
+		   niI	    Normal using |i_CTRL-O| in |Insert-mode|
+		   niR	    Normal using |i_CTRL-O| in |Replace-mode|
+		   niV	    Normal using |i_CTRL-O| in |Virtual-Replace-mode|
+		   nt	    Terminal-Normal (insert goes to Terminal-Job mode)
+		   v	    Visual by character
+		   vs	    Visual by character using |v_CTRL-O| in Select mode
+		   V	    Visual by line
+		   Vs	    Visual by line using |v_CTRL-O| in Select mode
+		   CTRL-V   Visual blockwise
+		   CTRL-Vs  Visual blockwise using |v_CTRL-O| in Select mode
+		   s	    Select by character
+		   S	    Select by line
+		   CTRL-S   Select blockwise
+		   i	    Insert
+		   ic	    Insert mode completion |compl-generic|
+		   ix	    Insert mode |i_CTRL-X| completion
+		   R	    Replace |R|
+		   Rc	    Replace mode completion |compl-generic|
+		   Rx	    Replace mode |i_CTRL-X| completion
+		   Rv	    Virtual Replace |gR|
+		   Rvc	    Virtual Replace mode completion |compl-generic|
+		   Rvx	    Virtual Replace mode |i_CTRL-X| completion
+		   c	    Command-line editing
+		   cv	    Vim Ex mode |gQ|
+		   ce	    Normal Ex mode |Q|
+		   r	    Hit-enter prompt
+		   rm	    The -- more -- prompt
+		   r?	    A |:confirm| query of some sort
+		   !	    Shell or external command is executing
+		   t	    Terminal-Job mode: keys go to the job
+
+		This is useful in the 'statusline' option or when used
+		with |remote_expr()| In most other places it always returns
+		"c" or "n".
+		Note that in the future more modes and more specific modes may
+		be added. It's better not to compare the whole string but only
+		the leading character(s).
+		Also see |visualmode()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			DoFull()->mode()
+
+mzeval({expr})							*mzeval()*
+		Evaluate MzScheme expression {expr} and return its result
+		converted to Vim data structures.
+		Numbers and strings are returned as they are.
+		Pairs (including lists and improper lists) and vectors are
+		returned as Vim |Lists|.
+		Hash tables are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type with keys
+		converted to strings.
+		All other types are converted to string with display function.
+		Examples: >
+		    :mz (define l (list 1 2 3))
+		    :mz (define h (make-hash)) (hash-set! h "list" l)
+		    :echo mzeval("l")
+		    :echo mzeval("h")
+<
+		Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible
+		to {expr}.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetExpr()->mzeval()
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+mzscheme| feature}
+
+nextnonblank({lnum})					*nextnonblank()*
+		Return the line number of the first line at or below {lnum}
+		that is not blank.  Example: >
+			if getline(nextnonblank(1)) =~ "Java"
+<		When {lnum} is invalid or there is no non-blank line at or
+		below it, zero is returned.
+		{lnum} is used like with |getline()|.
+		See also |prevnonblank()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetLnum()->nextnonblank()
+
+nr2char({expr} [, {utf8}])				*nr2char()*
+		Return a string with a single character, which has the number
+		value {expr}.  Examples: >
+			nr2char(64)		returns "@"
+			nr2char(32)		returns " "
+<		When {utf8} is omitted or zero, the current 'encoding' is used.
+		Example for "utf-8": >
+			nr2char(300)		returns I with bow character
+<		When {utf8} is TRUE, always return UTF-8 characters.
+		Note that a NUL character in the file is specified with
+		nr2char(10), because NULs are represented with newline
+		characters.  nr2char(0) is a real NUL and terminates the
+		string, thus results in an empty string.
+		To turn a list of character numbers into a string: >
+		    let list = [65, 66, 67]
+		    let str = join(map(list, {_, val -> nr2char(val)}), '')
+<		Result: "ABC"
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetNumber()->nr2char()
+
+or({expr}, {expr})					*or()*
+		Bitwise OR on the two arguments.  The arguments are converted
+		to a number.  A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error.
+		Example: >
+			:let bits = or(bits, 0x80)
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			:let bits = bits->or(0x80)
+
+
+pathshorten({path} [, {len}])				*pathshorten()*
+		Shorten directory names in the path {path} and return the
+		result.  The tail, the file name, is kept as-is.  The other
+		components in the path are reduced to {len} letters in length.
+		If {len} is omitted or smaller than 1 then 1 is used (single
+		letters).  Leading '~' and '.' characters are kept.  Examples: >
+			:echo pathshorten('~/.vim/autoload/myfile.vim')
+<			~/.v/a/myfile.vim ~
+>
+			:echo pathshorten('~/.vim/autoload/myfile.vim', 2)
+<			~/.vi/au/myfile.vim ~
+		It doesn't matter if the path exists or not.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetDirectories()->pathshorten()
+
+perleval({expr})					*perleval()*
+		Evaluate Perl expression {expr} in scalar context and return
+		its result converted to Vim data structures. If value can't be
+		converted, it is returned as a string Perl representation.
+		Note: If you want an array or hash, {expr} must return a
+		reference to it.
+		Example: >
+			:echo perleval('[1 .. 4]')
+<			[1, 2, 3, 4]
+
+		Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible
+		to {expr}.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetExpr()->perleval()
+
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+perl| feature}
+
+
+popup_ functions are documented here: |popup-functions|
+
+
+pow({x}, {y})						*pow()*
+		Return the power of {x} to the exponent {y} as a |Float|.
+		{x} and {y} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo pow(3, 3)
+<			27.0 >
+			:echo pow(2, 16)
+<			65536.0 >
+			:echo pow(32, 0.20)
+<			2.0
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->pow(3)
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+prevnonblank({lnum})					*prevnonblank()*
+		Return the line number of the first line at or above {lnum}
+		that is not blank.  Example: >
+			let ind = indent(prevnonblank(v:lnum - 1))
+<		When {lnum} is invalid or there is no non-blank line at or
+		above it, zero is returned.
+		{lnum} is used like with |getline()|.
+		Also see |nextnonblank()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetLnum()->prevnonblank()
+
+printf({fmt}, {expr1} ...)				*printf()*
+		Return a String with {fmt}, where "%" items are replaced by
+		the formatted form of their respective arguments.  Example: >
+			printf("%4d: E%d %.30s", lnum, errno, msg)
+<		May result in:
+			"  99: E42 asdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfas" ~
+
+		When used as a |method| the base is passed as the second
+		argument: >
+			Compute()->printf("result: %d")
+
+<		Often used items are:
+		  %s	string
+		  %6S	string right-aligned in 6 display cells
+		  %6s	string right-aligned in 6 bytes
+		  %.9s	string truncated to 9 bytes
+		  %c	single byte
+		  %d	decimal number
+		  %5d	decimal number padded with spaces to 5 characters
+		  %x	hex number
+		  %04x	hex number padded with zeros to at least 4 characters
+		  %X	hex number using upper case letters
+		  %o	octal number
+		  %08b	binary number padded with zeros to at least 8 chars
+		  %f	floating point number as 12.23, inf, -inf or nan
+		  %F	floating point number as 12.23, INF, -INF or NAN
+		  %e	floating point number as 1.23e3, inf, -inf or nan
+		  %E	floating point number as 1.23E3, INF, -INF or NAN
+		  %g	floating point number, as %f or %e depending on value
+		  %G	floating point number, as %F or %E depending on value
+		  %%	the % character itself
+
+		Conversion specifications start with '%' and end with the
+		conversion type.  All other characters are copied unchanged to
+		the result.
+
+		The "%" starts a conversion specification.  The following
+		arguments appear in sequence:
+
+			%  [flags]  [field-width]  [.precision]  type
+
+		flags
+			Zero or more of the following flags:
+
+		    #	      The value should be converted to an "alternate
+			      form".  For c, d, and s conversions, this option
+			      has no effect.  For o conversions, the precision
+			      of the number is increased to force the first
+			      character of the output string to a zero (except
+			      if a zero value is printed with an explicit
+			      precision of zero).
+			      For b and B conversions, a non-zero result has
+			      the string "0b" (or "0B" for B conversions)
+			      prepended to it.
+			      For x and X conversions, a non-zero result has
+			      the string "0x" (or "0X" for X conversions)
+			      prepended to it.
+
+		    0 (zero)  Zero padding.  For all conversions the converted
+			      value is padded on the left with zeros rather
+			      than blanks.  If a precision is given with a
+			      numeric conversion (d, b, B, o, x, and X), the 0
+			      flag is ignored.
+
+		    -	      A negative field width flag; the converted value
+			      is to be left adjusted on the field boundary.
+			      The converted value is padded on the right with
+			      blanks, rather than on the left with blanks or
+			      zeros.  A - overrides a 0 if both are given.
+
+		    ' ' (space)  A blank should be left before a positive
+			      number produced by a signed conversion (d).
+
+		    +	      A sign must always be placed before a number
+			      produced by a signed conversion.  A + overrides
+			      a space if both are used.
+
+		field-width
+			An optional decimal digit string specifying a minimum
+			field width.  If the converted value has fewer bytes
+			than the field width, it will be padded with spaces on
+			the left (or right, if the left-adjustment flag has
+			been given) to fill out the field width.  For the S
+			conversion the count is in cells.
+
+		.precision
+			An optional precision, in the form of a period '.'
+			followed by an optional digit string.  If the digit
+			string is omitted, the precision is taken as zero.
+			This gives the minimum number of digits to appear for
+			d, o, x, and X conversions, the maximum number of
+			bytes to be printed from a string for s conversions,
+			or the maximum number of cells to be printed from a
+			string for S conversions.
+			For floating point it is the number of digits after
+			the decimal point.
+
+		type
+			A character that specifies the type of conversion to
+			be applied, see below.
+
+		A field width or precision, or both, may be indicated by an
+		asterisk '*' instead of a digit string.  In this case, a
+		Number argument supplies the field width or precision.  A
+		negative field width is treated as a left adjustment flag
+		followed by a positive field width; a negative precision is
+		treated as though it were missing.  Example: >
+			:echo printf("%d: %.*s", nr, width, line)
+<		This limits the length of the text used from "line" to
+		"width" bytes.
+
+		The conversion specifiers and their meanings are:
+
+				*printf-d* *printf-b* *printf-B* *printf-o*
+				*printf-x* *printf-X*
+		dbBoxX	The Number argument is converted to signed decimal
+			(d), unsigned binary (b and B), unsigned octal (o), or
+			unsigned hexadecimal (x and X) notation.  The letters
+			"abcdef" are used for x conversions; the letters
+			"ABCDEF" are used for X conversions.
+			The precision, if any, gives the minimum number of
+			digits that must appear; if the converted value
+			requires fewer digits, it is padded on the left with
+			zeros.
+			In no case does a non-existent or small field width
+			cause truncation of a numeric field; if the result of
+			a conversion is wider than the field width, the field
+			is expanded to contain the conversion result.
+			The 'h' modifier indicates the argument is 16 bits.
+			The 'l' modifier indicates the argument is 32 bits.
+			The 'L' modifier indicates the argument is 64 bits.
+			Generally, these modifiers are not useful. They are
+			ignored when type is known from the argument.
+
+		i	alias for d
+		D	alias for ld
+		U	alias for lu
+		O	alias for lo
+
+							*printf-c*
+		c	The Number argument is converted to a byte, and the
+			resulting character is written.
+
+							*printf-s*
+		s	The text of the String argument is used.  If a
+			precision is specified, no more bytes than the number
+			specified are used.
+			If the argument is not a String type, it is
+			automatically converted to text with the same format
+			as ":echo".
+							*printf-S*
+		S	The text of the String argument is used.  If a
+			precision is specified, no more display cells than the
+			number specified are used.
+
+							*printf-f* *E807*
+		f F	The Float argument is converted into a string of the
+			form 123.456.  The precision specifies the number of
+			digits after the decimal point.  When the precision is
+			zero the decimal point is omitted.  When the precision
+			is not specified 6 is used.  A really big number
+			(out of range or dividing by zero) results in "inf"
+			or "-inf" with %f (INF or -INF with %F).
+			"0.0 / 0.0" results in "nan" with %f (NAN with %F).
+			Example: >
+				echo printf("%.2f", 12.115)
+<				12.12
+			Note that roundoff depends on the system libraries.
+			Use |round()| when in doubt.
+
+							*printf-e* *printf-E*
+		e E	The Float argument is converted into a string of the
+			form 1.234e+03 or 1.234E+03 when using 'E'.  The
+			precision specifies the number of digits after the
+			decimal point, like with 'f'.
+
+							*printf-g* *printf-G*
+		g G	The Float argument is converted like with 'f' if the
+			value is between 0.001 (inclusive) and 10000000.0
+			(exclusive).  Otherwise 'e' is used for 'g' and 'E'
+			for 'G'.  When no precision is specified superfluous
+			zeroes and '+' signs are removed, except for the zero
+			immediately after the decimal point.  Thus 10000000.0
+			results in 1.0e7.
+
+							*printf-%*
+		%	A '%' is written.  No argument is converted.  The
+			complete conversion specification is "%%".
+
+		When a Number argument is expected a String argument is also
+		accepted and automatically converted.
+		When a Float or String argument is expected a Number argument
+		is also accepted and automatically converted.
+		Any other argument type results in an error message.
+
+							*E766* *E767*
+		The number of {exprN} arguments must exactly match the number
+		of "%" items.  If there are not sufficient or too many
+		arguments an error is given.  Up to 18 arguments can be used.
+
+
+prompt_getprompt({buf})					*prompt_getprompt()*
+		Returns the effective prompt text for buffer {buf}.  {buf} can
+		be a buffer name or number.  See |prompt-buffer|.
+
+		If the buffer doesn't exist or isn't a prompt buffer, an empty
+		string is returned.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetBuffer()->prompt_getprompt()
+
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
+
+
+prompt_setcallback({buf}, {expr})			*prompt_setcallback()*
+		Set prompt callback for buffer {buf} to {expr}.  When {expr}
+		is an empty string the callback is removed.  This has only
+		effect if {buf} has 'buftype' set to "prompt".
+
+		The callback is invoked when pressing Enter.  The current
+		buffer will always be the prompt buffer.  A new line for a
+		prompt is added before invoking the callback, thus the prompt
+		for which the callback was invoked will be in the last but one
+		line.
+		If the callback wants to add text to the buffer, it must
+		insert it above the last line, since that is where the current
+		prompt is.  This can also be done asynchronously.
+		The callback is invoked with one argument, which is the text
+		that was entered at the prompt.  This can be an empty string
+		if the user only typed Enter.
+		Example: >
+		   call prompt_setcallback(bufnr(), function('s:TextEntered'))
+		   func s:TextEntered(text)
+		     if a:text == 'exit' || a:text == 'quit'
+		       stopinsert
+		       close
+		     else
+		       call append(line('$') - 1, 'Entered: "' . a:text . '"')
+		       " Reset 'modified' to allow the buffer to be closed.
+		       set nomodified
+		     endif
+		   endfunc
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetBuffer()->prompt_setcallback(callback)
+
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
+
+prompt_setinterrupt({buf}, {expr})			*prompt_setinterrupt()*
+		Set a callback for buffer {buf} to {expr}.  When {expr} is an
+		empty string the callback is removed.  This has only effect if
+		{buf} has 'buftype' set to "prompt".
+
+		This callback will be invoked when pressing CTRL-C in Insert
+		mode.  Without setting a callback Vim will exit Insert mode,
+		as in any buffer.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetBuffer()->prompt_setinterrupt(callback)
+
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
+
+prompt_setprompt({buf}, {text})				*prompt_setprompt()*
+		Set prompt for buffer {buf} to {text}.  You most likely want
+		{text} to end in a space.
+		The result is only visible if {buf} has 'buftype' set to
+		"prompt".  Example: >
+			call prompt_setprompt(bufnr(), 'command: ')
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetBuffer()->prompt_setprompt('command: ')
+
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
+
+prop_ functions are documented here: |text-prop-functions|
+
+pum_getpos()						*pum_getpos()*
+		If the popup menu (see |ins-completion-menu|) is not visible,
+		returns an empty |Dictionary|, otherwise, returns a
+		|Dictionary| with the following keys:
+			height		nr of items visible
+			width		screen cells
+			row		top screen row (0 first row)
+			col		leftmost screen column (0 first col)
+			size		total nr of items
+			scrollbar	|TRUE| if scrollbar is visible
+
+		The values are the same as in |v:event| during
+		|CompleteChanged|.
+
+pumvisible()						*pumvisible()*
+		Returns non-zero when the popup menu is visible, zero
+		otherwise.  See |ins-completion-menu|.
+		This can be used to avoid some things that would remove the
+		popup menu.
+
+py3eval({expr})						*py3eval()*
+		Evaluate Python expression {expr} and return its result
+		converted to Vim data structures.
+		Numbers and strings are returned as they are (strings are
+		copied though, Unicode strings are additionally converted to
+		'encoding').
+		Lists are represented as Vim |List| type.
+		Dictionaries are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type with
+		keys converted to strings.
+		Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible
+		to {expr}.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetExpr()->py3eval()
+
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+python3| feature}
+
+							*E858* *E859*
+pyeval({expr})						*pyeval()*
+		Evaluate Python expression {expr} and return its result
+		converted to Vim data structures.
+		Numbers and strings are returned as they are (strings are
+		copied though).
+		Lists are represented as Vim |List| type.
+		Dictionaries are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type,
+		non-string keys result in error.
+		Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible
+		to {expr}.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetExpr()->pyeval()
+
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+python| feature}
+
+pyxeval({expr})						*pyxeval()*
+		Evaluate Python expression {expr} and return its result
+		converted to Vim data structures.
+		Uses Python 2 or 3, see |python_x| and 'pyxversion'.
+		See also: |pyeval()|, |py3eval()|
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetExpr()->pyxeval()
+
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+python| or the
+		|+python3| feature}
+
+rand([{expr}])						*rand()* *random*
+		Return a pseudo-random Number generated with an xoshiro128**
+		algorithm using seed {expr}.  The returned number is 32 bits,
+		also on 64 bits systems, for consistency.
+		{expr} can be initialized by |srand()| and will be updated by
+		rand().  If {expr} is omitted, an internal seed value is used
+		and updated.
+
+		Examples: >
+			:echo rand()
+			:let seed = srand()
+			:echo rand(seed)
+			:echo rand(seed) % 16  " random number 0 - 15
+<
+
+							*E726* *E727*
+range({expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]])				*range()*
+		Returns a |List| with Numbers:
+		- If only {expr} is specified: [0, 1, ..., {expr} - 1]
+		- If {max} is specified: [{expr}, {expr} + 1, ..., {max}]
+		- If {stride} is specified: [{expr}, {expr} + {stride}, ...,
+		  {max}] (increasing {expr} with {stride} each time, not
+		  producing a value past {max}).
+		When the maximum is one before the start the result is an
+		empty list.  When the maximum is more than one before the
+		start this is an error.
+		Examples: >
+			range(4)		" [0, 1, 2, 3]
+			range(2, 4)		" [2, 3, 4]
+			range(2, 9, 3)		" [2, 5, 8]
+			range(2, -2, -1)	" [2, 1, 0, -1, -2]
+			range(0)		" []
+			range(2, 0)		" error!
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetExpr()->range()
+<
+
+readblob({fname})					*readblob()*
+		Read file {fname} in binary mode and return a |Blob|.
+		When the file can't be opened an error message is given and
+		the result is an empty |Blob|.
+		Also see |readfile()| and |writefile()|.
+
+
+readdir({directory} [, {expr} [, {dict}]])			*readdir()*
+		Return a list with file and directory names in {directory}.
+		You can also use |glob()| if you don't need to do complicated
+		things, such as limiting the number of matches.
+		The list will be sorted (case sensitive), see the {dict}
+		argument below for changing the sort order.
+
+		When {expr} is omitted all entries are included.
+		When {expr} is given, it is evaluated to check what to do:
+			If {expr} results in -1 then no further entries will
+			be handled.
+			If {expr} results in 0 then this entry will not be
+			added to the list.
+			If {expr} results in 1 then this entry will be added
+			to the list.
+		The entries "." and ".." are always excluded.
+		Each time {expr} is evaluated |v:val| is set to the entry name.
+		When {expr} is a function the name is passed as the argument.
+		For example, to get a list of files ending in ".txt": >
+		  readdir(dirname, {n -> n =~ '.txt$'})
+<		To skip hidden and backup files: >
+		  readdir(dirname, {n -> n !~ '^\.\|\~$'})
+
+<		The optional {dict} argument allows for further custom
+		values. Currently this is used to specify if and how sorting
+		should be performed. The dict can have the following members:
+
+		    sort    How to sort the result returned from the system.
+			    Valid values are:
+				"none"	    do not sort (fastest method)
+				"case"	    sort case sensitive (byte value of
+					    each character, technically, using
+					    strcmp()) (default)
+				"icase"	    sort case insensitive (technically
+					    using strcasecmp())
+				"collate"   sort using the collation order
+					    of the "POSIX" or "C" |locale|
+					    (technically using strcoll())
+			    Other values are silently ignored.
+
+		For example, to get a list of all files in the current
+		directory without sorting the individual entries: >
+		  readdir('.', '1', #{sort: 'none'})
+<		If you want to get a directory tree: >
+		  function! s:tree(dir)
+		      return {a:dir : map(readdir(a:dir),
+		      \ {_, x -> isdirectory(x) ?
+		      \		 {x : s:tree(a:dir . '/' . x)} : x})}
+		  endfunction
+		  echo s:tree(".")
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetDirName()->readdir()
+<
+readdirex({directory} [, {expr} [, {dict}]])			*readdirex()*
+		Extended version of |readdir()|.
+		Return a list of Dictionaries with file and directory
+		information in {directory}.
+		This is useful if you want to get the attributes of file and
+		directory at the same time as getting a list of a directory.
+		This is much faster than calling |readdir()| then calling
+		|getfperm()|, |getfsize()|, |getftime()| and |getftype()| for
+		each file and directory especially on MS-Windows.
+		The list will by default be sorted by name (case sensitive),
+		the sorting can be changed by using the optional {dict}
+		argument, see |readdir()|.
+
+		The Dictionary for file and directory information has the
+		following items:
+			group	Group name of the entry. (Only on Unix)
+			name	Name of the entry.
+			perm	Permissions of the entry. See |getfperm()|.
+			size	Size of the entry. See |getfsize()|.
+			time	Timestamp of the entry. See |getftime()|.
+			type	Type of the entry.
+				On Unix, almost same as |getftype()| except:
+				    Symlink to a dir	"linkd"
+				    Other symlink	"link"
+				On MS-Windows:
+				    Normal file		"file"
+				    Directory		"dir"
+				    Junction		"junction"
+				    Symlink to a dir	"linkd"
+				    Other symlink	"link"
+				    Other reparse point	"reparse"
+			user	User name of the entry's owner. (Only on Unix)
+		On Unix, if the entry is a symlink, the Dictionary includes
+		the information of the target (except the "type" item).
+		On MS-Windows, it includes the information of the symlink
+		itself because of performance reasons.
+
+		When {expr} is omitted all entries are included.
+		When {expr} is given, it is evaluated to check what to do:
+			If {expr} results in -1 then no further entries will
+			be handled.
+			If {expr} results in 0 then this entry will not be
+			added to the list.
+			If {expr} results in 1 then this entry will be added
+			to the list.
+		The entries "." and ".." are always excluded.
+		Each time {expr} is evaluated |v:val| is set to a |Dictionary|
+		of the entry.
+		When {expr} is a function the entry is passed as the argument.
+		For example, to get a list of files ending in ".txt": >
+		  readdirex(dirname, {e -> e.name =~ '.txt$'})
+<
+		For example, to get a list of all files in the current
+		directory without sorting the individual entries: >
+		  readdirex(dirname, '1', #{sort: 'none'})
+
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetDirName()->readdirex()
+<
+
+							*readfile()*
+readfile({fname} [, {type} [, {max}]])
+		Read file {fname} and return a |List|, each line of the file
+		as an item.  Lines are broken at NL characters.  Macintosh
+		files separated with CR will result in a single long line
+		(unless a NL appears somewhere).
+		All NUL characters are replaced with a NL character.
+		When {type} contains "b" binary mode is used:
+		- When the last line ends in a NL an extra empty list item is
+		  added.
+		- No CR characters are removed.
+		Otherwise:
+		- CR characters that appear before a NL are removed.
+		- Whether the last line ends in a NL or not does not matter.
+		- When 'encoding' is Unicode any UTF-8 byte order mark is
+		  removed from the text.
+		When {max} is given this specifies the maximum number of lines
+		to be read.  Useful if you only want to check the first ten
+		lines of a file: >
+			:for line in readfile(fname, '', 10)
+			:  if line =~ 'Date' | echo line | endif
+			:endfor
+<		When {max} is negative -{max} lines from the end of the file
+		are returned, or as many as there are.
+		When {max} is zero the result is an empty list.
+		Note that without {max} the whole file is read into memory.
+		Also note that there is no recognition of encoding.  Read a
+		file into a buffer if you need to.
+		Deprecated (use |readblob()| instead): When {type} contains
+		"B" a |Blob| is returned with the binary data of the file
+		unmodified.
+		When the file can't be opened an error message is given and
+		the result is an empty list.
+		Also see |writefile()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetFileName()->readfile()
+
+reduce({object}, {func} [, {initial}])			*reduce()* *E998*
+		{func} is called for every item in {object}, which can be a
+		|String|, |List| or a |Blob|.  {func} is called with two
+		arguments: the result so far and current item.  After
+		processing all items the result is returned.
+
+		{initial} is the initial result.  When omitted, the first item
+		in {object} is used and {func} is first called for the second
+		item.  If {initial} is not given and {object} is empty no
+		result can be computed, an E998 error is given.
+
+		Examples: >
+			echo reduce([1, 3, 5], { acc, val -> acc + val })
+			echo reduce(['x', 'y'], { acc, val -> acc .. val }, 'a')
+			echo reduce(0z1122, { acc, val -> 2 * acc + val })
+			echo reduce('xyz', { acc, val -> acc .. ',' .. val })
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			echo mylist->reduce({ acc, val -> acc + val }, 0)
+
+
+reg_executing()						*reg_executing()*
+		Returns the single letter name of the register being executed.
+		Returns an empty string when no register is being executed.
+		See |@|.
+
+reg_recording()						*reg_recording()*
+		Returns the single letter name of the register being recorded.
+		Returns an empty string when not recording.  See |q|.
+
+reltime([{start} [, {end}]])				*reltime()*
+		Return an item that represents a time value.  The item is a
+		list with items that depend on the system.  In Vim 9 script
+		list<any> can be used.
+		The item can be passed to |reltimestr()| to convert it to a
+		string or |reltimefloat()| to convert to a Float.
+
+		Without an argument reltime() returns the current time.
+		With one argument is returns the time passed since the time
+		specified in the argument.
+		With two arguments it returns the time passed between {start}
+		and {end}.
+
+		The {start} and {end} arguments must be values returned by
+		reltime().  If there is an error zero is returned in legacy
+		script, in Vim9 script an error is given.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetStart()->reltime()
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature}
+
+reltimefloat({time})				*reltimefloat()*
+		Return a Float that represents the time value of {time}.
+		Example: >
+			let start = reltime()
+			call MyFunction()
+			let seconds = reltimefloat(reltime(start))
+<		See the note of reltimestr() about overhead.
+		Also see |profiling|.
+		If there is an error 0.0 is returned in legacy script, in Vim9
+		script an error is given.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			reltime(start)->reltimefloat()
+
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature}
+
+reltimestr({time})				*reltimestr()*
+		Return a String that represents the time value of {time}.
+		This is the number of seconds, a dot and the number of
+		microseconds.  Example: >
+			let start = reltime()
+			call MyFunction()
+			echo reltimestr(reltime(start))
+<		Note that overhead for the commands will be added to the time.
+		The accuracy depends on the system.
+		Leading spaces are used to make the string align nicely.  You
+		can use split() to remove it. >
+			echo split(reltimestr(reltime(start)))[0]
+<		Also see |profiling|.
+		If there is an error an empty string is returned in legacy
+		script, in Vim9 script an error is given.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			reltime(start)->reltimestr()
+
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature}
+
+							*remote_expr()* *E449*
+remote_expr({server}, {string} [, {idvar} [, {timeout}]])
+		Send the {string} to {server}.  The string is sent as an
+		expression and the result is returned after evaluation.
+		The result must be a String or a |List|.  A |List| is turned
+		into a String by joining the items with a line break in
+		between (not at the end), like with join(expr, "\n").
+		If {idvar} is present and not empty, it is taken as the name
+		of a variable and a {serverid} for later use with
+		|remote_read()| is stored there.
+		If {timeout} is given the read times out after this many
+		seconds.  Otherwise a timeout of 600 seconds is used.
+		See also |clientserver| |RemoteReply|.
+		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
+		Note: Any errors will cause a local error message to be issued
+		and the result will be the empty string.
+
+		Variables will be evaluated in the global namespace,
+		independent of a function currently being active.  Except
+		when in debug mode, then local function variables and
+		arguments can be evaluated.
+
+		Examples: >
+			:echo remote_expr("gvim", "2+2")
+			:echo remote_expr("gvim1", "b:current_syntax")
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			ServerName()->remote_expr(expr)
+
+remote_foreground({server})				*remote_foreground()*
+		Move the Vim server with the name {server} to the foreground.
+		The {server} argument is a string.
+		This works like: >
+			remote_expr({server}, "foreground()")
+<		Except that on Win32 systems the client does the work, to work
+		around the problem that the OS doesn't always allow the server
+		to bring itself to the foreground.
+		Note: This does not restore the window if it was minimized,
+		like foreground() does.
+		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			ServerName()->remote_foreground()
+
+<		{only in the Win32, Athena, Motif and GTK GUI versions and the
+		Win32 console version}
+
+
+remote_peek({serverid} [, {retvar}])		*remote_peek()*
+		Returns a positive number if there are available strings
+		from {serverid}.  Copies any reply string into the variable
+		{retvar} if specified.  {retvar} must be a string with the
+		name of a variable.
+		Returns zero if none are available.
+		Returns -1 if something is wrong.
+		See also |clientserver|.
+		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
+		Examples: >
+			:let repl = ""
+			:echo "PEEK: ".remote_peek(id, "repl").": ".repl
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			ServerId()->remote_peek()
+
+remote_read({serverid}, [{timeout}])			*remote_read()*
+		Return the oldest available reply from {serverid} and consume
+		it.  Unless a {timeout} in seconds is given, it blocks until a
+		reply is available.
+		See also |clientserver|.
+		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
+		Example: >
+			:echo remote_read(id)
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			ServerId()->remote_read()
+<
+							*remote_send()* *E241*
+remote_send({server}, {string} [, {idvar}])
+		Send the {string} to {server}.  The string is sent as input
+		keys and the function returns immediately.  At the Vim server
+		the keys are not mapped |:map|.
+		If {idvar} is present, it is taken as the name of a variable
+		and a {serverid} for later use with remote_read() is stored
+		there.
+		See also |clientserver| |RemoteReply|.
+		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
+
+		Note: Any errors will be reported in the server and may mess
+		up the display.
+		Examples: >
+		:echo remote_send("gvim", ":DropAndReply ".file, "serverid").
+		 \ remote_read(serverid)
+
+		:autocmd NONE RemoteReply *
+		 \ echo remote_read(expand("<amatch>"))
+		:echo remote_send("gvim", ":sleep 10 | echo ".
+		 \ 'server2client(expand("<client>"), "HELLO")<CR>')
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			ServerName()->remote_send(keys)
+<
+					*remote_startserver()* *E941* *E942*
+remote_startserver({name})
+		Become the server {name}.  This fails if already running as a
+		server, when |v:servername| is not empty.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			ServerName()->remote_startserver()
+
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
+
+remove({list}, {idx} [, {end}])				*remove()*
+		Without {end}: Remove the item at {idx} from |List| {list} and
+		return the item.
+		With {end}: Remove items from {idx} to {end} (inclusive) and
+		return a |List| with these items.  When {idx} points to the same
+		item as {end} a list with one item is returned.  When {end}
+		points to an item before {idx} this is an error.
+		See |list-index| for possible values of {idx} and {end}.
+		Example: >
+			:echo "last item: " . remove(mylist, -1)
+			:call remove(mylist, 0, 9)
+<
+		Use |delete()| to remove a file.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mylist->remove(idx)
+
+remove({blob}, {idx} [, {end}])
+		Without {end}: Remove the byte at {idx} from |Blob| {blob} and
+		return the byte.
+		With {end}: Remove bytes from {idx} to {end} (inclusive) and
+		return a |Blob| with these bytes.  When {idx} points to the same
+		byte as {end} a |Blob| with one byte is returned.  When {end}
+		points to a byte before {idx} this is an error.
+		Example: >
+			:echo "last byte: " . remove(myblob, -1)
+			:call remove(mylist, 0, 9)
+
+remove({dict}, {key})
+		Remove the entry from {dict} with key {key} and return it.
+		Example: >
+			:echo "removed " . remove(dict, "one")
+<		If there is no {key} in {dict} this is an error.
+
+rename({from}, {to})					*rename()*
+		Rename the file by the name {from} to the name {to}.  This
+		should also work to move files across file systems.  The
+		result is a Number, which is 0 if the file was renamed
+		successfully, and non-zero when the renaming failed.
+		NOTE: If {to} exists it is overwritten without warning.
+		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetOldName()->rename(newname)
+
+repeat({expr}, {count})					*repeat()*
+		Repeat {expr} {count} times and return the concatenated
+		result.  Example: >
+			:let separator = repeat('-', 80)
+<		When {count} is zero or negative the result is empty.
+		When {expr} is a |List| the result is {expr} concatenated
+		{count} times.  Example: >
+			:let longlist = repeat(['a', 'b'], 3)
+<		Results in ['a', 'b', 'a', 'b', 'a', 'b'].
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mylist->repeat(count)
+
+resolve({filename})					*resolve()* *E655*
+		On MS-Windows, when {filename} is a shortcut (a .lnk file),
+		returns the path the shortcut points to in a simplified form.
+		When {filename} is a symbolic link or junction point, return
+		the full path to the target. If the target of junction is
+		removed, return {filename}.
+		On Unix, repeat resolving symbolic links in all path
+		components of {filename} and return the simplified result.
+		To cope with link cycles, resolving of symbolic links is
+		stopped after 100 iterations.
+		On other systems, return the simplified {filename}.
+		The simplification step is done as by |simplify()|.
+		resolve() keeps a leading path component specifying the
+		current directory (provided the result is still a relative
+		path name) and also keeps a trailing path separator.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetName()->resolve()
+
+reverse({object})					*reverse()*
+		Reverse the order of items in {object} in-place.
+		{object} can be a |List| or a |Blob|.
+		Returns {object}.
+		If you want an object to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
+			:let revlist = reverse(copy(mylist))
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mylist->reverse()
+
+round({expr})							*round()*
+		Round off {expr} to the nearest integral value and return it
+		as a |Float|.  If {expr} lies halfway between two integral
+		values, then use the larger one (away from zero).
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			echo round(0.456)
+<			0.0  >
+			echo round(4.5)
+<			5.0 >
+			echo round(-4.5)
+<			-5.0
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->round()
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+rubyeval({expr})					*rubyeval()*
+		Evaluate Ruby expression {expr} and return its result
+		converted to Vim data structures.
+		Numbers, floats and strings are returned as they are (strings
+		are copied though).
+		Arrays are represented as Vim |List| type.
+		Hashes are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type.
+		Other objects are represented as strings resulted from their
+		"Object#to_s" method.
+		Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible
+		to {expr}.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetRubyExpr()->rubyeval()
+
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+ruby| feature}
+
+screenattr({row}, {col})					*screenattr()*
+		Like |screenchar()|, but return the attribute.  This is a rather
+		arbitrary number that can only be used to compare to the
+		attribute at other positions.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetRow()->screenattr(col)
+
+screenchar({row}, {col})					*screenchar()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the character at position
+		[row, col] on the screen.  This works for every possible
+		screen position, also status lines, window separators and the
+		command line.  The top left position is row one, column one
+		The character excludes composing characters.  For double-byte
+		encodings it may only be the first byte.
+		This is mainly to be used for testing.
+		Returns -1 when row or col is out of range.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetRow()->screenchar(col)
+
+screenchars({row}, {col})					*screenchars()*
+		The result is a |List| of Numbers.  The first number is the same
+		as what |screenchar()| returns.  Further numbers are
+		composing characters on top of the base character.
+		This is mainly to be used for testing.
+		Returns an empty List when row or col is out of range.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetRow()->screenchars(col)
+
+screencol()							*screencol()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the current screen column of
+		the cursor. The leftmost column has number 1.
+		This function is mainly used for testing.
+
+		Note: Always returns the current screen column, thus if used
+		in a command (e.g. ":echo screencol()") it will return the
+		column inside the command line, which is 1 when the command is
+		executed. To get the cursor position in the file use one of
+		the following mappings: >
+			nnoremap <expr> GG ":echom ".screencol()."\n"
+			nnoremap <silent> GG :echom screencol()<CR>
+			nnoremap GG <Cmd>echom screencol()<CR>
+<
+screenpos({winid}, {lnum}, {col})				*screenpos()*
+		The result is a Dict with the screen position of the text
+		character in window {winid} at buffer line {lnum} and column
+		{col}.  {col} is a one-based byte index.
+		The Dict has these members:
+			row	screen row
+			col	first screen column
+			endcol	last screen column
+			curscol	cursor screen column
+		If the specified position is not visible, all values are zero.
+		The "endcol" value differs from "col" when the character
+		occupies more than one screen cell.  E.g. for a Tab "col" can
+		be 1 and "endcol" can be 8.
+		The "curscol" value is where the cursor would be placed.  For
+		a Tab it would be the same as "endcol", while for a double
+		width character it would be the same as "col".
+		The |conceal| feature is ignored here, the column numbers are
+		as if 'conceallevel' is zero.  You can set the cursor to the
+		right position and use |screencol()| to get the value with
+		|conceal| taken into account.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetWinid()->screenpos(lnum, col)
+
+screenrow()							*screenrow()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the current screen row of the
+		cursor.  The top line has number one.
+		This function is mainly used for testing.
+		Alternatively you can use |winline()|.
+
+		Note: Same restrictions as with |screencol()|.
+
+screenstring({row}, {col})					*screenstring()*
+		The result is a String that contains the base character and
+		any composing characters at position [row, col] on the screen.
+		This is like |screenchars()| but returning a String with the
+		characters.
+		This is mainly to be used for testing.
+		Returns an empty String when row or col is out of range.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetRow()->screenstring(col)
+<
+								*search()*
+search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout} [, {skip}]]]])
+		Search for regexp pattern {pattern}.  The search starts at the
+		cursor position (you can use |cursor()| to set it).
+
+		When a match has been found its line number is returned.
+		If there is no match a 0 is returned and the cursor doesn't
+		move.  No error message is given.
+
+		{flags} is a String, which can contain these character flags:
+		'b'	search Backward instead of forward
+		'c'	accept a match at the Cursor position
+		'e'	move to the End of the match
+		'n'	do Not move the cursor
+		'p'	return number of matching sub-Pattern (see below)
+		's'	Set the ' mark at the previous location of the cursor
+		'w'	Wrap around the end of the file
+		'W'	don't Wrap around the end of the file
+		'z'	start searching at the cursor column instead of zero
+		If neither 'w' or 'W' is given, the 'wrapscan' option applies.
+
+		If the 's' flag is supplied, the ' mark is set, only if the
+		cursor is moved. The 's' flag cannot be combined with the 'n'
+		flag.
+
+		'ignorecase', 'smartcase' and 'magic' are used.
+
+		When the 'z' flag is not given, forward searching always
+		starts in column zero and then matches before the cursor are
+		skipped.  When the 'c' flag is present in 'cpo' the next
+		search starts after the match.  Without the 'c' flag the next
+		search starts one column further.  This matters for
+		overlapping matches.
+		When searching backwards and the 'z' flag is given then the
+		search starts in column zero, thus no match in the current
+		line will be found (unless wrapping around the end of the
+		file).
+
+		When the {stopline} argument is given then the search stops
+		after searching this line.  This is useful to restrict the
+		search to a range of lines.  Examples: >
+			let match = search('(', 'b', line("w0"))
+			let end = search('END', '', line("w$"))
+<		When {stopline} is used and it is not zero this also implies
+		that the search does not wrap around the end of the file.
+		A zero value is equal to not giving the argument.
+
+		When the {timeout} argument is given the search stops when
+		more than this many milliseconds have passed.  Thus when
+		{timeout} is 500 the search stops after half a second.
+		The value must not be negative.  A zero value is like not
+		giving the argument.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature}
+
+		If the {skip} expression is given it is evaluated with the
+		cursor positioned on the start of a match.  If it evaluates to
+		non-zero this match is skipped.  This can be used, for
+		example, to skip a match in a comment or a string.
+		{skip} can be a string, which is evaluated as an expression, a
+		function reference or a lambda.
+		When {skip} is omitted or empty, every match is accepted.
+		When evaluating {skip} causes an error the search is aborted
+		and -1 returned.
+							*search()-sub-match*
+		With the 'p' flag the returned value is one more than the
+		first sub-match in \(\).  One if none of them matched but the
+		whole pattern did match.
+		To get the column number too use |searchpos()|.
+
+		The cursor will be positioned at the match, unless the 'n'
+		flag is used.
+
+		Example (goes over all files in the argument list): >
+		    :let n = 1
+		    :while n <= argc()	    " loop over all files in arglist
+		    :  exe "argument " . n
+		    :  " start at the last char in the file and wrap for the
+		    :  " first search to find match at start of file
+		    :  normal G$
+		    :  let flags = "w"
+		    :  while search("foo", flags) > 0
+		    :	 s/foo/bar/g
+		    :	 let flags = "W"
+		    :  endwhile
+		    :  update		    " write the file if modified
+		    :  let n = n + 1
+		    :endwhile
+<
+		Example for using some flags: >
+		    :echo search('\<if\|\(else\)\|\(endif\)', 'ncpe')
+<		This will search for the keywords "if", "else", and "endif"
+		under or after the cursor.  Because of the 'p' flag, it
+		returns 1, 2, or 3 depending on which keyword is found, or 0
+		if the search fails.  With the cursor on the first word of the
+		line:
+		    if (foo == 0) | let foo = foo + 1 | endif ~
+		the function returns 1.  Without the 'c' flag, the function
+		finds the "endif" and returns 3.  The same thing happens
+		without the 'e' flag if the cursor is on the "f" of "if".
+		The 'n' flag tells the function not to move the cursor.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetPattern()->search()
+
+searchcount([{options}])					*searchcount()*
+		Get or update the last search count, like what is displayed
+		without the "S" flag in 'shortmess'.  This works even if
+		'shortmess' does contain the "S" flag.
+
+		This returns a |Dictionary|. The dictionary is empty if the
+		previous pattern was not set and "pattern" was not specified.
+
+		  key		type		meaning ~
+		  current	|Number|	current position of match;
+						0 if the cursor position is
+						before the first match
+		  exact_match	|Boolean|	1 if "current" is matched on
+						"pos", otherwise 0
+		  total		|Number|	total count of matches found
+		  incomplete	|Number|	0: search was fully completed
+						1: recomputing was timed out
+						2: max count exceeded
+
+		For {options} see further down.
+
+		To get the last search count when |n| or |N| was pressed, call
+		this function with `recompute: 0` . This sometimes returns
+		wrong information because |n| and |N|'s maximum count is 99.
+		If it exceeded 99 the result must be max count + 1 (100). If
+		you want to get correct information, specify `recompute: 1`: >
+
+			" result == maxcount + 1 (100) when many matches
+			let result = searchcount(#{recompute: 0})
+
+			" Below returns correct result (recompute defaults
+			" to 1)
+			let result = searchcount()
+<
+		The function is useful to add the count to |statusline|: >
+			function! LastSearchCount() abort
+			  let result = searchcount(#{recompute: 0})
+			  if empty(result)
+			    return ''
+			  endif
+			  if result.incomplete ==# 1     " timed out
+			    return printf(' /%s [?/??]', @/)
+			  elseif result.incomplete ==# 2 " max count exceeded
+			    if result.total > result.maxcount &&
+			    \  result.current > result.maxcount
+			      return printf(' /%s [>%d/>%d]', @/,
+			      \		    result.current, result.total)
+			    elseif result.total > result.maxcount
+			      return printf(' /%s [%d/>%d]', @/,
+			      \		    result.current, result.total)
+			    endif
+			  endif
+			  return printf(' /%s [%d/%d]', @/,
+			  \		result.current, result.total)
+			endfunction
+			let &statusline .= '%{LastSearchCount()}'
+
+			" Or if you want to show the count only when
+			" 'hlsearch' was on
+			" let &statusline .=
+			" \   '%{v:hlsearch ? LastSearchCount() : ""}'
+<
+		You can also update the search count, which can be useful in a
+		|CursorMoved| or |CursorMovedI| autocommand: >
+
+			autocmd CursorMoved,CursorMovedI *
+			  \ let s:searchcount_timer = timer_start(
+			  \   200, function('s:update_searchcount'))
+			function! s:update_searchcount(timer) abort
+			  if a:timer ==# s:searchcount_timer
+			    call searchcount(#{
+			    \ recompute: 1, maxcount: 0, timeout: 100})
+			    redrawstatus
+			  endif
+			endfunction
+<
+		This can also be used to count matched texts with specified
+		pattern in the current buffer using "pattern":  >
+
+			" Count '\<foo\>' in this buffer
+			" (Note that it also updates search count)
+			let result = searchcount(#{pattern: '\<foo\>'})
+
+			" To restore old search count by old pattern,
+			" search again
+			call searchcount()
+<
+		{options} must be a |Dictionary|. It can contain:
+		  key		type		meaning ~
+		  recompute	|Boolean|	if |TRUE|, recompute the count
+						like |n| or |N| was executed.
+						otherwise returns the last
+						computed result (when |n| or
+						|N| was used when "S" is not
+						in 'shortmess', or this
+						function was called).
+						(default: |TRUE|)
+		  pattern	|String|	recompute if this was given
+						and different with |@/|.
+						this works as same as the
+						below command is executed
+						before calling this function >
+						  let @/ = pattern
+<						(default: |@/|)
+		  timeout	|Number|	0 or negative number is no
+						timeout. timeout milliseconds
+						for recomputing the result
+						(default: 0)
+		  maxcount	|Number|	0 or negative number is no
+						limit. max count of matched
+						text while recomputing the
+						result.  if search exceeded
+						total count, "total" value
+						becomes `maxcount + 1`
+						(default: 99)
+		  pos		|List|		`[lnum, col, off]` value
+						when recomputing the result.
+						this changes "current" result
+						value. see |cursor()|,
+						|getpos()|
+						(default: cursor's position)
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetSearchOpts()->searchcount()
+<
+searchdecl({name} [, {global} [, {thisblock}]])			*searchdecl()*
+		Search for the declaration of {name}.
+
+		With a non-zero {global} argument it works like |gD|, find
+		first match in the file.  Otherwise it works like |gd|, find
+		first match in the function.
+
+		With a non-zero {thisblock} argument matches in a {} block
+		that ends before the cursor position are ignored.  Avoids
+		finding variable declarations only valid in another scope.
+
+		Moves the cursor to the found match.
+		Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure.
+		Example: >
+			if searchdecl('myvar') == 0
+			   echo getline('.')
+			endif
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetName()->searchdecl()
+<
+							*searchpair()*
+searchpair({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip}
+				[, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]])
+		Search for the match of a nested start-end pair.  This can be
+		used to find the "endif" that matches an "if", while other
+		if/endif pairs in between are ignored.
+		The search starts at the cursor.  The default is to search
+		forward, include 'b' in {flags} to search backward.
+		If a match is found, the cursor is positioned at it and the
+		line number is returned.  If no match is found 0 or -1 is
+		returned and the cursor doesn't move.  No error message is
+		given.
+
+		{start}, {middle} and {end} are patterns, see |pattern|.  They
+		must not contain \( \) pairs.  Use of \%( \) is allowed.  When
+		{middle} is not empty, it is found when searching from either
+		direction, but only when not in a nested start-end pair.  A
+		typical use is: >
+			searchpair('\<if\>', '\<else\>', '\<endif\>')
+<		By leaving {middle} empty the "else" is skipped.
+
+		{flags} 'b', 'c', 'n', 's', 'w' and 'W' are used like with
+		|search()|.  Additionally:
+		'r'	Repeat until no more matches found; will find the
+			outer pair.  Implies the 'W' flag.
+		'm'	Return number of matches instead of line number with
+			the match; will be > 1 when 'r' is used.
+		Note: it's nearly always a good idea to use the 'W' flag, to
+		avoid wrapping around the end of the file.
+
+		When a match for {start}, {middle} or {end} is found, the
+		{skip} expression is evaluated with the cursor positioned on
+		the start of the match.  It should return non-zero if this
+		match is to be skipped.  E.g., because it is inside a comment
+		or a string.
+		When {skip} is omitted or empty, every match is accepted.
+		When evaluating {skip} causes an error the search is aborted
+		and -1 returned.
+		{skip} can be a string, a lambda, a funcref or a partial.
+		Anything else makes the function fail.
+		In a `:def` function when the {skip} argument is a string
+		constant it is compiled into instructions.
+
+		For {stopline} and {timeout} see |search()|.
+
+		The value of 'ignorecase' is used.  'magic' is ignored, the
+		patterns are used like it's on.
+
+		The search starts exactly at the cursor.  A match with
+		{start}, {middle} or {end} at the next character, in the
+		direction of searching, is the first one found.  Example: >
+			if 1
+			  if 2
+			  endif 2
+			endif 1
+<		When starting at the "if 2", with the cursor on the "i", and
+		searching forwards, the "endif 2" is found.  When starting on
+		the character just before the "if 2", the "endif 1" will be
+		found.  That's because the "if 2" will be found first, and
+		then this is considered to be a nested if/endif from "if 2" to
+		"endif 2".
+		When searching backwards and {end} is more than one character,
+		it may be useful to put "\zs" at the end of the pattern, so
+		that when the cursor is inside a match with the end it finds
+		the matching start.
+
+		Example, to find the "endif" command in a Vim script: >
+
+	:echo searchpair('\<if\>', '\<el\%[seif]\>', '\<en\%[dif]\>', 'W',
+			\ 'getline(".") =~ "^\\s*\""')
+
+<		The cursor must be at or after the "if" for which a match is
+		to be found.  Note that single-quote strings are used to avoid
+		having to double the backslashes.  The skip expression only
+		catches comments at the start of a line, not after a command.
+		Also, a word "en" or "if" halfway a line is considered a
+		match.
+		Another example, to search for the matching "{" of a "}": >
+
+	:echo searchpair('{', '', '}', 'bW')
+
+<		This works when the cursor is at or before the "}" for which a
+		match is to be found.  To reject matches that syntax
+		highlighting recognized as strings: >
+
+	:echo searchpair('{', '', '}', 'bW',
+	     \ 'synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."), 0), "name") =~? "string"')
+<
+							*searchpairpos()*
+searchpairpos({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip}
+				[, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]])
+		Same as |searchpair()|, but returns a |List| with the line and
+		column position of the match. The first element of the |List|
+		is the line number and the second element is the byte index of
+		the column position of the match.  If no match is found,
+		returns [0, 0]. >
+
+			:let [lnum,col] = searchpairpos('{', '', '}', 'n')
+<
+		See |match-parens| for a bigger and more useful example.
+
+							*searchpos()*
+searchpos({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout} [, {skip}]]]])
+		Same as |search()|, but returns a |List| with the line and
+		column position of the match. The first element of the |List|
+		is the line number and the second element is the byte index of
+		the column position of the match. If no match is found,
+		returns [0, 0].
+		Example: >
+	:let [lnum, col] = searchpos('mypattern', 'n')
+
+<		When the 'p' flag is given then there is an extra item with
+		the sub-pattern match number |search()-sub-match|.  Example: >
+	:let [lnum, col, submatch] = searchpos('\(\l\)\|\(\u\)', 'np')
+<		In this example "submatch" is 2 when a lowercase letter is
+		found |/\l|, 3 when an uppercase letter is found |/\u|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetPattern()->searchpos()
+
+server2client({clientid}, {string})			*server2client()*
+		Send a reply string to {clientid}.  The most recent {clientid}
+		that sent a string can be retrieved with expand("<client>").
+		{only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
+		Returns zero for success, -1 for failure.
+		Note:
+		This id has to be stored before the next command can be
+		received.  I.e. before returning from the received command and
+		before calling any commands that waits for input.
+		See also |clientserver|.
+		Example: >
+			:echo server2client(expand("<client>"), "HELLO")
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetClientId()->server2client(string)
+<
+serverlist()					*serverlist()*
+		Return a list of available server names, one per line.
+		When there are no servers or the information is not available
+		an empty string is returned.  See also |clientserver|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
+		Example: >
+			:echo serverlist()
+<
+setbufline({buf}, {lnum}, {text})			*setbufline()*
+		Set line {lnum} to {text} in buffer {buf}.  This works like
+		|setline()| for the specified buffer.
+
+		This function works only for loaded buffers. First call
+		|bufload()| if needed.
+
+		To insert lines use |appendbufline()|.
+		Any text properties in {lnum} are cleared.
+
+		{text} can be a string to set one line, or a list of strings
+		to set multiple lines.  If the list extends below the last
+		line then those lines are added.
+
+		For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above.
+
+		{lnum} is used like with |setline()|.
+		Use "$" to refer to the last line in buffer {buf}.
+		When {lnum} is just below the last line the {text} will be
+		added below the last line.
+
+		When {buf} is not a valid buffer, the buffer is not loaded or
+		{lnum} is not valid then 1 is returned.  In |Vim9| script an
+		error is given.
+		On success 0 is returned.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
+		third argument: >
+			GetText()->setbufline(buf, lnum)
+
+setbufvar({buf}, {varname}, {val})			*setbufvar()*
+		Set option or local variable {varname} in buffer {buf} to
+		{val}.
+		This also works for a global or local window option, but it
+		doesn't work for a global or local window variable.
+		For a local window option the global value is unchanged.
+		For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above.
+		The {varname} argument is a string.
+		Note that the variable name without "b:" must be used.
+		Examples: >
+			:call setbufvar(1, "&mod", 1)
+			:call setbufvar("todo", "myvar", "foobar")
+<		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
+		third argument: >
+			GetValue()->setbufvar(buf, varname)
+
+
+setcellwidths({list})					*setcellwidths()*
+		Specify overrides for cell widths of character ranges.  This
+		tells Vim how wide characters are, counted in screen cells.
+		This overrides 'ambiwidth'.  Example: >
+		   setcellwidths([[0xad, 0xad, 1],
+				\ [0x2194, 0x2199, 2]])
+
+<					*E1109* *E1110* *E1111* *E1112* *E1113*
+		The {list} argument is a list of lists with each three
+		numbers. These three numbers are [low, high, width].  "low"
+		and "high" can be the same, in which case this refers to one
+		character. Otherwise it is the range of characters from "low"
+		to "high" (inclusive).  "width" is either 1 or 2, indicating
+		the character width in screen cells.
+		An error is given if the argument is invalid, also when a
+		range overlaps with another.
+		Only characters with value 0x100 and higher can be used.
+
+		If the new value causes 'fillchars' or 'listchars' to become
+		invalid it is rejected and an error is given.
+
+		To clear the overrides pass an empty list: >
+		   setcellwidths([]);
+<		You can use the script $VIMRUNTIME/tools/emoji_list.vim to see
+		the effect for known emoji characters.
+
+setcharpos({expr}, {list})				*setcharpos()*
+		Same as |setpos()| but uses the specified column number as the
+		character index instead of the byte index in the line.
+
+		Example:
+		With the text "여보세요" in line 8: >
+			call setcharpos('.', [0, 8, 4, 0])
+<		positions the cursor on the fourth character '요'. >
+			call setpos('.', [0, 8, 4, 0])
+<		positions the cursor on the second character '보'.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetPosition()->setcharpos('.')
+
+setcharsearch({dict})					*setcharsearch()*
+		Set the current character search information to {dict},
+		which contains one or more of the following entries:
+
+		    char	character which will be used for a subsequent
+				|,| or |;| command; an empty string clears the
+				character search
+		    forward	direction of character search; 1 for forward,
+				0 for backward
+		    until	type of character search; 1 for a |t| or |T|
+				character search, 0 for an |f| or |F|
+				character search
+
+		This can be useful to save/restore a user's character search
+		from a script: >
+			:let prevsearch = getcharsearch()
+			:" Perform a command which clobbers user's search
+			:call setcharsearch(prevsearch)
+<		Also see |getcharsearch()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			SavedSearch()->setcharsearch()
+
+setcmdpos({pos})					*setcmdpos()*
+		Set the cursor position in the command line to byte position
+		{pos}.  The first position is 1.
+		Use |getcmdpos()| to obtain the current position.
+		Only works while editing the command line, thus you must use
+		|c_CTRL-\_e|, |c_CTRL-R_=| or |c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R| with '='.  For
+		|c_CTRL-\_e| and |c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R| with '=' the position is
+		set after the command line is set to the expression.  For
+		|c_CTRL-R_=| it is set after evaluating the expression but
+		before inserting the resulting text.
+		When the number is too big the cursor is put at the end of the
+		line.  A number smaller than one has undefined results.
+		Returns FALSE when successful, TRUE when not editing the
+		command line.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetPos()->setcmdpos()
+
+setcursorcharpos({lnum}, {col} [, {off}])		*setcursorcharpos()*
+setcursorcharpos({list})
+		Same as |cursor()| but uses the specified column number as the
+		character index instead of the byte index in the line.
+
+		Example:
+		With the text "여보세요" in line 4: >
+			call setcursorcharpos(4, 3)
+<		positions the cursor on the third character '세'. >
+			call cursor(4, 3)
+<		positions the cursor on the first character '여'.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetCursorPos()->setcursorcharpos()
+
+
+setenv({name}, {val})						*setenv()*
+		Set environment variable {name} to {val}.  Example: >
+			call setenv('HOME', '/home/myhome')
+
+<		When {val} is |v:null| the environment variable is deleted.
+		See also |expr-env|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
+		second argument: >
+			GetPath()->setenv('PATH')
+
+setfperm({fname}, {mode})				*setfperm()* *chmod*
+		Set the file permissions for {fname} to {mode}.
+		{mode} must be a string with 9 characters.  It is of the form
+		"rwxrwxrwx", where each group of "rwx" flags represent, in
+		turn, the permissions of the owner of the file, the group the
+		file belongs to, and other users.  A '-' character means the
+		permission is off, any other character means on.  Multi-byte
+		characters are not supported.
+
+		For example "rw-r-----" means read-write for the user,
+		readable by the group, not accessible by others.  "xx-x-----"
+		would do the same thing.
+
+		Returns non-zero for success, zero for failure.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetFilename()->setfperm(mode)
+<
+		To read permissions see |getfperm()|.
+
+
+setline({lnum}, {text})					*setline()*
+		Set line {lnum} of the current buffer to {text}.  To insert
+		lines use |append()|. To set lines in another buffer use
+		|setbufline()|.  Any text properties in {lnum} are cleared.
+
+		{lnum} is used like with |getline()|.
+		When {lnum} is just below the last line the {text} will be
+		added below the last line.
+		{text} can be any type or a List of any type, each item is
+		converted to a String.
+
+		If this succeeds, FALSE is returned.  If this fails (most likely
+		because {lnum} is invalid) TRUE is returned.
+		In |Vim9| script an error is given if {lnum} is invalid.
+
+		Example: >
+			:call setline(5, strftime("%c"))
+
+<		When {text} is a |List| then line {lnum} and following lines
+		will be set to the items in the list.  Example: >
+			:call setline(5, ['aaa', 'bbb', 'ccc'])
+<		This is equivalent to: >
+			:for [n, l] in [[5, 'aaa'], [6, 'bbb'], [7, 'ccc']]
+			:  call setline(n, l)
+			:endfor
+
+<		Note: The '[ and '] marks are not set.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
+		second argument: >
+			GetText()->setline(lnum)
+
+setloclist({nr}, {list} [, {action} [, {what}]])		*setloclist()*
+		Create or replace or add to the location list for window {nr}.
+		{nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
+		When {nr} is zero the current window is used.
+
+		For a location list window, the displayed location list is
+		modified.  For an invalid window number {nr}, -1 is returned.
+		Otherwise, same as |setqflist()|.
+		Also see |location-list|.
+
+		For {action} see |setqflist-action|.
+
+		If the optional {what} dictionary argument is supplied, then
+		only the items listed in {what} are set. Refer to |setqflist()|
+		for the list of supported keys in {what}.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
+		second argument: >
+			GetLoclist()->setloclist(winnr)
+
+setmatches({list} [, {win}])				*setmatches()*
+		Restores a list of matches saved by |getmatches()| for the
+		current window.  Returns 0 if successful, otherwise -1.  All
+		current matches are cleared before the list is restored.  See
+		example for |getmatches()|.
+		If {win} is specified, use the window with this number or
+		window ID instead of the current window.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetMatches()->setmatches()
+<
+							*setpos()*
+setpos({expr}, {list})
+		Set the position for String {expr}.  Possible values:
+			.	the cursor
+			'x	mark x
+
+		{list} must be a |List| with four or five numbers:
+		    [bufnum, lnum, col, off]
+		    [bufnum, lnum, col, off, curswant]
+
+		"bufnum" is the buffer number.  Zero can be used for the
+		current buffer.  When setting an uppercase mark "bufnum" is
+		used for the mark position.  For other marks it specifies the
+		buffer to set the mark in.  You can use the |bufnr()| function
+		to turn a file name into a buffer number.
+		For setting the cursor and the ' mark "bufnum" is ignored,
+		since these are associated with a window, not a buffer.
+		Does not change the jumplist.
+
+		"lnum" and "col" are the position in the buffer.  The first
+		column is 1.  Use a zero "lnum" to delete a mark.  If "col" is
+		smaller than 1 then 1 is used. To use the character count
+		instead of the byte count, use |setcharpos()|.
+
+		The "off" number is only used when 'virtualedit' is set. Then
+		it is the offset in screen columns from the start of the
+		character.  E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last
+		character.
+
+		The "curswant" number is only used when setting the cursor
+		position.  It sets the preferred column for when moving the
+		cursor vertically.  When the "curswant" number is missing the
+		preferred column is not set.  When it is present and setting a
+		mark position it is not used.
+
+		Note that for '< and '> changing the line number may result in
+		the marks to be effectively be swapped, so that '< is always
+		before '>.
+
+		Returns 0 when the position could be set, -1 otherwise.
+		An error message is given if {expr} is invalid.
+
+		Also see |setcharpos()|, |getpos()| and |getcurpos()|.
+
+		This does not restore the preferred column for moving
+		vertically; if you set the cursor position with this, |j| and
+		|k| motions will jump to previous columns!  Use |cursor()| to
+		also set the preferred column.  Also see the "curswant" key in
+		|winrestview()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetPosition()->setpos('.')
+
+setqflist({list} [, {action} [, {what}]])		*setqflist()*
+		Create or replace or add to the quickfix list.
+
+		If the optional {what} dictionary argument is supplied, then
+		only the items listed in {what} are set. The first {list}
+		argument is ignored.  See below for the supported items in
+		{what}.
+							*setqflist-what*
+		When {what} is not present, the items in {list} are used.  Each
+		item must be a dictionary.  Non-dictionary items in {list} are
+		ignored.  Each dictionary item can contain the following
+		entries:
+
+		    bufnr	buffer number; must be the number of a valid
+				buffer
+		    filename	name of a file; only used when "bufnr" is not
+				present or it is invalid.
+		    module	name of a module; if given it will be used in
+				quickfix error window instead of the filename.
+		    lnum	line number in the file
+		    pattern	search pattern used to locate the error
+		    col		column number
+		    vcol	when non-zero: "col" is visual column
+				when zero: "col" is byte index
+		    nr		error number
+		    text	description of the error
+		    type	single-character error type, 'E', 'W', etc.
+		    valid	recognized error message
+
+		The "col", "vcol", "nr", "type" and "text" entries are
+		optional.  Either "lnum" or "pattern" entry can be used to
+		locate a matching error line.
+		If the "filename" and "bufnr" entries are not present or
+		neither the "lnum" or "pattern" entries are present, then the
+		item will not be handled as an error line.
+		If both "pattern" and "lnum" are present then "pattern" will
+		be used.
+		If the "valid" entry is not supplied, then the valid flag is
+		set when "bufnr" is a valid buffer or "filename" exists.
+		If you supply an empty {list}, the quickfix list will be
+		cleared.
+		Note that the list is not exactly the same as what
+		|getqflist()| returns.
+
+		{action} values:		*setqflist-action* *E927*
+		'a'	The items from {list} are added to the existing
+			quickfix list. If there is no existing list, then a
+			new list is created.
+
+		'r'	The items from the current quickfix list are replaced
+			with the items from {list}.  This can also be used to
+			clear the list: >
+				:call setqflist([], 'r')
+<
+		'f'	All the quickfix lists in the quickfix stack are
+			freed.
+
+		If {action} is not present or is set to ' ', then a new list
+		is created. The new quickfix list is added after the current
+		quickfix list in the stack and all the following lists are
+		freed. To add a new quickfix list at the end of the stack,
+		set "nr" in {what} to "$".
+
+		The following items can be specified in dictionary {what}:
+		    context	quickfix list context. See |quickfix-context|
+		    efm		errorformat to use when parsing text from
+				"lines". If this is not present, then the
+				'errorformat' option value is used.
+				See |quickfix-parse|
+		    id		quickfix list identifier |quickfix-ID|
+		    idx		index of the current entry in the quickfix
+				list specified by 'id' or 'nr'. If set to '$',
+				then the last entry in the list is set as the
+				current entry.  See |quickfix-index|
+		    items	list of quickfix entries. Same as the {list}
+				argument.
+		    lines	use 'errorformat' to parse a list of lines and
+				add the resulting entries to the quickfix list
+				{nr} or {id}.  Only a |List| value is supported.
+				See |quickfix-parse|
+		    nr		list number in the quickfix stack; zero
+				means the current quickfix list and "$" means
+				the last quickfix list.
+		    quickfixtextfunc
+				function to get the text to display in the
+				quickfix window.  The value can be the name of
+				a function or a funcref or a lambda.  Refer to
+				|quickfix-window-function| for an explanation
+				of how to write the function and an example.
+		    title	quickfix list title text. See |quickfix-title|
+		Unsupported keys in {what} are ignored.
+		If the "nr" item is not present, then the current quickfix list
+		is modified. When creating a new quickfix list, "nr" can be
+		set to a value one greater than the quickfix stack size.
+		When modifying a quickfix list, to guarantee that the correct
+		list is modified, "id" should be used instead of "nr" to
+		specify the list.
+
+		Examples (See also |setqflist-examples|): >
+		   :call setqflist([], 'r', {'title': 'My search'})
+		   :call setqflist([], 'r', {'nr': 2, 'title': 'Errors'})
+		   :call setqflist([], 'a', {'id':qfid, 'lines':["F1:10:L10"]})
+<
+		Returns zero for success, -1 for failure.
+
+		This function can be used to create a quickfix list
+		independent of the 'errorformat' setting.  Use a command like
+		`:cc 1` to jump to the first position.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
+		second argument: >
+			GetErrorlist()->setqflist()
+<
+							*setreg()*
+setreg({regname}, {value} [, {options}])
+		Set the register {regname} to {value}.
+		If {regname} is "" or "@", the unnamed register '"' is used.
+		The {regname} argument is a string.  In |Vim9-script|
+		{regname} must be one character.
+
+		{value} may be any value returned by |getreg()| or
+		|getreginfo()|, including a |List| or |Dict|.
+		If {options} contains "a" or {regname} is upper case,
+		then the value is appended.
+
+		{options} can also contain a register type specification:
+		    "c" or "v"	      |characterwise| mode
+		    "l" or "V"	      |linewise| mode
+		    "b" or "<CTRL-V>" |blockwise-visual| mode
+		If a number immediately follows "b" or "<CTRL-V>" then this is
+		used as the width of the selection - if it is not specified
+		then the width of the block is set to the number of characters
+		in the longest line (counting a <Tab> as 1 character).
+
+		If {options} contains no register settings, then the default
+		is to use character mode unless {value} ends in a <NL> for
+		string {value} and linewise mode for list {value}. Blockwise
+		mode is never selected automatically.
+		Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure.
+
+							*E883*
+		Note: you may not use |List| containing more than one item to
+		      set search and expression registers. Lists containing no
+		      items act like empty strings.
+
+		Examples: >
+			:call setreg(v:register, @*)
+			:call setreg('*', @%, 'ac')
+			:call setreg('a', "1\n2\n3", 'b5')
+			:call setreg('"', { 'points_to': 'a'})
+
+<		This example shows using the functions to save and restore a
+		register: >
+			:let var_a = getreginfo()
+			:call setreg('a', var_a)
+<		or: >
+			:let var_a = getreg('a', 1, 1)
+			:let var_amode = getregtype('a')
+			    ....
+			:call setreg('a', var_a, var_amode)
+<		Note: you may not reliably restore register value
+		without using the third argument to |getreg()| as without it
+		newlines are represented as newlines AND Nul bytes are
+		represented as newlines as well, see |NL-used-for-Nul|.
+
+		You can also change the type of a register by appending
+		nothing: >
+			:call setreg('a', '', 'al')
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
+		second argument: >
+			GetText()->setreg('a')
+
+settabvar({tabnr}, {varname}, {val})			*settabvar()*
+		Set tab-local variable {varname} to {val} in tab page {tabnr}.
+		|t:var|
+		The {varname} argument is a string.
+		Note that autocommands are blocked, side effects may not be
+		triggered, e.g. when setting 'filetype'.
+		Note that the variable name without "t:" must be used.
+		Tabs are numbered starting with one.
+		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
+		third argument: >
+			GetValue()->settabvar(tab, name)
+
+settabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}, {val})	*settabwinvar()*
+		Set option or local variable {varname} in window {winnr} to
+		{val}.
+		Tabs are numbered starting with one.  For the current tabpage
+		use |setwinvar()|.
+		{winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
+		When {winnr} is zero the current window is used.
+		Note that autocommands are blocked, side effects may not be
+		triggered, e.g. when setting 'filetype' or 'syntax'.
+		This also works for a global or local buffer option, but it
+		doesn't work for a global or local buffer variable.
+		For a local buffer option the global value is unchanged.
+		Note that the variable name without "w:" must be used.
+		Examples: >
+			:call settabwinvar(1, 1, "&list", 0)
+			:call settabwinvar(3, 2, "myvar", "foobar")
+<		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
+		fourth argument: >
+			GetValue()->settabwinvar(tab, winnr, name)
+
+settagstack({nr}, {dict} [, {action}])			*settagstack()*
+		Modify the tag stack of the window {nr} using {dict}.
+		{nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
+
+		For a list of supported items in {dict}, refer to
+		|gettagstack()|. "curidx" takes effect before changing the tag
+		stack.
+							*E962*
+		How the tag stack is modified depends on the {action}
+		argument:
+		- If {action} is not present or is set to 'r', then the tag
+		  stack is replaced.
+		- If {action} is set to 'a', then new entries from {dict} are
+		  pushed (added) onto the tag stack.
+		- If {action} is set to 't', then all the entries from the
+		  current entry in the tag stack or "curidx" in {dict} are
+		  removed and then new entries are pushed to the stack.
+
+		The current index is set to one after the length of the tag
+		stack after the modification.
+
+		Returns zero for success, -1 for failure.
+
+		Examples (for more examples see |tagstack-examples|):
+		    Empty the tag stack of window 3: >
+			call settagstack(3, {'items' : []})
+
+<		    Save and restore the tag stack: >
+			let stack = gettagstack(1003)
+			" do something else
+			call settagstack(1003, stack)
+			unlet stack
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
+		second argument: >
+			GetStack()->settagstack(winnr)
+
+setwinvar({winnr}, {varname}, {val})			*setwinvar()*
+		Like |settabwinvar()| for the current tab page.
+		Examples: >
+			:call setwinvar(1, "&list", 0)
+			:call setwinvar(2, "myvar", "foobar")
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
+		third argument: >
+			GetValue()->setwinvar(winnr, name)
+
+sha256({string})						*sha256()*
+		Returns a String with 64 hex characters, which is the SHA256
+		checksum of {string}.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetText()->sha256()
+
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+cryptv| feature}
+
+shellescape({string} [, {special}])			*shellescape()*
+		Escape {string} for use as a shell command argument.
+		When the 'shell' contains powershell (MS-Windows) or pwsh
+		(MS-Windows, Linux, and MacOS) then it will enclose {string}
+		in single quotes and will double up all internal single
+		quotes.
+		On MS-Windows, when 'shellslash' is not set, it will enclose
+		{string} in double quotes and double all double quotes within
+		{string}.
+		Otherwise it will enclose {string} in single quotes and
+		replace all "'" with "'\''".
+
+		When the {special} argument is present and it's a non-zero
+		Number or a non-empty String (|non-zero-arg|), then special
+		items such as "!", "%", "#" and "<cword>" will be preceded by
+		a backslash.  This backslash will be removed again by the |:!|
+		command.
+
+		The "!" character will be escaped (again with a |non-zero-arg|
+		{special}) when 'shell' contains "csh" in the tail.  That is
+		because for csh and tcsh "!" is used for history replacement
+		even when inside single quotes.
+
+		With a |non-zero-arg| {special} the <NL> character is also
+		escaped.  When 'shell' containing "csh" in the tail it's
+		escaped a second time.
+
+		The "\" character will be escaped when 'shell' contains "fish"
+		in the tail. That is because for fish "\" is used as an escape
+		character inside single quotes.
+
+		Example of use with a |:!| command: >
+		    :exe '!dir ' . shellescape(expand('<cfile>'), 1)
+<		This results in a directory listing for the file under the
+		cursor.  Example of use with |system()|: >
+		    :call system("chmod +w -- " . shellescape(expand("%")))
+<		See also |::S|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetCommand()->shellescape()
+
+shiftwidth([{col}])						*shiftwidth()*
+		Returns the effective value of 'shiftwidth'. This is the
+		'shiftwidth' value unless it is zero, in which case it is the
+		'tabstop' value.  This function was introduced with patch
+		7.3.694 in 2012, everybody should have it by now (however it
+		did not allow for the optional {col} argument until 8.1.542).
+
+		When there is one argument {col} this is used as column number
+		for which to return the 'shiftwidth' value. This matters for the
+		'vartabstop' feature. If the 'vartabstop' setting is enabled and
+		no {col} argument is given, column 1 will be assumed.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetColumn()->shiftwidth()
+
+sign_ functions are documented here: |sign-functions-details|
+
+
+simplify({filename})					*simplify()*
+		Simplify the file name as much as possible without changing
+		the meaning.  Shortcuts (on MS-Windows) or symbolic links (on
+		Unix) are not resolved.  If the first path component in
+		{filename} designates the current directory, this will be
+		valid for the result as well.  A trailing path separator is
+		not removed either. On Unix "//path" is unchanged, but
+		"///path" is simplified to "/path" (this follows the Posix
+		standard).
+		Example: >
+			simplify("./dir/.././/file/") == "./file/"
+<		Note: The combination "dir/.." is only removed if "dir" is
+		a searchable directory or does not exist.  On Unix, it is also
+		removed when "dir" is a symbolic link within the same
+		directory.  In order to resolve all the involved symbolic
+		links before simplifying the path name, use |resolve()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetName()->simplify()
+
+sin({expr})						*sin()*
+		Return the sine of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float|.
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo sin(100)
+<			-0.506366 >
+			:echo sin(-4.01)
+<			0.763301
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->sin()
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+sinh({expr})						*sinh()*
+		Return the hyperbolic sine of {expr} as a |Float| in the range
+		[-inf, inf].
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo sinh(0.5)
+<			0.521095 >
+			:echo sinh(-0.9)
+<			-1.026517
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->sinh()
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+slice({expr}, {start} [, {end}])			*slice()*
+		Similar to using a |slice| "expr[start : end]", but "end" is
+		used exclusive.  And for a string the indexes are used as
+		character indexes instead of byte indexes, like in
+		|vim9script|.  Also, composing characters are not counted.
+		When {end} is omitted the slice continues to the last item.
+		When {end} is -1 the last item is omitted.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetList()->slice(offset)
+
+
+sort({list} [, {func} [, {dict}]])			*sort()* *E702*
+		Sort the items in {list} in-place.  Returns {list}.
+
+		If you want a list to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
+			:let sortedlist = sort(copy(mylist))
+
+<		When {func} is omitted, is empty or zero, then sort() uses the
+		string representation of each item to sort on.  Numbers sort
+		after Strings, |Lists| after Numbers.  For sorting text in the
+		current buffer use |:sort|.
+
+		When {func} is given and it is '1' or 'i' then case is
+		ignored.
+
+		When {func} is given and it is 'l' then the current collation
+		locale is used for ordering. Implementation details: strcoll()
+		is used to compare strings. See |:language| check or set the
+		collation locale. |v:collate| can also be used to check the
+		current locale. Sorting using the locale typically ignores
+		case. Example: >
+			" ö is sorted similarly to o with English locale.
+			:language collate en_US.UTF8
+			:echo sort(['n', 'o', 'O', 'ö', 'p', 'z'], 'l')
+<			['n', 'o', 'O', 'ö', 'p', 'z'] ~
+>
+			" ö is sorted after z with Swedish locale.
+			:language collate sv_SE.UTF8
+			:echo sort(['n', 'o', 'O', 'ö', 'p', 'z'], 'l')
+<			['n', 'o', 'O', 'p', 'z', 'ö'] ~
+		This does not work properly on Mac.
+
+		When {func} is given and it is 'n' then all items will be
+		sorted numerical (Implementation detail: this uses the
+		strtod() function to parse numbers, Strings, Lists, Dicts and
+		Funcrefs will be considered as being 0).
+
+		When {func} is given and it is 'N' then all items will be
+		sorted numerical. This is like 'n' but a string containing
+		digits will be used as the number they represent.
+
+		When {func} is given and it is 'f' then all items will be
+		sorted numerical. All values must be a Number or a Float.
+
+		When {func} is a |Funcref| or a function name, this function
+		is called to compare items.  The function is invoked with two
+		items as argument and must return zero if they are equal, 1 or
+		bigger if the first one sorts after the second one, -1 or
+		smaller if the first one sorts before the second one.
+
+		{dict} is for functions with the "dict" attribute.  It will be
+		used to set the local variable "self". |Dictionary-function|
+
+		The sort is stable, items which compare equal (as number or as
+		string) will keep their relative position. E.g., when sorting
+		on numbers, text strings will sort next to each other, in the
+		same order as they were originally.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mylist->sort()
+
+<		Also see |uniq()|.
+
+		Example: >
+			func MyCompare(i1, i2)
+			   return a:i1 == a:i2 ? 0 : a:i1 > a:i2 ? 1 : -1
+			endfunc
+			eval mylist->sort("MyCompare")
+<		A shorter compare version for this specific simple case, which
+		ignores overflow: >
+			func MyCompare(i1, i2)
+			   return a:i1 - a:i2
+			endfunc
+<		For a simple expression you can use a lambda: >
+			eval mylist->sort({i1, i2 -> i1 - i2})
+<
+sound_clear()						*sound_clear()*
+		Stop playing all sounds.
+
+		On some Linux systems you may need the libcanberra-pulse
+		package, otherwise sound may not stop.
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+sound| feature}
+
+							*sound_playevent()*
+sound_playevent({name} [, {callback}])
+		Play a sound identified by {name}.  Which event names are
+		supported depends on the system.  Often the XDG sound names
+		are used.  On Ubuntu they may be found in
+		/usr/share/sounds/freedesktop/stereo.  Example: >
+			call sound_playevent('bell')
+<		On MS-Windows, {name} can be SystemAsterisk, SystemDefault,
+		SystemExclamation, SystemExit, SystemHand, SystemQuestion,
+		SystemStart, SystemWelcome, etc.
+
+		When {callback} is specified it is invoked when the sound is
+		finished.  The first argument is the sound ID, the second
+		argument is the status:
+			0	sound was played to the end
+			1	sound was interrupted
+			2	error occurred after sound started
+		Example: >
+		   func Callback(id, status)
+		     echomsg "sound " .. a:id .. " finished with " .. a:status
+		   endfunc
+		   call sound_playevent('bell', 'Callback')
+
+<		MS-Windows: {callback} doesn't work for this function.
+
+		Returns the sound ID, which can be passed to `sound_stop()`.
+		Returns zero if the sound could not be played.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetSoundName()->sound_playevent()
+
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+sound| feature}
+
+							*sound_playfile()*
+sound_playfile({path} [, {callback}])
+		Like `sound_playevent()` but play sound file {path}.  {path}
+		must be a full path.  On Ubuntu you may find files to play
+		with this command: >
+		    :!find /usr/share/sounds -type f | grep -v index.theme
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetSoundPath()->sound_playfile()
+
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+sound| feature}
+
+
+sound_stop({id})					*sound_stop()*
+		Stop playing sound {id}.  {id} must be previously returned by
+		`sound_playevent()` or `sound_playfile()`.
+
+		On some Linux systems you may need the libcanberra-pulse
+		package, otherwise sound may not stop.
+
+		On MS-Windows, this does not work for event sound started by
+		`sound_playevent()`. To stop event sounds, use `sound_clear()`.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			soundid->sound_stop()
+
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+sound| feature}
+
+							*soundfold()*
+soundfold({word})
+		Return the sound-folded equivalent of {word}.  Uses the first
+		language in 'spelllang' for the current window that supports
+		soundfolding.  'spell' must be set.  When no sound folding is
+		possible the {word} is returned unmodified.
+		This can be used for making spelling suggestions.  Note that
+		the method can be quite slow.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetWord()->soundfold()
+<
+							*spellbadword()*
+spellbadword([{sentence}])
+		Without argument: The result is the badly spelled word under
+		or after the cursor.  The cursor is moved to the start of the
+		bad word.  When no bad word is found in the cursor line the
+		result is an empty string and the cursor doesn't move.
+
+		With argument: The result is the first word in {sentence} that
+		is badly spelled.  If there are no spelling mistakes the
+		result is an empty string.
+
+		The return value is a list with two items:
+		- The badly spelled word or an empty string.
+		- The type of the spelling error:
+			"bad"		spelling mistake
+			"rare"		rare word
+			"local"		word only valid in another region
+			"caps"		word should start with Capital
+		Example: >
+			echo spellbadword("the quik brown fox")
+<			['quik', 'bad'] ~
+
+		The spelling information for the current window and the value
+		of 'spelllang' are used.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetText()->spellbadword()
+<
+							*spellsuggest()*
+spellsuggest({word} [, {max} [, {capital}]])
+		Return a |List| with spelling suggestions to replace {word}.
+		When {max} is given up to this number of suggestions are
+		returned.  Otherwise up to 25 suggestions are returned.
+
+		When the {capital} argument is given and it's non-zero only
+		suggestions with a leading capital will be given.  Use this
+		after a match with 'spellcapcheck'.
+
+		{word} can be a badly spelled word followed by other text.
+		This allows for joining two words that were split.  The
+		suggestions also include the following text, thus you can
+		replace a line.
+
+		{word} may also be a good word.  Similar words will then be
+		returned.  {word} itself is not included in the suggestions,
+		although it may appear capitalized.
+
+		The spelling information for the current window is used.  The
+		values of 'spelllang' and 'spellsuggest' are used.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetWord()->spellsuggest()
+
+split({string} [, {pattern} [, {keepempty}]])			*split()*
+		Make a |List| out of {string}.  When {pattern} is omitted or
+		empty each white-separated sequence of characters becomes an
+		item.
+		Otherwise the string is split where {pattern} matches,
+		removing the matched characters. 'ignorecase' is not used
+		here, add \c to ignore case. |/\c|
+		When the first or last item is empty it is omitted, unless the
+		{keepempty} argument is given and it's non-zero.
+		Other empty items are kept when {pattern} matches at least one
+		character or when {keepempty} is non-zero.
+		Example: >
+			:let words = split(getline('.'), '\W\+')
+<		To split a string in individual characters: >
+			:for c in split(mystring, '\zs')
+<		If you want to keep the separator you can also use '\zs' at
+		the end of the pattern: >
+			:echo split('abc:def:ghi', ':\zs')
+<			['abc:', 'def:', 'ghi'] ~
+		Splitting a table where the first element can be empty: >
+			:let items = split(line, ':', 1)
+<		The opposite function is |join()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetString()->split()
+
+sqrt({expr})						*sqrt()*
+		Return the non-negative square root of Float {expr} as a
+		|Float|.
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.  When {expr}
+		is negative the result is NaN (Not a Number).
+		Examples: >
+			:echo sqrt(100)
+<			10.0 >
+			:echo sqrt(-4.01)
+<			nan
+		"nan" may be different, it depends on system libraries.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->sqrt()
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+srand([{expr}])						*srand()*
+		Initialize seed used by |rand()|:
+		- If {expr} is not given, seed values are initialized by
+		  reading from /dev/urandom, if possible, or using time(NULL)
+		  a.k.a. epoch time otherwise; this only has second accuracy.
+		- If {expr} is given it must be a Number.  It is used to
+		  initialize the seed values.  This is useful for testing or
+		  when a predictable sequence is intended.
+
+		Examples: >
+			:let seed = srand()
+			:let seed = srand(userinput)
+			:echo rand(seed)
+
+state([{what}])						*state()*
+		Return a string which contains characters indicating the
+		current state.  Mostly useful in callbacks that want to do
+		work that may not always be safe.  Roughly this works like:
+		- callback uses state() to check if work is safe to do.
+		  Yes: then do it right away.
+		  No:  add to work queue and add a |SafeState| and/or
+		       |SafeStateAgain| autocommand (|SafeState| triggers at
+		       toplevel, |SafeStateAgain| triggers after handling
+		       messages and callbacks).
+		- When SafeState or SafeStateAgain is triggered and executes
+		  your autocommand, check with `state()` if the work can be
+		  done now, and if yes remove it from the queue and execute.
+		  Remove the autocommand if the queue is now empty.
+		Also see |mode()|.
+
+		When {what} is given only characters in this string will be
+		added.  E.g, this checks if the screen has scrolled: >
+			if state('s') == ''
+			   " screen has not scrolled
+<
+		These characters indicate the state, generally indicating that
+		something is busy:
+		    m	halfway a mapping, :normal command, feedkeys() or
+			stuffed command
+		    o	operator pending, e.g. after |d|
+		    a	Insert mode autocomplete active
+		    x	executing an autocommand
+		    w	blocked on waiting, e.g. ch_evalexpr(), ch_read() and
+			ch_readraw() when reading json
+		    S	not triggering SafeState or SafeStateAgain, e.g. after
+			|f| or a count
+		    c	callback invoked, including timer (repeats for
+			recursiveness up to "ccc")
+		    s	screen has scrolled for messages
+
+str2float({string} [, {quoted}])				*str2float()*
+		Convert String {string} to a Float.  This mostly works the
+		same as when using a floating point number in an expression,
+		see |floating-point-format|.  But it's a bit more permissive.
+		E.g., "1e40" is accepted, while in an expression you need to
+		write "1.0e40".  The hexadecimal form "0x123" is also
+		accepted, but not others, like binary or octal.
+		When {quoted} is present and non-zero then embedded single
+		quotes before the dot are ignored, thus "1'000.0" is a
+		thousand.
+		Text after the number is silently ignored.
+		The decimal point is always '.', no matter what the locale is
+		set to.  A comma ends the number: "12,345.67" is converted to
+		12.0.  You can strip out thousands separators with
+		|substitute()|: >
+			let f = str2float(substitute(text, ',', '', 'g'))
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			let f = text->substitute(',', '', 'g')->str2float()
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+str2list({string} [, {utf8}])					*str2list()*
+		Return a list containing the number values which represent
+		each character in String {string}.  Examples: >
+			str2list(" ")		returns [32]
+			str2list("ABC")		returns [65, 66, 67]
+<		|list2str()| does the opposite.
+
+		When {utf8} is omitted or zero, the current 'encoding' is used.
+		When {utf8} is TRUE, always treat the String as UTF-8
+		characters.  With UTF-8 composing characters are handled
+		properly: >
+			str2list("á")		returns [97, 769]
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetString()->str2list()
+
+
+str2nr({string} [, {base} [, {quoted}]])			*str2nr()*
+		Convert string {string} to a number.
+		{base} is the conversion base, it can be 2, 8, 10 or 16.
+		When {quoted} is present and non-zero then embedded single
+		quotes are ignored, thus "1'000'000" is a million.
+
+		When {base} is omitted base 10 is used.  This also means that
+		a leading zero doesn't cause octal conversion to be used, as
+		with the default String to Number conversion.  Example: >
+			let nr = str2nr('0123')
+<
+		When {base} is 16 a leading "0x" or "0X" is ignored.  With a
+		different base the result will be zero.  Similarly, when
+		{base} is 8 a leading "0", "0o" or "0O" is ignored, and when
+		{base} is 2 a leading "0b" or "0B" is ignored.
+		Text after the number is silently ignored.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetText()->str2nr()
+
+
+strcharlen({string})					*strcharlen()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the number of characters
+		in String {string}.  Composing characters are ignored.
+		|strchars()| can count the number of characters, counting
+		composing characters separately.
+
+		Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strwidth()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetText()->strcharlen()
+
+
+strcharpart({src}, {start} [, {len} [, {skipcc}]])		*strcharpart()*
+		Like |strpart()| but using character index and length instead
+		of byte index and length.
+		When {skipcc} is omitted or zero, composing characters are
+		counted separately.
+		When {skipcc} set to 1, Composing characters are ignored,
+		similar to  |slice()|.
+		When a character index is used where a character does not
+		exist it is omitted and counted as one character.  For
+		example: >
+			strcharpart('abc', -1, 2)
+<		results in 'a'.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetText()->strcharpart(5)
+
+
+strchars({string} [, {skipcc}])					*strchars()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the number of characters
+		in String {string}.
+		When {skipcc} is omitted or zero, composing characters are
+		counted separately.
+		When {skipcc} set to 1, Composing characters are ignored.
+		|strcharlen()| always does this.
+
+		Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strwidth()|.
+
+		{skipcc} is only available after 7.4.755.  For backward
+		compatibility, you can define a wrapper function: >
+		    if has("patch-7.4.755")
+		      function s:strchars(str, skipcc)
+			return strchars(a:str, a:skipcc)
+		      endfunction
+		    else
+		      function s:strchars(str, skipcc)
+			if a:skipcc
+			  return strlen(substitute(a:str, ".", "x", "g"))
+			else
+			  return strchars(a:str)
+			endif
+		      endfunction
+		    endif
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetText()->strchars()
+
+strdisplaywidth({string} [, {col}])			*strdisplaywidth()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the number of display cells
+		String {string} occupies on the screen when it starts at {col}
+		(first column is zero).  When {col} is omitted zero is used.
+		Otherwise it is the screen column where to start.  This
+		matters for Tab characters.
+		The option settings of the current window are used.  This
+		matters for anything that's displayed differently, such as
+		'tabstop' and 'display'.
+		When {string} contains characters with East Asian Width Class
+		Ambiguous, this function's return value depends on 'ambiwidth'.
+		Also see |strlen()|, |strwidth()| and |strchars()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetText()->strdisplaywidth()
+
+strftime({format} [, {time}])				*strftime()*
+		The result is a String, which is a formatted date and time, as
+		specified by the {format} string.  The given {time} is used,
+		or the current time if no time is given.  The accepted
+		{format} depends on your system, thus this is not portable!
+		See the manual page of the C function strftime() for the
+		format.  The maximum length of the result is 80 characters.
+		See also |localtime()|, |getftime()| and |strptime()|.
+		The language can be changed with the |:language| command.
+		Examples: >
+		  :echo strftime("%c")		   Sun Apr 27 11:49:23 1997
+		  :echo strftime("%Y %b %d %X")	   1997 Apr 27 11:53:25
+		  :echo strftime("%y%m%d %T")	   970427 11:53:55
+		  :echo strftime("%H:%M")	   11:55
+		  :echo strftime("%c", getftime("file.c"))
+						   Show mod time of file.c.
+<		Not available on all systems.  To check use: >
+			:if exists("*strftime")
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetFormat()->strftime()
+
+strgetchar({str}, {index})				*strgetchar()*
+		Get character {index} from {str}.  This uses a character
+		index, not a byte index.  Composing characters are considered
+		separate characters here.
+		Also see |strcharpart()| and |strchars()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetText()->strgetchar(5)
+
+stridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}])		*stridx()*
+		The result is a Number, which gives the byte index in
+		{haystack} of the first occurrence of the String {needle}.
+		If {start} is specified, the search starts at index {start}.
+		This can be used to find a second match: >
+			:let colon1 = stridx(line, ":")
+			:let colon2 = stridx(line, ":", colon1 + 1)
+<		The search is done case-sensitive.
+		For pattern searches use |match()|.
+		-1 is returned if the {needle} does not occur in {haystack}.
+		See also |strridx()|.
+		Examples: >
+		  :echo stridx("An Example", "Example")	     3
+		  :echo stridx("Starting point", "Start")    0
+		  :echo stridx("Starting point", "start")   -1
+<						*strstr()* *strchr()*
+		stridx() works similar to the C function strstr().  When used
+		with a single character it works similar to strchr().
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetHaystack()->stridx(needle)
+<
+							*string()*
+string({expr})	Return {expr} converted to a String.  If {expr} is a Number,
+		Float, String, Blob or a composition of them, then the result
+		can be parsed back with |eval()|.
+			{expr} type	result ~
+			String		'string' (single quotes are doubled)
+			Number		123
+			Float		123.123456 or 1.123456e8
+			Funcref		function('name')
+			Blob		0z00112233.44556677.8899
+			List		[item, item]
+			Dictionary	{key: value, key: value}
+
+		When a |List| or |Dictionary| has a recursive reference it is
+		replaced by "[...]" or "{...}".  Using eval() on the result
+		will then fail.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mylist->string()
+
+<		Also see |strtrans()|.
+
+
+strlen({string})						*strlen()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the length of the String
+		{string} in bytes.
+		If the argument is a Number it is first converted to a String.
+		For other types an error is given.
+		If you want to count the number of multibyte characters use
+		|strchars()|.
+		Also see |len()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strwidth()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetString()->strlen()
+
+strpart({src}, {start} [, {len} [, {chars}]])			*strpart()*
+		The result is a String, which is part of {src}, starting from
+		byte {start}, with the byte length {len}.
+		When {chars} is present and TRUE then {len} is the number of
+		characters positions (composing characters are not counted
+		separately, thus "1" means one base character and any
+		following composing characters).
+		To count {start} as characters instead of bytes use
+		|strcharpart()|.
+
+		When bytes are selected which do not exist, this doesn't
+		result in an error, the bytes are simply omitted.
+		If {len} is missing, the copy continues from {start} till the
+		end of the {src}. >
+			strpart("abcdefg", 3, 2)    == "de"
+			strpart("abcdefg", -2, 4)   == "ab"
+			strpart("abcdefg", 5, 4)    == "fg"
+			strpart("abcdefg", 3)	    == "defg"
+
+<		Note: To get the first character, {start} must be 0.  For
+		example, to get the character under the cursor: >
+			strpart(getline("."), col(".") - 1, 1, v:true)
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetText()->strpart(5)
+
+strptime({format}, {timestring})				*strptime()*
+		The result is a Number, which is a unix timestamp representing
+		the date and time in {timestring}, which is expected to match
+		the format specified in {format}.
+
+		The accepted {format} depends on your system, thus this is not
+		portable!  See the manual page of the C function strptime()
+		for the format.  Especially avoid "%c".  The value of $TZ also
+		matters.
+
+		If the {timestring} cannot be parsed with {format} zero is
+		returned.  If you do not know the format of {timestring} you
+		can try different {format} values until you get a non-zero
+		result.
+
+		See also |strftime()|.
+		Examples: >
+		  :echo strptime("%Y %b %d %X", "1997 Apr 27 11:49:23")
+<		  862156163 >
+		  :echo strftime("%c", strptime("%y%m%d %T", "970427 11:53:55"))
+<		  Sun Apr 27 11:53:55 1997 >
+		  :echo strftime("%c", strptime("%Y%m%d%H%M%S", "19970427115355") + 3600)
+<		  Sun Apr 27 12:53:55 1997
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetFormat()->strptime(timestring)
+<
+		Not available on all systems.  To check use: >
+			:if exists("*strptime")
+
+strridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}])			*strridx()*
+		The result is a Number, which gives the byte index in
+		{haystack} of the last occurrence of the String {needle}.
+		When {start} is specified, matches beyond this index are
+		ignored.  This can be used to find a match before a previous
+		match: >
+			:let lastcomma = strridx(line, ",")
+			:let comma2 = strridx(line, ",", lastcomma - 1)
+<		The search is done case-sensitive.
+		For pattern searches use |match()|.
+		-1 is returned if the {needle} does not occur in {haystack}.
+		If the {needle} is empty the length of {haystack} is returned.
+		See also |stridx()|.  Examples: >
+		  :echo strridx("an angry armadillo", "an")	     3
+<							*strrchr()*
+		When used with a single character it works similar to the C
+		function strrchr().
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetHaystack()->strridx(needle)
+
+strtrans({string})					*strtrans()*
+		The result is a String, which is {string} with all unprintable
+		characters translated into printable characters |'isprint'|.
+		Like they are shown in a window.  Example: >
+			echo strtrans(@a)
+<		This displays a newline in register a as "^@" instead of
+		starting a new line.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetString()->strtrans()
+
+strwidth({string})					*strwidth()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the number of display cells
+		String {string} occupies.  A Tab character is counted as one
+		cell, alternatively use |strdisplaywidth()|.
+		When {string} contains characters with East Asian Width Class
+		Ambiguous, this function's return value depends on 'ambiwidth'.
+		Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strchars()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetString()->strwidth()
+
+submatch({nr} [, {list}])			*submatch()* *E935*
+		Only for an expression in a |:substitute| command or
+		substitute() function.
+		Returns the {nr}'th submatch of the matched text.  When {nr}
+		is 0 the whole matched text is returned.
+		Note that a NL in the string can stand for a line break of a
+		multi-line match or a NUL character in the text.
+		Also see |sub-replace-expression|.
+
+		If {list} is present and non-zero then submatch() returns
+		a list of strings, similar to |getline()| with two arguments.
+		NL characters in the text represent NUL characters in the
+		text.
+		Only returns more than one item for |:substitute|, inside
+		|substitute()| this list will always contain one or zero
+		items, since there are no real line breaks.
+
+		When substitute() is used recursively only the submatches in
+		the current (deepest) call can be obtained.
+
+		Examples: >
+			:s/\d\+/\=submatch(0) + 1/
+			:echo substitute(text, '\d\+', '\=submatch(0) + 1', '')
+<		This finds the first number in the line and adds one to it.
+		A line break is included as a newline character.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetNr()->submatch()
+
+substitute({string}, {pat}, {sub}, {flags})		*substitute()*
+		The result is a String, which is a copy of {string}, in which
+		the first match of {pat} is replaced with {sub}.
+		When {flags} is "g", all matches of {pat} in {string} are
+		replaced.  Otherwise {flags} should be "".
+
+		This works like the ":substitute" command (without any flags).
+		But the matching with {pat} is always done like the 'magic'
+		option is set and 'cpoptions' is empty (to make scripts
+		portable).  'ignorecase' is still relevant, use |/\c| or |/\C|
+		if you want to ignore or match case and ignore 'ignorecase'.
+		'smartcase' is not used.  See |string-match| for how {pat} is
+		used.
+
+		A "~" in {sub} is not replaced with the previous {sub}.
+		Note that some codes in {sub} have a special meaning
+		|sub-replace-special|.  For example, to replace something with
+		"\n" (two characters), use "\\\\n" or '\\n'.
+
+		When {pat} does not match in {string}, {string} is returned
+		unmodified.
+
+		Example: >
+		   :let &path = substitute(&path, ",\\=[^,]*$", "", "")
+<		This removes the last component of the 'path' option. >
+		   :echo substitute("testing", ".*", "\\U\\0", "")
+<		results in "TESTING".
+
+		When {sub} starts with "\=", the remainder is interpreted as
+		an expression. See |sub-replace-expression|.  Example: >
+		   :echo substitute(s, '%\(\x\x\)',
+			   \ '\=nr2char("0x" . submatch(1))', 'g')
+
+<		When {sub} is a Funcref that function is called, with one
+		optional argument.  Example: >
+		   :echo substitute(s, '%\(\x\x\)', SubNr, 'g')
+<		The optional argument is a list which contains the whole
+		matched string and up to nine submatches, like what
+		|submatch()| returns.  Example: >
+		   :echo substitute(s, '%\(\x\x\)', {m -> '0x' . m[1]}, 'g')
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetString()->substitute(pat, sub, flags)
+
+swapinfo({fname})					*swapinfo()*
+		The result is a dictionary, which holds information about the
+		swapfile {fname}. The available fields are:
+			version Vim version
+			user	user name
+			host	host name
+			fname	original file name
+			pid	PID of the Vim process that created the swap
+				file
+			mtime	last modification time in seconds
+			inode	Optional: INODE number of the file
+			dirty	1 if file was modified, 0 if not
+		Note that "user" and "host" are truncated to at most 39 bytes.
+		In case of failure an "error" item is added with the reason:
+			Cannot open file: file not found or in accessible
+			Cannot read file: cannot read first block
+			Not a swap file: does not contain correct block ID
+			Magic number mismatch: Info in first block is invalid
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetFilename()->swapinfo()
+
+swapname({buf})						*swapname()*
+		The result is the swap file path of the buffer {expr}.
+		For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above.
+		If buffer {buf} is the current buffer, the result is equal to
+		|:swapname| (unless there is no swap file).
+		If buffer {buf} has no swap file, returns an empty string.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetBufname()->swapname()
+
+synID({lnum}, {col}, {trans})				*synID()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the syntax ID at the position
+		{lnum} and {col} in the current window.
+		The syntax ID can be used with |synIDattr()| and
+		|synIDtrans()| to obtain syntax information about text.
+
+		{col} is 1 for the leftmost column, {lnum} is 1 for the first
+		line.  'synmaxcol' applies, in a longer line zero is returned.
+		Note that when the position is after the last character,
+		that's where the cursor can be in Insert mode, synID() returns
+		zero.  {lnum} is used like with |getline()|.
+
+		When {trans} is |TRUE|, transparent items are reduced to the
+		item that they reveal.  This is useful when wanting to know
+		the effective color.  When {trans} is |FALSE|, the transparent
+		item is returned.  This is useful when wanting to know which
+		syntax item is effective (e.g. inside parens).
+		Warning: This function can be very slow.  Best speed is
+		obtained by going through the file in forward direction.
+
+		Example (echoes the name of the syntax item under the cursor): >
+			:echo synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."), 1), "name")
+<
+
+synIDattr({synID}, {what} [, {mode}])			*synIDattr()*
+		The result is a String, which is the {what} attribute of
+		syntax ID {synID}.  This can be used to obtain information
+		about a syntax item.
+		{mode} can be "gui", "cterm" or "term", to get the attributes
+		for that mode.  When {mode} is omitted, or an invalid value is
+		used, the attributes for the currently active highlighting are
+		used (GUI, cterm or term).
+		Use synIDtrans() to follow linked highlight groups.
+		{what}		result
+		"name"		the name of the syntax item
+		"fg"		foreground color (GUI: color name used to set
+				the color, cterm: color number as a string,
+				term: empty string)
+		"bg"		background color (as with "fg")
+		"font"		font name (only available in the GUI)
+				|highlight-font|
+		"sp"		special color for the GUI (as with "fg")
+				|highlight-guisp|
+		"ul"		underline color for cterm: number as a string
+		"fg#"		like "fg", but for the GUI and the GUI is
+				running the name in "#RRGGBB" form
+		"bg#"		like "fg#" for "bg"
+		"sp#"		like "fg#" for "sp"
+		"bold"		"1" if bold
+		"italic"	"1" if italic
+		"reverse"	"1" if reverse
+		"inverse"	"1" if inverse (= reverse)
+		"standout"	"1" if standout
+		"underline"	"1" if underlined
+		"undercurl"	"1" if undercurled
+		"strike"	"1" if strikethrough
+
+		Example (echoes the color of the syntax item under the
+		cursor): >
+	:echo synIDattr(synIDtrans(synID(line("."), col("."), 1)), "fg")
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+	:echo synID(line("."), col("."), 1)->synIDtrans()->synIDattr("fg")
+
+
+synIDtrans({synID})					*synIDtrans()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the translated syntax ID of
+		{synID}.  This is the syntax group ID of what is being used to
+		highlight the character.  Highlight links given with
+		":highlight link" are followed.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+	:echo synID(line("."), col("."), 1)->synIDtrans()->synIDattr("fg")
+
+synconcealed({lnum}, {col})				*synconcealed()*
+		The result is a |List| with currently three items:
+		1. The first item in the list is 0 if the character at the
+		   position {lnum} and {col} is not part of a concealable
+		   region, 1 if it is.  {lnum} is used like with |getline()|.
+		2. The second item in the list is a string. If the first item
+		   is 1, the second item contains the text which will be
+		   displayed in place of the concealed text, depending on the
+		   current setting of 'conceallevel' and 'listchars'.
+		3. The third and final item in the list is a number
+		   representing the specific syntax region matched in the
+		   line. When the character is not concealed the value is
+		   zero. This allows detection of the beginning of a new
+		   concealable region if there are two consecutive regions
+		   with the same replacement character.  For an example, if
+		   the text is "123456" and both "23" and "45" are concealed
+		   and replaced by the character "X", then:
+			call			returns ~
+			synconcealed(lnum, 1)   [0, '', 0]
+			synconcealed(lnum, 2)   [1, 'X', 1]
+			synconcealed(lnum, 3)   [1, 'X', 1]
+			synconcealed(lnum, 4)   [1, 'X', 2]
+			synconcealed(lnum, 5)   [1, 'X', 2]
+			synconcealed(lnum, 6)   [0, '', 0]
+
+
+synstack({lnum}, {col})					*synstack()*
+		Return a |List|, which is the stack of syntax items at the
+		position {lnum} and {col} in the current window.  {lnum} is
+		used like with |getline()|.  Each item in the List is an ID
+		like what |synID()| returns.
+		The first item in the List is the outer region, following are
+		items contained in that one.  The last one is what |synID()|
+		returns, unless not the whole item is highlighted or it is a
+		transparent item.
+		This function is useful for debugging a syntax file.
+		Example that shows the syntax stack under the cursor: >
+			for id in synstack(line("."), col("."))
+			   echo synIDattr(id, "name")
+			endfor
+<		When the position specified with {lnum} and {col} is invalid
+		nothing is returned.  The position just after the last
+		character in a line and the first column in an empty line are
+		valid positions.
+
+system({expr} [, {input}])				*system()* *E677*
+		Get the output of the shell command {expr} as a |String|.  See
+		|systemlist()| to get the output as a |List|.
+
+		When {input} is given and is a |String| this string is written
+		to a file and passed as stdin to the command.  The string is
+		written as-is, you need to take care of using the correct line
+		separators yourself.
+		If {input} is given and is a |List| it is written to the file
+		in a way |writefile()| does with {binary} set to "b" (i.e.
+		with a newline between each list item with newlines inside
+		list items converted to NULs).
+		When {input} is given and is a number that is a valid id for
+		an existing buffer then the content of the buffer is written
+		to the file line by line, each line terminated by a NL and
+		NULs characters where the text has a NL.
+
+		Pipes are not used, the 'shelltemp' option is not used.
+
+		When prepended by |:silent| the terminal will not be set to
+		cooked mode.  This is meant to be used for commands that do
+		not need the user to type.  It avoids stray characters showing
+		up on the screen which require |CTRL-L| to remove. >
+			:silent let f = system('ls *.vim')
+<
+		Note: Use |shellescape()| or |::S| with |expand()| or
+		|fnamemodify()| to escape special characters in a command
+		argument.  Newlines in {expr} may cause the command to fail.
+		The characters in 'shellquote' and 'shellxquote' may also
+		cause trouble.
+		This is not to be used for interactive commands.
+
+		The result is a String.  Example: >
+		    :let files = system("ls " .  shellescape(expand('%:h')))
+		    :let files = system('ls ' . expand('%:h:S'))
+
+<		To make the result more system-independent, the shell output
+		is filtered to replace <CR> with <NL> for Macintosh, and
+		<CR><NL> with <NL> for DOS-like systems.
+		To avoid the string being truncated at a NUL, all NUL
+		characters are replaced with SOH (0x01).
+
+		The command executed is constructed using several options:
+	'shell' 'shellcmdflag' 'shellxquote' {expr} 'shellredir' {tmp} 'shellxquote'
+		({tmp} is an automatically generated file name).
+		For Unix, braces are put around {expr} to allow for
+		concatenated commands.
+
+		The command will be executed in "cooked" mode, so that a
+		CTRL-C will interrupt the command (on Unix at least).
+
+		The resulting error code can be found in |v:shell_error|.
+		This function will fail in |restricted-mode|.
+
+		Note that any wrong value in the options mentioned above may
+		make the function fail.  It has also been reported to fail
+		when using a security agent application.
+		Unlike ":!cmd" there is no automatic check for changed files.
+		Use |:checktime| to force a check.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			:echo GetCmd()->system()
+
+
+systemlist({expr} [, {input}])				*systemlist()*
+		Same as |system()|, but returns a |List| with lines (parts of
+		output separated by NL) with NULs transformed into NLs. Output
+		is the same as |readfile()| will output with {binary} argument
+		set to "b", except that there is no extra empty item when the
+		result ends in a NL.
+		Note that on MS-Windows you may get trailing CR characters.
+
+		To see the difference between "echo hello" and "echo -n hello"
+		use |system()| and |split()|: >
+			echo system('echo hello')->split('\n', 1)
+<
+		Returns an empty string on error.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			:echo GetCmd()->systemlist()
+
+
+tabpagebuflist([{arg}])					*tabpagebuflist()*
+		The result is a |List|, where each item is the number of the
+		buffer associated with each window in the current tab page.
+		{arg} specifies the number of the tab page to be used. When
+		omitted the current tab page is used.
+		When {arg} is invalid the number zero is returned.
+		To get a list of all buffers in all tabs use this: >
+			let buflist = []
+			for i in range(tabpagenr('$'))
+			   call extend(buflist, tabpagebuflist(i + 1))
+			endfor
+<		Note that a buffer may appear in more than one window.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetTabpage()->tabpagebuflist()
+
+tabpagenr([{arg}])					*tabpagenr()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the number of the current
+		tab page.  The first tab page has number 1.
+
+		The optional argument {arg} supports the following values:
+			$	the number of the last tab page (the tab page
+				count).
+			#	the number of the last accessed tab page
+				(where |g<Tab>| goes to). if there is no
+				previous tab page 0 is returned.
+		The number can be used with the |:tab| command.
+
+
+tabpagewinnr({tabarg} [, {arg}])			*tabpagewinnr()*
+		Like |winnr()| but for tab page {tabarg}.
+		{tabarg} specifies the number of tab page to be used.
+		{arg} is used like with |winnr()|:
+		- When omitted the current window number is returned.  This is
+		  the window which will be used when going to this tab page.
+		- When "$" the number of windows is returned.
+		- When "#" the previous window nr is returned.
+		Useful examples: >
+		    tabpagewinnr(1)	    " current window of tab page 1
+		    tabpagewinnr(4, '$')    " number of windows in tab page 4
+<		When {tabarg} is invalid zero is returned.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetTabpage()->tabpagewinnr()
+<
+							*tagfiles()*
+tagfiles()	Returns a |List| with the file names used to search for tags
+		for the current buffer.  This is the 'tags' option expanded.
+
+
+taglist({expr} [, {filename}])				*taglist()*
+		Returns a |List| of tags matching the regular expression {expr}.
+
+		If {filename} is passed it is used to prioritize the results
+		in the same way that |:tselect| does. See |tag-priority|.
+		{filename} should be the full path of the file.
+
+		Each list item is a dictionary with at least the following
+		entries:
+			name		Name of the tag.
+			filename	Name of the file where the tag is
+					defined.  It is either relative to the
+					current directory or a full path.
+			cmd		Ex command used to locate the tag in
+					the file.
+			kind		Type of the tag.  The value for this
+					entry depends on the language specific
+					kind values.  Only available when
+					using a tags file generated by
+					Exuberant ctags or hdrtag.
+			static		A file specific tag.  Refer to
+					|static-tag| for more information.
+		More entries may be present, depending on the content of the
+		tags file: access, implementation, inherits and signature.
+		Refer to the ctags documentation for information about these
+		fields.  For C code the fields "struct", "class" and "enum"
+		may appear, they give the name of the entity the tag is
+		contained in.
+
+		The ex-command "cmd" can be either an ex search pattern, a
+		line number or a line number followed by a byte number.
+
+		If there are no matching tags, then an empty list is returned.
+
+		To get an exact tag match, the anchors '^' and '$' should be
+		used in {expr}.  This also make the function work faster.
+		Refer to |tag-regexp| for more information about the tag
+		search regular expression pattern.
+
+		Refer to |'tags'| for information about how the tags file is
+		located by Vim. Refer to |tags-file-format| for the format of
+		the tags file generated by the different ctags tools.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetTagpattern()->taglist()
+
+tan({expr})						*tan()*
+		Return the tangent of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float|
+		in the range [-inf, inf].
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo tan(10)
+<			0.648361 >
+			:echo tan(-4.01)
+<			-1.181502
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->tan()
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+tanh({expr})						*tanh()*
+		Return the hyperbolic tangent of {expr} as a |Float| in the
+		range [-1, 1].
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo tanh(0.5)
+<			0.462117 >
+			:echo tanh(-1)
+<			-0.761594
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->tanh()
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+tempname()					*tempname()* *temp-file-name*
+		The result is a String, which is the name of a file that
+		doesn't exist.  It can be used for a temporary file.  The name
+		is different for at least 26 consecutive calls.  Example: >
+			:let tmpfile = tempname()
+			:exe "redir > " . tmpfile
+<		For Unix, the file will be in a private directory |tempfile|.
+		For MS-Windows forward slashes are used when the 'shellslash'
+		option is set, or when 'shellcmdflag' starts with '-' and
+		'shell' does not contain powershell or pwsh.
+
+
+term_ functions are documented here: |terminal-function-details|
+
+
+terminalprops()						*terminalprops()*
+		Returns a |Dictionary| with properties of the terminal that Vim
+		detected from the response to |t_RV| request.  See
+		|v:termresponse| for the response itself.  If |v:termresponse|
+		is empty most values here will be 'u' for unknown.
+		   cursor_style		whether sending |t_RS| works  **
+		   cursor_blink_mode	whether sending |t_RC| works  **
+		   underline_rgb	whether |t_8u| works **
+		   mouse		mouse type supported
+
+		** value 'u' for unknown, 'y' for yes, 'n' for no
+
+		If the |+termresponse| feature is missing then the result is
+		an empty dictionary.
+
+		If "cursor_style" is 'y' then |t_RS| will be sent to request the
+		current cursor style.
+		If "cursor_blink_mode" is 'y' then |t_RC| will be sent to
+		request the cursor blink status.
+		"cursor_style" and "cursor_blink_mode" are also set if |t_u7|
+		is not empty, Vim will detect the working of sending |t_RS|
+		and |t_RC| on startup.
+
+		When "underline_rgb" is not 'y', then |t_8u| will be made empty.
+		This avoids sending it to xterm, which would clear the colors.
+
+		For "mouse" the value 'u' is unknown
+
+		Also see:
+		- 'ambiwidth' - detected by using |t_u7|.
+		- |v:termstyleresp| and |v:termblinkresp| for the response to
+		  |t_RS| and |t_RC|.
+
+
+test_ functions are documented here: |test-functions-details|
+
+
+							*timer_info()*
+timer_info([{id}])
+		Return a list with information about timers.
+		When {id} is given only information about this timer is
+		returned.  When timer {id} does not exist an empty list is
+		returned.
+		When {id} is omitted information about all timers is returned.
+
+		For each timer the information is stored in a |Dictionary| with
+		these items:
+		    "id"	    the timer ID
+		    "time"	    time the timer was started with
+		    "remaining"	    time until the timer fires
+		    "repeat"	    number of times the timer will still fire;
+				    -1 means forever
+		    "callback"	    the callback
+		    "paused"	    1 if the timer is paused, 0 otherwise
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetTimer()->timer_info()
+
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature}
+
+timer_pause({timer}, {paused})				*timer_pause()*
+		Pause or unpause a timer.  A paused timer does not invoke its
+		callback when its time expires.  Unpausing a timer may cause
+		the callback to be invoked almost immediately if enough time
+		has passed.
+
+		Pausing a timer is useful to avoid the callback to be called
+		for a short time.
+
+		If {paused} evaluates to a non-zero Number or a non-empty
+		String, then the timer is paused, otherwise it is unpaused.
+		See |non-zero-arg|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetTimer()->timer_pause(1)
+
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature}
+
+						*timer_start()* *timer* *timers*
+timer_start({time}, {callback} [, {options}])
+		Create a timer and return the timer ID.
+
+		{time} is the waiting time in milliseconds. This is the
+		minimum time before invoking the callback.  When the system is
+		busy or Vim is not waiting for input the time will be longer.
+
+		{callback} is the function to call.  It can be the name of a
+		function or a |Funcref|.  It is called with one argument, which
+		is the timer ID.  The callback is only invoked when Vim is
+		waiting for input.
+		If you want to show a message look at |popup_notification()|
+		to avoid interfering with what the user is doing.
+
+		{options} is a dictionary.  Supported entries:
+		   "repeat"	Number of times to repeat calling the
+				callback.  -1 means forever.  When not present
+				the callback will be called once.
+				If the timer causes an error three times in a
+				row the repeat is cancelled.  This avoids that
+				Vim becomes unusable because of all the error
+				messages.
+
+		Example: >
+			func MyHandler(timer)
+			  echo 'Handler called'
+			endfunc
+			let timer = timer_start(500, 'MyHandler',
+				\ {'repeat': 3})
+<		This will invoke MyHandler() three times at 500 msec
+		intervals.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetMsec()->timer_start(callback)
+
+<		Not available in the |sandbox|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature}
+
+timer_stop({timer})					*timer_stop()*
+		Stop a timer.  The timer callback will no longer be invoked.
+		{timer} is an ID returned by timer_start(), thus it must be a
+		Number.  If {timer} does not exist there is no error.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetTimer()->timer_stop()
+
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature}
+
+timer_stopall()						*timer_stopall()*
+		Stop all timers.  The timer callbacks will no longer be
+		invoked.  Useful if a timer is misbehaving.  If there are no
+		timers there is no error.
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature}
+
+tolower({expr})						*tolower()*
+		The result is a copy of the String given, with all uppercase
+		characters turned into lowercase (just like applying |gu| to
+		the string).
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetText()->tolower()
+
+toupper({expr})						*toupper()*
+		The result is a copy of the String given, with all lowercase
+		characters turned into uppercase (just like applying |gU| to
+		the string).
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetText()->toupper()
+
+tr({src}, {fromstr}, {tostr})				*tr()*
+		The result is a copy of the {src} string with all characters
+		which appear in {fromstr} replaced by the character in that
+		position in the {tostr} string.  Thus the first character in
+		{fromstr} is translated into the first character in {tostr}
+		and so on.  Exactly like the unix "tr" command.
+		This code also deals with multibyte characters properly.
+
+		Examples: >
+			echo tr("hello there", "ht", "HT")
+<		returns "Hello THere" >
+			echo tr("<blob>", "<>", "{}")
+<		returns "{blob}"
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetText()->tr(from, to)
+
+trim({text} [, {mask} [, {dir}]])				*trim()*
+		Return {text} as a String where any character in {mask} is
+		removed from the beginning and/or end of {text}.
+
+		If {mask} is not given, {mask} is all characters up to 0x20,
+		which includes Tab, space, NL and CR, plus the non-breaking
+		space character 0xa0.
+
+		The optional {dir} argument specifies where to remove the
+		characters:
+			0	remove from the beginning and end of {text}
+			1	remove only at the beginning of {text}
+			2	remove only at the end of {text}
+		When omitted both ends are trimmed.
+
+		This function deals with multibyte characters properly.
+
+		Examples: >
+			echo trim("   some text ")
+<		returns "some text" >
+			echo trim("  \r\t\t\r RESERVE \t\n\x0B\xA0") . "_TAIL"
+<		returns "RESERVE_TAIL" >
+			echo trim("rm<Xrm<>X>rrm", "rm<>")
+<		returns "Xrm<>X" (characters in the middle are not removed) >
+			echo trim("  vim  ", " ", 2)
+<		returns "  vim"
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetText()->trim()
+
+trunc({expr})							*trunc()*
+		Return the largest integral value with magnitude less than or
+		equal to {expr} as a |Float| (truncate towards zero).
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			echo trunc(1.456)
+<			1.0  >
+			echo trunc(-5.456)
+<			-5.0  >
+			echo trunc(4.0)
+<			4.0
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			Compute()->trunc()
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+							*type()*
+type({expr})	The result is a Number representing the type of {expr}.
+		Instead of using the number directly, it is better to use the
+		v:t_ variable that has the value:
+			Number:	    0  |v:t_number|
+			String:	    1  |v:t_string|
+			Funcref:    2  |v:t_func|
+			List:	    3  |v:t_list|
+			Dictionary: 4  |v:t_dict|
+			Float:	    5  |v:t_float|
+			Boolean:    6  |v:t_bool| (v:false and v:true)
+			None:	    7  |v:t_none| (v:null and v:none)
+			Job:	    8  |v:t_job|
+			Channel:    9  |v:t_channel|
+			Blob:	   10  |v:t_blob|
+		For backward compatibility, this method can be used: >
+			:if type(myvar) == type(0)
+			:if type(myvar) == type("")
+			:if type(myvar) == type(function("tr"))
+			:if type(myvar) == type([])
+			:if type(myvar) == type({})
+			:if type(myvar) == type(0.0)
+			:if type(myvar) == type(v:false)
+			:if type(myvar) == type(v:none)
+<		To check if the v:t_ variables exist use this: >
+			:if exists('v:t_number')
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mylist->type()
+
+
+typename({expr})					*typename()*
+		Return a string representation of the type of {expr}.
+		Example: >
+			echo typename([1, 2, 3])
+			list<number>
+
+
+undofile({name})					*undofile()*
+		Return the name of the undo file that would be used for a file
+		with name {name} when writing.  This uses the 'undodir'
+		option, finding directories that exist.  It does not check if
+		the undo file exists.
+		{name} is always expanded to the full path, since that is what
+		is used internally.
+		If {name} is empty undofile() returns an empty string, since a
+		buffer without a file name will not write an undo file.
+		Useful in combination with |:wundo| and |:rundo|.
+		When compiled without the |+persistent_undo| option this always
+		returns an empty string.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetFilename()->undofile()
+
+undotree()						*undotree()*
+		Return the current state of the undo tree in a dictionary with
+		the following items:
+		  "seq_last"	The highest undo sequence number used.
+		  "seq_cur"	The sequence number of the current position in
+				the undo tree.  This differs from "seq_last"
+				when some changes were undone.
+		  "time_cur"	Time last used for |:earlier| and related
+				commands.  Use |strftime()| to convert to
+				something readable.
+		  "save_last"	Number of the last file write.  Zero when no
+				write yet.
+		  "save_cur"	Number of the current position in the undo
+				tree.
+		  "synced"	Non-zero when the last undo block was synced.
+				This happens when waiting from input from the
+				user.  See |undo-blocks|.
+		  "entries"	A list of dictionaries with information about
+				undo blocks.
+
+		The first item in the "entries" list is the oldest undo item.
+		Each List item is a |Dictionary| with these items:
+		  "seq"		Undo sequence number.  Same as what appears in
+				|:undolist|.
+		  "time"	Timestamp when the change happened.  Use
+				|strftime()| to convert to something readable.
+		  "newhead"	Only appears in the item that is the last one
+				that was added.  This marks the last change
+				and where further changes will be added.
+		  "curhead"	Only appears in the item that is the last one
+				that was undone.  This marks the current
+				position in the undo tree, the block that will
+				be used by a redo command.  When nothing was
+				undone after the last change this item will
+				not appear anywhere.
+		  "save"	Only appears on the last block before a file
+				write.  The number is the write count.  The
+				first write has number 1, the last one the
+				"save_last" mentioned above.
+		  "alt"		Alternate entry.  This is again a List of undo
+				blocks.  Each item may again have an "alt"
+				item.
+
+uniq({list} [, {func} [, {dict}]])			*uniq()* *E882*
+		Remove second and succeeding copies of repeated adjacent
+		{list} items in-place.  Returns {list}.  If you want a list
+		to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
+			:let newlist = uniq(copy(mylist))
+<		The default compare function uses the string representation of
+		each item.  For the use of {func} and {dict} see |sort()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mylist->uniq()
+
+values({dict})						*values()*
+		Return a |List| with all the values of {dict}.  The |List| is
+		in arbitrary order.  Also see |items()| and |keys()|.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			mydict->values()
+
+virtcol({expr})						*virtcol()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the screen column of the file
+		position given with {expr}.  That is, the last screen position
+		occupied by the character at that position, when the screen
+		would be of unlimited width.  When there is a <Tab> at the
+		position, the returned Number will be the column at the end of
+		the <Tab>.  For example, for a <Tab> in column 1, with 'ts'
+		set to 8, it returns 8. |conceal| is ignored.
+		For the byte position use |col()|.
+		For the use of {expr} see |col()|.
+		When 'virtualedit' is used {expr} can be [lnum, col, off], where
+		"off" is the offset in screen columns from the start of the
+		character.  E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last
+		character.  When "off" is omitted zero is used.
+		When Virtual editing is active in the current mode, a position
+		beyond the end of the line can be returned. |'virtualedit'|
+		The accepted positions are:
+		    .	    the cursor position
+		    $	    the end of the cursor line (the result is the
+			    number of displayed characters in the cursor line
+			    plus one)
+		    'x	    position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is
+			    returned)
+		    v       In Visual mode: the start of the Visual area (the
+			    cursor is the end).  When not in Visual mode
+			    returns the cursor position.  Differs from |'<| in
+			    that it's updated right away.
+		Note that only marks in the current file can be used.
+		Examples: >
+  virtcol(".")	   with text "foo^Lbar", with cursor on the "^L", returns 5
+  virtcol("$")	   with text "foo^Lbar", returns 9
+  virtcol("'t")    with text "	  there", with 't at 'h', returns 6
+<		The first column is 1.  0 is returned for an error.
+		A more advanced example that echoes the maximum length of
+		all lines: >
+		    echo max(map(range(1, line('$')), "virtcol([v:val, '$'])"))
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetPos()->virtcol()
+
+
+visualmode([{expr}])						*visualmode()*
+		The result is a String, which describes the last Visual mode
+		used in the current buffer.  Initially it returns an empty
+		string, but once Visual mode has been used, it returns "v",
+		"V", or "<CTRL-V>" (a single CTRL-V character) for
+		character-wise, line-wise, or block-wise Visual mode
+		respectively.
+		Example: >
+			:exe "normal " . visualmode()
+<		This enters the same Visual mode as before.  It is also useful
+		in scripts if you wish to act differently depending on the
+		Visual mode that was used.
+		If Visual mode is active, use |mode()| to get the Visual mode
+		(e.g., in a |:vmap|).
+		If {expr} is supplied and it evaluates to a non-zero Number or
+		a non-empty String, then the Visual mode will be cleared and
+		the old value is returned.  See |non-zero-arg|.
+
+wildmenumode()					*wildmenumode()*
+		Returns |TRUE| when the wildmenu is active and |FALSE|
+		otherwise.  See 'wildmenu' and 'wildmode'.
+		This can be used in mappings to handle the 'wildcharm' option
+		gracefully. (Makes only sense with |mapmode-c| mappings).
+
+		For example to make <c-j> work like <down> in wildmode, use: >
+    :cnoremap <expr> <C-j> wildmenumode() ? "\<Down>\<Tab>" : "\<c-j>"
+<
+		(Note, this needs the 'wildcharm' option set appropriately).
+
+win_execute({id}, {command} [, {silent}])		*win_execute()*
+		Like `execute()` but in the context of window {id}.
+		The window will temporarily be made the current window,
+		without triggering autocommands or changing directory.  When
+		executing {command} autocommands will be triggered, this may
+		have unexpected side effects.  Use |:noautocmd| if needed.
+		Example: >
+			call win_execute(winid, 'set syntax=python')
+<		Doing the same with `setwinvar()` would not trigger
+		autocommands and not actually show syntax highlighting.
+
+							*E994*
+		Not all commands are allowed in popup windows.
+		When window {id} does not exist then no error is given and
+		an empty string is returned.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the
+		second argument: >
+			GetCommand()->win_execute(winid)
+
+win_findbuf({bufnr})					*win_findbuf()*
+		Returns a |List| with |window-ID|s for windows that contain
+		buffer {bufnr}.  When there is none the list is empty.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetBufnr()->win_findbuf()
+
+win_getid([{win} [, {tab}]])				*win_getid()*
+		Get the |window-ID| for the specified window.
+		When {win} is missing use the current window.
+		With {win} this is the window number.  The top window has
+		number 1.
+		Without {tab} use the current tab, otherwise the tab with
+		number {tab}.  The first tab has number one.
+		Return zero if the window cannot be found.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetWinnr()->win_getid()
+
+
+win_gettype([{nr}])					*win_gettype()*
+		Return the type of the window:
+			"autocmd"	autocommand window. Temporary window
+					used to execute autocommands.
+			"command"	command-line window |cmdwin|
+			(empty)		normal window
+			"loclist"	|location-list-window|
+			"popup"		popup window |popup|
+			"preview"	preview window |preview-window|
+			"quickfix"	|quickfix-window|
+			"unknown"	window {nr} not found
+
+		When {nr} is omitted return the type of the current window.
+		When {nr} is given return the type of this window by number or
+		|window-ID|.
+
+		Also see the 'buftype' option.  When running a terminal in a
+		popup window then 'buftype' is "terminal" and win_gettype()
+		returns "popup".
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetWinid()->win_gettype()
+<
+win_gotoid({expr})					*win_gotoid()*
+		Go to window with ID {expr}.  This may also change the current
+		tabpage.
+		Return TRUE if successful, FALSE if the window cannot be found.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetWinid()->win_gotoid()
+
+win_id2tabwin({expr})					*win_id2tabwin()*
+		Return a list with the tab number and window number of window
+		with ID {expr}: [tabnr, winnr].
+		Return [0, 0] if the window cannot be found.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetWinid()->win_id2tabwin()
+
+win_id2win({expr})					*win_id2win()*
+		Return the window number of window with ID {expr}.
+		Return 0 if the window cannot be found in the current tabpage.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetWinid()->win_id2win()
+
+win_screenpos({nr})					*win_screenpos()*
+		Return the screen position of window {nr} as a list with two
+		numbers: [row, col].  The first window always has position
+		[1, 1], unless there is a tabline, then it is [2, 1].
+		{nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.  Use zero
+		for the current window.
+		Returns [0, 0] if the window cannot be found in the current
+		tabpage.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetWinid()->win_screenpos()
+<
+win_splitmove({nr}, {target} [, {options}])		*win_splitmove()*
+		Move the window {nr} to a new split of the window {target}.
+		This is similar to moving to {target}, creating a new window
+		using |:split| but having the same contents as window {nr}, and
+		then closing {nr}.
+
+		Both {nr} and {target} can be window numbers or |window-ID|s.
+		Both must be in the current tab page.
+
+		Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure.
+
+		{options} is a |Dictionary| with the following optional entries:
+		  "vertical"	When TRUE, the split is created vertically,
+				like with |:vsplit|.
+		  "rightbelow"	When TRUE, the split is made below or to the
+				right (if vertical).  When FALSE, it is done
+				above or to the left (if vertical).  When not
+				present, the values of 'splitbelow' and
+				'splitright' are used.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetWinid()->win_splitmove(target)
+<
+
+							*winbufnr()*
+winbufnr({nr})	The result is a Number, which is the number of the buffer
+		associated with window {nr}.  {nr} can be the window number or
+		the |window-ID|.
+		When {nr} is zero, the number of the buffer in the current
+		window is returned.
+		When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned.
+		Example: >
+  :echo "The file in the current window is " . bufname(winbufnr(0))
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			FindWindow()->winbufnr()->bufname()
+<
+							*wincol()*
+wincol()	The result is a Number, which is the virtual column of the
+		cursor in the window.  This is counting screen cells from the
+		left side of the window.  The leftmost column is one.
+
+							*windowsversion()*
+windowsversion()
+		The result is a String.  For MS-Windows it indicates the OS
+		version.  E.g, Windows 10 is "10.0", Windows 8 is "6.2",
+		Windows XP is "5.1".  For non-MS-Windows systems the result is
+		an empty string.
+
+winheight({nr})						*winheight()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the height of window {nr}.
+		{nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
+		When {nr} is zero, the height of the current window is
+		returned.  When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned.
+		An existing window always has a height of zero or more.
+		This excludes any window toolbar line.
+		Examples: >
+  :echo "The current window has " . winheight(0) . " lines."
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetWinid()->winheight()
+<
+winlayout([{tabnr}])					*winlayout()*
+		The result is a nested List containing the layout of windows
+		in a tabpage.
+
+		Without {tabnr} use the current tabpage, otherwise the tabpage
+		with number {tabnr}. If the tabpage {tabnr} is not found,
+		returns an empty list.
+
+		For a leaf window, it returns:
+			['leaf', {winid}]
+		For horizontally split windows, which form a column, it
+		returns:
+			['col', [{nested list of windows}]]
+		For vertically split windows, which form a row, it returns:
+			['row', [{nested list of windows}]]
+
+		Example: >
+			" Only one window in the tab page
+			:echo winlayout()
+			['leaf', 1000]
+			" Two horizontally split windows
+			:echo winlayout()
+			['col', [['leaf', 1000], ['leaf', 1001]]]
+			" The second tab page, with three horizontally split
+			" windows, with two vertically split windows in the
+			" middle window
+			:echo winlayout(2)
+			['col', [['leaf', 1002], ['row', [['leaf', 1003],
+					    ['leaf', 1001]]], ['leaf', 1000]]]
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetTabnr()->winlayout()
+<
+							*winline()*
+winline()	The result is a Number, which is the screen line of the cursor
+		in the window.  This is counting screen lines from the top of
+		the window.  The first line is one.
+		If the cursor was moved the view on the file will be updated
+		first, this may cause a scroll.
+
+							*winnr()*
+winnr([{arg}])	The result is a Number, which is the number of the current
+		window.  The top window has number 1.
+		Returns zero for a popup window.
+
+		The optional argument {arg} supports the following values:
+			$	the number of the last window (the window
+				count).
+			#	the number of the last accessed window (where
+				|CTRL-W_p| goes to).  If there is no previous
+				window or it is in another tab page 0 is
+				returned.
+			{N}j	the number of the Nth window below the
+				current window (where |CTRL-W_j| goes to).
+			{N}k	the number of the Nth window above the current
+				window (where |CTRL-W_k| goes to).
+			{N}h	the number of the Nth window left of the
+				current window (where |CTRL-W_h| goes to).
+			{N}l	the number of the Nth window right of the
+				current window (where |CTRL-W_l| goes to).
+		The number can be used with |CTRL-W_w| and ":wincmd w"
+		|:wincmd|.
+		Also see |tabpagewinnr()| and |win_getid()|.
+		Examples: >
+			let window_count = winnr('$')
+			let prev_window = winnr('#')
+			let wnum = winnr('3k')
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetWinval()->winnr()
+<
+							*winrestcmd()*
+winrestcmd()	Returns a sequence of |:resize| commands that should restore
+		the current window sizes.  Only works properly when no windows
+		are opened or closed and the current window and tab page is
+		unchanged.
+		Example: >
+			:let cmd = winrestcmd()
+			:call MessWithWindowSizes()
+			:exe cmd
+<
+							*winrestview()*
+winrestview({dict})
+		Uses the |Dictionary| returned by |winsaveview()| to restore
+		the view of the current window.
+		Note: The {dict} does not have to contain all values, that are
+		returned by |winsaveview()|. If values are missing, those
+		settings won't be restored. So you can use: >
+		    :call winrestview({'curswant': 4})
+<
+		This will only set the curswant value (the column the cursor
+		wants to move on vertical movements) of the cursor to column 5
+		(yes, that is 5), while all other settings will remain the
+		same. This is useful, if you set the cursor position manually.
+
+		If you have changed the values the result is unpredictable.
+		If the window size changed the result won't be the same.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetView()->winrestview()
+<
+							*winsaveview()*
+winsaveview()	Returns a |Dictionary| that contains information to restore
+		the view of the current window.  Use |winrestview()| to
+		restore the view.
+		This is useful if you have a mapping that jumps around in the
+		buffer and you want to go back to the original view.
+		This does not save fold information.  Use the 'foldenable'
+		option to temporarily switch off folding, so that folds are
+		not opened when moving around. This may have side effects.
+		The return value includes:
+			lnum		cursor line number
+			col		cursor column (Note: the first column
+					zero, as opposed to what getpos()
+					returns)
+			coladd		cursor column offset for 'virtualedit'
+			curswant	column for vertical movement
+			topline		first line in the window
+			topfill		filler lines, only in diff mode
+			leftcol		first column displayed; only used when
+					'wrap' is off
+			skipcol		columns skipped
+		Note that no option values are saved.
+
+
+winwidth({nr})						*winwidth()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the width of window {nr}.
+		{nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
+		When {nr} is zero, the width of the current window is
+		returned.  When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned.
+		An existing window always has a width of zero or more.
+		Examples: >
+  :echo "The current window has " . winwidth(0) . " columns."
+  :if winwidth(0) <= 50
+  :  50 wincmd |
+  :endif
+<		For getting the terminal or screen size, see the 'columns'
+		option.
+
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetWinid()->winwidth()
+
+
+wordcount()						*wordcount()*
+		The result is a dictionary of byte/chars/word statistics for
+		the current buffer.  This is the same info as provided by
+		|g_CTRL-G|
+		The return value includes:
+			bytes		Number of bytes in the buffer
+			chars		Number of chars in the buffer
+			words		Number of words in the buffer
+			cursor_bytes    Number of bytes before cursor position
+					(not in Visual mode)
+			cursor_chars    Number of chars before cursor position
+					(not in Visual mode)
+			cursor_words    Number of words before cursor position
+					(not in Visual mode)
+			visual_bytes    Number of bytes visually selected
+					(only in Visual mode)
+			visual_chars    Number of chars visually selected
+					(only in Visual mode)
+			visual_words    Number of words visually selected
+					(only in Visual mode)
+
+
+							*writefile()*
+writefile({object}, {fname} [, {flags}])
+		When {object} is a |List| write it to file {fname}.  Each list
+		item is separated with a NL.  Each list item must be a String
+		or Number.
+		When {flags} contains "b" then binary mode is used: There will
+		not be a NL after the last list item.  An empty item at the
+		end does cause the last line in the file to end in a NL.
+
+		When {object} is a |Blob| write the bytes to file {fname}
+		unmodified.
+
+		When {flags} contains "a" then append mode is used, lines are
+		appended to the file: >
+			:call writefile(["foo"], "event.log", "a")
+			:call writefile(["bar"], "event.log", "a")
+<
+		When {flags} contains "s" then fsync() is called after writing
+		the file.  This flushes the file to disk, if possible.  This
+		takes more time but avoids losing the file if the system
+		crashes.
+		When {flags} does not contain "S" or "s" then fsync() is
+		called if the 'fsync' option is set.
+		When {flags} contains "S" then fsync() is not called, even
+		when 'fsync' is set.
+
+		All NL characters are replaced with a NUL character.
+		Inserting CR characters needs to be done before passing {list}
+		to writefile().
+		An existing file is overwritten, if possible.
+		When the write fails -1 is returned, otherwise 0.  There is an
+		error message if the file can't be created or when writing
+		fails.
+		Also see |readfile()|.
+		To copy a file byte for byte: >
+			:let fl = readfile("foo", "b")
+			:call writefile(fl, "foocopy", "b")
+
+<		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			GetText()->writefile("thefile")
+
+
+xor({expr}, {expr})					*xor()*
+		Bitwise XOR on the two arguments.  The arguments are converted
+		to a number.  A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error.
+		Example: >
+			:let bits = xor(bits, 0x80)
+<
+		Can also be used as a |method|: >
+			:let bits = bits->xor(0x80)
+<
+
+==============================================================================
+3. Feature list						*feature-list*
+
+There are three types of features:
+1.  Features that are only supported when they have been enabled when Vim
+    was compiled |+feature-list|.  Example: >
+	:if has("cindent")
+<							*gui_running*
+2.  Features that are only supported when certain conditions have been met.
+    Example: >
+	:if has("gui_running")
+<							*has-patch*
+3.  Beyond a certain version or at a certain version and including a specific
+    patch.  The "patch-7.4.248" feature means that the Vim version is 7.5 or
+    later, or it is version 7.4 and patch 248 was included.  Example: >
+	:if has("patch-7.4.248")
+<    Note that it's possible for patch 248 to be omitted even though 249 is
+    included.  Only happens when cherry-picking patches.
+    Note that this form only works for patch 7.4.237 and later, before that
+    you need to check for the patch and the  v:version.  Example (checking
+    version 6.2.148 or later): >
+	:if v:version > 602 || (v:version == 602 && has("patch148"))
+
+Hint: To find out if Vim supports backslashes in a file name (MS-Windows),
+use: `if exists('+shellslash')`
+
+
+acl			Compiled with |ACL| support.
+all_builtin_terms	Compiled with all builtin terminals enabled.
+amiga			Amiga version of Vim.
+arabic			Compiled with Arabic support |Arabic|.
+arp			Compiled with ARP support (Amiga).
+autocmd			Compiled with autocommand support. (always true)
+autochdir		Compiled with support for 'autochdir'
+autoservername		Automatically enable |clientserver|
+balloon_eval		Compiled with |balloon-eval| support.
+balloon_multiline	GUI supports multiline balloons.
+beos			BeOS version of Vim.
+browse			Compiled with |:browse| support, and browse() will
+			work.
+browsefilter		Compiled with support for |browsefilter|.
+bsd			Compiled on an OS in the BSD family (excluding macOS).
+builtin_terms		Compiled with some builtin terminals.
+byte_offset		Compiled with support for 'o' in 'statusline'
+channel			Compiled with support for |channel| and |job|
+cindent			Compiled with 'cindent' support.
+clientserver		Compiled with remote invocation support |clientserver|.
+clipboard		Compiled with 'clipboard' support.
+clipboard_working	Compiled with 'clipboard' support and it can be used.
+cmdline_compl		Compiled with |cmdline-completion| support.
+cmdline_hist		Compiled with |cmdline-history| support.
+cmdline_info		Compiled with 'showcmd' and 'ruler' support.
+comments		Compiled with |'comments'| support.
+compatible		Compiled to be very Vi compatible.
+conpty			Platform where |ConPTY| can be used.
+cryptv			Compiled with encryption support |encryption|.
+cscope			Compiled with |cscope| support.
+cursorbind		Compiled with |'cursorbind'| (always true)
+debug			Compiled with "DEBUG" defined.
+dialog_con		Compiled with console dialog support.
+dialog_gui		Compiled with GUI dialog support.
+diff			Compiled with |vimdiff| and 'diff' support.
+digraphs		Compiled with support for digraphs.
+directx			Compiled with support for DirectX and 'renderoptions'.
+dnd			Compiled with support for the "~ register |quote_~|.
+drop_file		Compiled with |drop_file| support.
+ebcdic			Compiled on a machine with ebcdic character set.
+emacs_tags		Compiled with support for Emacs tags.
+eval			Compiled with expression evaluation support.  Always
+			true, of course!
+ex_extra		|+ex_extra| (always true)
+extra_search		Compiled with support for |'incsearch'| and
+			|'hlsearch'|
+farsi			Support for Farsi was removed |farsi|.
+file_in_path		Compiled with support for |gf| and |<cfile>|
+filterpipe		When 'shelltemp' is off pipes are used for shell
+			read/write/filter commands
+find_in_path		Compiled with support for include file searches
+			|+find_in_path|.
+float			Compiled with support for |Float|.
+fname_case		Case in file names matters (for Amiga and MS-Windows
+			this is not present).
+folding			Compiled with |folding| support.
+footer			Compiled with GUI footer support. |gui-footer|
+fork			Compiled to use fork()/exec() instead of system().
+gettext			Compiled with message translation |multi-lang|
+gui			Compiled with GUI enabled.
+gui_athena		Compiled with Athena GUI.
+gui_gnome		Compiled with Gnome support (gui_gtk is also defined).
+gui_gtk			Compiled with GTK+ GUI (any version).
+gui_gtk2		Compiled with GTK+ 2 GUI (gui_gtk is also defined).
+gui_gtk3		Compiled with GTK+ 3 GUI (gui_gtk is also defined).
+gui_haiku		Compiled with Haiku GUI.
+gui_mac			Compiled with Macintosh GUI.
+gui_motif		Compiled with Motif GUI.
+gui_photon		Compiled with Photon GUI.
+gui_running		Vim is running in the GUI, or it will start soon.
+gui_win32		Compiled with MS-Windows Win32 GUI.
+gui_win32s		idem, and Win32s system being used (Windows 3.1)
+haiku			Haiku version of Vim.
+hangul_input		Compiled with Hangul input support. |hangul|
+hpux			HP-UX version of Vim.
+iconv			Can use iconv() for conversion.
+insert_expand		Compiled with support for CTRL-X expansion commands in
+			Insert mode. (always true)
+job			Compiled with support for |channel| and |job|
+ipv6			Compiled with support for IPv6 networking in |channel|.
+jumplist		Compiled with |jumplist| support.
+keymap			Compiled with 'keymap' support.
+lambda			Compiled with |lambda| support.
+langmap			Compiled with 'langmap' support.
+libcall			Compiled with |libcall()| support.
+linebreak		Compiled with 'linebreak', 'breakat', 'showbreak' and
+			'breakindent' support.
+linux			Linux version of Vim.
+lispindent		Compiled with support for lisp indenting.
+listcmds		Compiled with commands for the buffer list |:files|
+			and the argument list |arglist|.
+localmap		Compiled with local mappings and abbr. |:map-local|
+lua			Compiled with Lua interface |Lua|.
+mac			Any Macintosh version of Vim  cf. osx
+macunix			Synonym for osxdarwin
+menu			Compiled with support for |:menu|.
+mksession		Compiled with support for |:mksession|.
+modify_fname		Compiled with file name modifiers. |filename-modifiers|
+			(always true)
+mouse			Compiled with support for mouse.
+mouse_dec		Compiled with support for Dec terminal mouse.
+mouse_gpm		Compiled with support for gpm (Linux console mouse)
+mouse_gpm_enabled	GPM mouse is working
+mouse_netterm		Compiled with support for netterm mouse.
+mouse_pterm		Compiled with support for qnx pterm mouse.
+mouse_sysmouse		Compiled with support for sysmouse (*BSD console mouse)
+mouse_sgr		Compiled with support for sgr mouse.
+mouse_urxvt		Compiled with support for urxvt mouse.
+mouse_xterm		Compiled with support for xterm mouse.
+mouseshape		Compiled with support for 'mouseshape'.
+multi_byte		Compiled with support for 'encoding' (always true)
+multi_byte_encoding	'encoding' is set to a multibyte encoding.
+multi_byte_ime		Compiled with support for IME input method.
+multi_lang		Compiled with support for multiple languages.
+mzscheme		Compiled with MzScheme interface |mzscheme|.
+nanotime		Compiled with sub-second time stamp checks.
+netbeans_enabled	Compiled with support for |netbeans| and connected.
+netbeans_intg		Compiled with support for |netbeans|.
+num64			Compiled with 64-bit |Number| support.
+ole			Compiled with OLE automation support for Win32.
+osx			Compiled for macOS  cf. mac
+osxdarwin		Compiled for macOS, with |mac-darwin-feature|
+packages		Compiled with |packages| support.
+path_extra		Compiled with up/downwards search in 'path' and 'tags'
+perl			Compiled with Perl interface.
+persistent_undo		Compiled with support for persistent undo history.
+postscript		Compiled with PostScript file printing.
+printer			Compiled with |:hardcopy| support.
+profile			Compiled with |:profile| support.
+python			Python 2.x interface available. |has-python|
+python_compiled		Compiled with Python 2.x interface. |has-python|
+python_dynamic		Python 2.x interface is dynamically loaded. |has-python|
+python3			Python 3.x interface available. |has-python|
+python3_compiled	Compiled with Python 3.x interface. |has-python|
+python3_dynamic		Python 3.x interface is dynamically loaded. |has-python|
+pythonx			Python 2.x and/or 3.x interface available. |python_x|
+qnx			QNX version of Vim.
+quickfix		Compiled with |quickfix| support.
+reltime			Compiled with |reltime()| support.
+rightleft		Compiled with 'rightleft' support.
+ruby			Compiled with Ruby interface |ruby|.
+scrollbind		Compiled with 'scrollbind' support. (always true)
+showcmd			Compiled with 'showcmd' support.
+signs			Compiled with |:sign| support.
+smartindent		Compiled with 'smartindent' support.
+sodium			Compiled with libsodium for better crypt support
+sound			Compiled with sound support, e.g. `sound_playevent()`
+spell			Compiled with spell checking support |spell|.
+startuptime		Compiled with |--startuptime| support.
+statusline		Compiled with support for 'statusline', 'rulerformat'
+			and special formats of 'titlestring' and 'iconstring'.
+sun			SunOS version of Vim.
+sun_workshop		Support for Sun |workshop| has been removed.
+syntax			Compiled with syntax highlighting support |syntax|.
+syntax_items		There are active syntax highlighting items for the
+			current buffer.
+system			Compiled to use system() instead of fork()/exec().
+tag_binary		Compiled with binary searching in tags files
+			|tag-binary-search|.
+tag_old_static		Support for old static tags was removed, see
+			|tag-old-static|.
+tcl			Compiled with Tcl interface.
+termguicolors		Compiled with true color in terminal support.
+terminal		Compiled with |terminal| support.
+terminfo		Compiled with terminfo instead of termcap.
+termresponse		Compiled with support for |t_RV| and |v:termresponse|.
+textobjects		Compiled with support for |text-objects|.
+textprop		Compiled with support for |text-properties|.
+tgetent			Compiled with tgetent support, able to use a termcap
+			or terminfo file.
+timers			Compiled with |timer_start()| support.
+title			Compiled with window title support |'title'|.
+toolbar			Compiled with support for |gui-toolbar|.
+ttyin			input is a terminal (tty)
+ttyout			output is a terminal (tty)
+unix			Unix version of Vim. *+unix*
+unnamedplus		Compiled with support for "unnamedplus" in 'clipboard'
+user_commands		User-defined commands. (always true)
+vartabs			Compiled with variable tabstop support |'vartabstop'|.
+vcon			Win32: Virtual console support is working, can use
+			'termguicolors'. Also see |+vtp|.
+vertsplit		Compiled with vertically split windows |:vsplit|.
+			(always true)
+vim_starting		True while initial source'ing takes place. |startup|
+			*vim_starting*
+viminfo			Compiled with viminfo support.
+vimscript-1		Compiled Vim script version 1 support
+vimscript-2		Compiled Vim script version 2 support
+vimscript-3		Compiled Vim script version 3 support
+virtualedit		Compiled with 'virtualedit' option. (always true)
+visual			Compiled with Visual mode. (always true)
+visualextra		Compiled with extra Visual mode commands. (always
+			true) |blockwise-operators|.
+vms			VMS version of Vim.
+vreplace		Compiled with |gR| and |gr| commands. (always true)
+vtp			Compiled for vcon support |+vtp| (check vcon to find
+			out if it works in the current console).
+wildignore		Compiled with 'wildignore' option.
+wildmenu		Compiled with 'wildmenu' option.
+win16			old version for MS-Windows 3.1 (always false)
+win32			Win32 version of Vim (MS-Windows 95 and later, 32 or
+			64 bits)
+win32unix		Win32 version of Vim, using Unix files (Cygwin)
+win64			Win64 version of Vim (MS-Windows 64 bit).
+win95			Win32 version for MS-Windows 95/98/ME (always false)
+winaltkeys		Compiled with 'winaltkeys' option.
+windows			Compiled with support for more than one window.
+			(always true)
+writebackup		Compiled with 'writebackup' default on.
+xfontset		Compiled with X fontset support |xfontset|.
+xim			Compiled with X input method support |xim|.
+xpm			Compiled with pixmap support.
+xpm_w32			Compiled with pixmap support for Win32. (Only for
+			backward compatibility. Use "xpm" instead.)
+xsmp			Compiled with X session management support.
+xsmp_interact		Compiled with interactive X session management support.
+xterm_clipboard		Compiled with support for xterm clipboard.
+xterm_save		Compiled with support for saving and restoring the
+			xterm screen.
+x11			Compiled with X11 support.
+
+
+==============================================================================
+4. Matching a pattern in a String			*string-match*
+
+This is common between several functions.  A regexp pattern as explained at
+|pattern| is normally used to find a match in the buffer lines.  When a
+pattern is used to find a match in a String, almost everything works in the
+same way.  The difference is that a String is handled like it is one line.
+When it contains a "\n" character, this is not seen as a line break for the
+pattern.  It can be matched with a "\n" in the pattern, or with ".".  Example:
+>
+	:let a = "aaaa\nxxxx"
+	:echo matchstr(a, "..\n..")
+	aa
+	xx
+	:echo matchstr(a, "a.x")
+	a
+	x
+
+Don't forget that "^" will only match at the first character of the String and
+"$" at the last character of the string.  They don't match after or before a
+"\n".
+
+ vim:tw=78:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl: